B72G

EXCELON®72
General Purpose Filter/Regulator
1/4", 3/8" Port Sizes

● EXCELON design allows in-line or modular

installation with other Excelon 72 products

● High efficiency water and particle removal

● Quick release bayonet bowl

● Highly visible, prismatic liquid level indicator lens on

metal bowls

● Full flow gauge ports

● Balanced valve design for optimum pressure control

● Push to lock adjusting knob with tamper resistant

accessory

● Modular installations with EXCELON 72, 73, and 74

series can be made to suit particular applications
Technical Data
Fluid: Compressed air
Maximum pressure:
Transparent bowl: 10 bar (150 psig)
Metal bowl:
Manual or semi automatic drain: 17 bar (250 psig) Materials:
Automatic drain: 10 bar (150 psig) Body: Zinc
Operating temperature*: Bonnet: Acetal
Transparent bowl: -20° to +50°C (0° to +125°F) Valve: Brass
Metal bowl: -20° to +65°C (0° to +150°F) Bowl:
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2°C (+35°F). Transparent: Polycarbonate
Partical removal: 5 µm, 25 µm or 40 µm. Within ISO 8573-1, Guard for transparent bowl: Zinc
Class 3 and Class 5 Metal: Zinc
Typical flow at 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar Metal bowl liquid level indicator lens:
(90 psig) set pressure and a droop of 1 bar (15 psig) from set: Transparent nylon
38 dm3/s (80 scfm) Element: Sintered polypropylene
Manual drain connection: 7/16-24 UNS male for 1/4" tube nut and Elastomers: Neoprene and nitrile
ferrule
Semi automatic drain connection: Push on 8 mm (5/16") ID tube Ordering Information
Semi automatic drain operating conditions (pressure operated): See Ordering Information on the following
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,1 bar (1.5 psig) pages.
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,1 bar (1.5 psig)
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 0,5 dm3/s (1 scfm) ISO Symbols
Manual operation: Lift stem to drain bowl
Automatic drain connection: 1/8"
Automatic drain operating conditions (float operated):
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,3 bar (5 psig)
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,2 bar (3 psig)
Automatic and Manual Drain
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 0,1 dm3/s (0.2 scfm) Semi Automatic Drain Relieving
Manual operation: Depress pin inside drain outlet to drain bowl Relieving
Gauge ports:
1/8" PTF with PTF main ports
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO Rc main ports
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO G main ports
Nominal bowl size: Automatic and Manual Drain
Short bowl: 56 ml (1.9 fluid ounce) Semi Automatic Drain Non Relieving
Long bowl: 65 ml (2.2 fluid ounce) Non Relieving

4/98 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.160.300.01

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B72G

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

psig

bar g

psig

bar g
PORT SIZE: 1/4" ELEMENT: 40 µm PORT SIZE: 1/4" ELEMENT: 40 µm
12 INLET PRESSURE: 7 bar g (100 psig) 12 INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar g (150 psig)
RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig)
150 150
OUTLET PRESSURE

OUTLET PRESSURE
9 9
120 120

90 6 90 6

60 60

3 3
30 30

0 0 0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 dm3/s 0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 scfm 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 scfm

AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

Ordering Information. Models listed include ISO G threads, knob adjustment, semi automatic drain, transparent bowl without guard,
40 µm element, relieving diaphragm, 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) outlet pressure adjustment range* without gauge.
Port Size Model Flow† dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lb)
G1/4 B72G-2GK-ST3-RMN 38 (80) 0,52 (1.15)
G3/8 B72G-3GK-ST3-RMN 38 (80) 0,52 (1.15)
† Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set pressure and a 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set.

Alternative Models
B 7 2 G - ★ ★ ★ - ★★ ★ - ★★ ★
Port Size Substitute Gauge Substitute
1/4" 2 With G
3/8" 3 Without N

Threads Substitute Outlet Pressure Adjustment Range* Substitute

PTF A 0,3 to 2 bar (5 to 30 psig) C
ISO Rc taper B 0,3 to 4 bar (5 to 60 psig) F
ISO G parallel G 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) M

Adjustment Substitute Diaphragm Substitute

Knob K Relieving R
T-bar T Non relieving N

Element Substitute
5 µm 1
* Outlet pressure can be adjusted to 25 µm 2
pressures in excess of, and less than, 40 µm 3
those specified. Do not use these units to
control pressures outside of the specified Bowl Substitute
ranges. Metal with liquid level indicator D
Transparent without guard T
** Supplied in long bowl options only
Long transparent without guard L
Long transparent with guard W

Drain Substitute
1/4 turn manual Q
Semi automatic S
Auto drain** A

N/AL.8.160.300.02 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 4/98

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B72G

Accessories

Quikclamp and Tamper Resistant

Wall Mounting Bracket Quikclamp Wall Bracket Neck Mounting Bracket Panel Nut Cover and Seal wire
4224-50 4214-52 74316-50 Plastic: 4248-89 4255-51
Includes plastic panel nut Seal Wire: 2117-01

Ø 40 mm
Pressure Gauge R1/8 Connection 1/8 PTF Connection
4 bar (60 psig): 18-013-990 18-013-211
10 bar (150 psig): 18-013-989 18-013-212
25 bar (360 psig): 18-013-908

Dimensions mm (inches)
Panel mounting hole diameter:
40 mm (1.57") 50 (1.97) 63 (2.48)
Panel thickness:
0 to 4 mm (0" to 0.16")
35 (1.38) 48 (1.89)

35 (1.38) 48 (1.89)
26 (1.01)
26 (1.01)

73 (2.89)

95 (3.73)
185 (7.27)†

185 (7.27)†

185 (7.27)†
192 (7.56)
134 (5.27) *

134 (5.27) *
134 (5.27) *

141 (5.53)

Metal Bowl Transparent Bowl Transparent Bowl Transparent Bowl with T-bar
or Guarded Transparent Bowl
with Automatic Drain

* For semi automatic drain add 30 mm (1.17") to 1/4 turn manual drain
shown.
† Minimum clearance required to remove bowl. For semi automatic drain
add 30 mm (1.17") to 1/4 turn manual drain shown.

4/98 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.160.300.03

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B72G

Bracket Mounting
Wall Bracket Quikclamp and Quikclamp Wall Bracket
Use 4 mm (5/32") screws to mount bracket to wall. Use 5 mm (3/16") screws to mount bracket to wall.

42 (1.65)

Port CL
14 (0.55) 38 (1.50)

38(1.50)

60 (2.36)
Port C
L

59 (2.32)
74 (2.91)
20 (0.80)
4 (0.16)

12 (0.47)
5 (0.20)
39 (1.54)

51 (2.00)
6 (0.24)

Port C
L
18.6 (0.73)

Neck Mounting for B72, R72, V72, includes plastic panel nut Bracket Kit Reference
Use 4 mm (5/32") screws to mount bracket to wall.
Item Part Number
Wall bracket 4224-50
49 (1.93)
Neck mounting wall bracket 74316-50
Quikclamp and Quikclamp wall bracket 4214-52
38 (1.50)

Port CL
4,4 (0.17)

7 (0.28)

30 (1.18)
34 (1.34)

Port CL

Service Kits
Item Type Part Number
Relieving 4383-500
Service kit
Non relieving 4383-501
5 µm 5925-03 Warning
Replacement elements 25 µm 5925-01
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
40 µm 5925-02 systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and
Liquid level lens kit Prismatic 4380-030 temperatures can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
1/4 turn manual 619-50 Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
Replacement drains Semi automatic 5379-RK non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult NORGREN.
Automatic 4000-50R Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid
power systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned
Service kit includes diaphragm assembly, valve assembly, to consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
valve spring, louvre o-ring, bowl o-ring, drain seal. systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.
Water vapor will pass through these units and will condense into
liquid if air temperature drops in the downstream system. Install an air
dryer if water condensation could have a detrimental effect on the
application.

N/AL.8.160.300.04 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 4/98

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B73G

EXCELON® 73
Filter/Regulator
1/4", 3/8", 1/2" Port Sizes

● EXCELON design allows in-line or modular

installation

● Quick release bayonet bowl

● Highly visible, prismatic liquid level indicator lens

● Full flow gauge ports

● Balanced valve design minimizes effect of variation in

the inlet pressure on the outlet pressure

● Modular installations with EXCELON 72, 73, and 74

series can be made to suit particular applications

Technical Data Materials:

Fluid: Compressed air Body: Aluminum
Maximum pressure: Bonnet: Aluminum
Transparent bowl: 10 bar (150 psig) Valve: Brass
Metal bowl: 17 bar (250 psig) Bowl:
Operating temperature*: Transparent: Polycarbonate
Transparent bowl: -20° to +50°C (0° to +125°F) Transparent with guard: Polycarbonate,
Metal bowl: -20° to +80°C (0° to +175°F) steel guard
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2°C Metal: Aluminum
(+35°F). Metal bowl liquid level indicator lens:
Particle removal: 5 µm, 25 µm or 40 µm filter element Transparent nylon
Air quality: Within ISO 8573-1, Class 3 and Class 5 (particulates) Element: Sintered polypropylene
Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) Elastomers: Neoprene and nitrile
set pressure and 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set:
50 dm3/s (106 scfm) Ordering Information
Manual drain connection: 1/8" See Ordering Information on the following
Automatic drain connection: 1/8" pages.
Automatic drain operating conditions (float operated):
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,3 bar ISO Symbols
(5 psig)
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,2 bar (3 psig)
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 0,1 dm3/s (0.2 scfm)
Manual operation: Depress pin inside drain outlet to drain bowl
Automatic Drain, Relieving Manual Drain, Relieving
Nominal bowl size: 0,1 litre (3.5 fluid ounce)
Gauge ports:
1⁄4 PTF with PTF main ports
Rc1/4 with ISO Rc main ports
Rc1/8 with ISO G main ports
Automatic Drain, Non-Relieving Manual Drain, Non-Relieving

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

7/98 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.180.300.01
 B73G

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

psig

bar
psig

PORT SIZE: 3/8"

bar

PORT SIZE: 3/8"

ELEMENT: 40 µm ELEMENT: 40 µm
INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar (150 psig) INLET PRESSURE: 7 bar (100 psig)
RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig)
100 100

OUTLET PRESSURE
OUTLET PRESSURE

6 6
80 80

60 60 4
4

40 40

2 2
20 20

0 0 0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 dm3/s 0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s

0 40 80 120 160 200 scfm 0 20 40 60 80 100 scfm

AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

Ordering Information. Models listed include ISO G parallel threads, knob adjustment, automatic drain, metal bowl with liquid level
indicator, 40 µm element, relieving diaphragm, and 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) outlet pressure adjustment range*.
Main Port Size Model Number Flow† dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lb)
G1/4 B73G-2GK-AD3-RMN Waiting on lab test 0,7 (1.5)
G3/8 B73G-3GK-AD3-RMN 50 (106) 0,7 (1.5)
G1/2 B73G-4GK-AD3-RMN 50 (106) 0,7 (1.5)
† Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set pressure and 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set.

Alternative Models B 7 3 G - ★ ★ ★ - ★★ ★ - ★★ ★
Port Size Substitute Gauge Substitute
1/4" 2 With G
3/8" 3 Without N
1/2" 4

Threads Substitute
PTF A Outlet Pressure Adjustment Range* Substitute
ISO Rc taper B 0,3 to 4 bar (5 to 60 psig) F
ISO G parallel G 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) M
0,7 to 17 bar (10 to 250 psig) S
Adjustment Substitute
Knob K
T-bar T Diaphragm Substitute
Relieving R
Drain Substitute Non relieving N
Automatic A
Manual, 1/4 turn Q

Bowl Substitute Element Substitute

Metal with liquid level indicator D 5 µm 1
Transparent with guard P 25 µm 2
Transparent T 40 µm 3

* Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in excess of, and less ** Units with 17 bar (250 psig) outlet pressure range are available only
than, those specified. Do not use these units to control pressures with the standard metal bowl.
outside of the specified ranges.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 7/98

N/AL.8.180.300.02 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B73G

Accessories

Neck Mounting Bracket Tamper Resistant Cover R1/4 R1/8 1/4 PTF
Wall Mounting Bracket With Zinc Panel Nut and Seal Wire†† Pressure Gauge Connection Connection Connection
4424-50 Bracket and nut: 4461-50 Cover and wire: 4455-51 4 bar (60 psig): 18-013-266 18-013-011 18-013-208
Nut: 5191-88 Replacement seal wire: 2117-01 10 bar (150 psig): 18-013-260 18-013-013 18-013-209
20 bar (300 psig): 18-013-267 18-013-014 18-013-210
†† Use padlock with shackle up to 8 mm (0.3" ) in diameter.

Dimensions mm (inches) 68 (2.68)

31 (1.22)

Panel mounting hole diameter: 48 mm (1.89" )

Panel thickness: 2 to 6 mm (0.06" to 0.25" )

62 (2.45)
56 (2.20)

50 (2.00)
12 (0.45)

103 (4.04)
96 (3.80)
(1.22)
31
207 (8.15) *

216 (8.50) *
147 (5.80)

156 (6.15)

Automatic Drain
1/4 Turn Manual Drain
* Minimum clearance to remove bowl.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

7/98 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.180.300.03
 B73G

Bracket Kit Reference Service Kits

Model Part No. Item Type Part Number
All 73 Series products 4424-50 Service kit Relieving 4383-600
R73, B73 neck mounting bracket with zinc panel nut 5203-06 Non-relieving 4383-601
5 µm 4438-01
Replacement elements 25 µm 4438-02
Bracket Mounting 40 µm 4438-03
Universal Wall Bracket for 73 Series Products Liquid level lens kit Prismatic 4380-020
Automatic 4000-51R
Use 6mm (1/4" ) screws to mount bracket to wall. Replacement drains
Manual quarter turn 619-50
60 (2.37) Service kit includes diaphragm assembly, valve assembly, valve
spring, bowl o-ring, and automatic drain seal.
38 (1.50)

67 (2.64)

Port CL

28
(1.10) 18
(0.71)
4 (0.16)
6 (0.24)
48 (1.89)

61 (2.40)
7 (0.28)

Port CL
19 (0.74)

Neck Mounting Bracket for R73 and B73

Includes zinc panel nut. Use 6mm (1/4" ) screws to mount bracket to
wall.
64 (2.5)
38 (1.5)

70 (2.75)

38
(1.5)
17 (0.66)
38 (1.5)

(1.0)

7 (0.27)
25

Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and
temperatures can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult Norgren.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.
Water vapor will pass through these units and will condense into liquid
if air temperature drops in the downstream system. Install an air dryer if
water condensation could have a detrimental effect on the application.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 7/98

N/AL.8.180.300.04 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B07

Miniature Series 07
General Purpose Filter/Regulator
1/8" and 1/4" Port Sizes

● Compact design

● Full flow gauge ports

● Low torque, non-rising adjusting knob

● Snap action knob locks pressure setting when

pushed in

● Standard relieving models allow reduction of outlet

pressure even when the system is dead-ended

● Protects air operated devices by removing liquid and

solids contaminants

● Screw-on bowl reduces maintenance time

● Can be disassembled without the use of tools or

removal from the air line

Technical Data
Fluid: Compressed air
Maximum pressure:
Transparent bowl: 10 bar (150 psig) Ordering Information
Metal bowl: 17 bar (250 psig) See Ordering Information on the following
Operating temperature:* pages.
Transparent bowl: -20° to +50°C (0° to +125°F)
Metal bowl: -20° to +65°C (0° to +150°F)
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2°C (+35°F)
Particle removal: 5 µm or 40 µm filter element
Air quality: Within ISO 8573-1, Class 3 and Class 5 (particulates)
Typical flow at 10 bar (100 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set
ISO Symbols
pressure and a droop of 1 bar (15 psig) from set:
1/8" Ports: 6,2 dm3/s (13 scfm) with 5 µm element
1/4" Ports: 6,5 dm3/s (14 scfm) with 5 µm element
Nominal bowl size: 31 ml (1 fluid ounce)
Gauge ports:
1/8" PTF with PTF main ports
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO Rc main ports Automatic Drain Manual Drain
Relieving Relieving
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO G main ports
Drain connection: 1/8" pipe
Automatic drain operation: Spitter type drain operates momentarily
when a rapid change in air flow occurs or when the supply
pressure is reduced.
Materials:
Body: Zinc Automatic Drain Manual Drain
Bonnet: Acetal Non Relieving Non Relieving
Valve: Brass/nitrile
Valve seat: Acetal
Bowl:
Transparent: Polycarbonate
Metal: Zinc
Element: Sintered polypropylene
Elastomers: Nitrile

7/97 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.300.300.01

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B07

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
psig

bar g

PORT SIZE: 1/4"

8 ELEMENT: 40 µm
INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar g (150 psig)
RANGE 0,3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig)
100
OUTLET PRESSURE

6
80

60 4

40

2
20

0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 dm3/s

0 4 8 12 16 20 24 scfm
AIR FLOW

Ordering Information. Models listed include ISO G threads, transparent bowl, relieving diaphragm, automatic drain, 40 µm
element, 0,3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig) outlet pressure adjustment range* .

Port Size Model Number Flow† dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lbs)

G1/8 B07-101-A3KG 6,2 dm3/s (13) 0,26 (0.57)
G1/4 B07-201-A3KG 6,5 dm3/s (14) 0,26 (0.57)
† Typical flow with 7 bar (100 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set pressure and a 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set.

Alternative Models B 0 7 - ★ ★ ★- ★ ★ ★ ★
Port Size Substitute Threads Substitute
1/8" 1 PTF A
1/4" 2 ISO Rc taper B
ISO G parallel G
Bowl Relief Type Gauge Substitute
Transparent Relieving Without 01 Outlet Pressure Adjustment Ranges* Substitute
Transparent Non relieving Without 03 0.1 to 0.7 bar (1 to 10 psig) A
Metal Relieving Without 33 0.3 to 3.5 bar (5 to 50 psig) E
Metal Non relieving Without 35 0.3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig) K
Metal Relieving Without 05** 0.3 to 10 bar (5 to 145 psig) M**
Metal Non relieving Without 07**
Element Substitute
* Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in excess of,
5 µm 1
and less than, those specified. Do not use these units to
40 µm 3
control pressures outside of the specified ranges.
** When specifying 10 bar (150 psig) unit, eg. B07-205-A3MG, Drain Substitute
also note correct code at 5th and 6th digits. Automatic A
Manual M
Accessories

Wall Mounting Bracket and Tamper Resistant Ø 40 mm

Panel Nut for P1H Unit Panel Nut Field Modification Pressure Gauge R1/8 Connection 1/8" PTF Connection
Plastic: 18-025-003 Plastic: 2962-89 Knob and screw: 18-001-092 2 bar (30 psig): — 18-013-214
Metal: 2962-04 Screw only: 6097-08 4 bar (60 psig): 18-013-990 18-013-211
10 bar (150 psig): 18-013-989 18-013-212
25 bar (350 psig): 18-013-908 —

N/AL.8.300.300.02 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 7/97

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B07

Dimensions mm (inches) 41 (1.63)

Panel mounting hole diameter 30 mm (1.19")

38 (1.50)
Panel thickness 0 to 6 mm (0 to 0.25")

54 (2.13)
38 (1.50)

28 (1.1) 28 (1.1)

68 (2.67)

68 (2.67)
28 (1.12)
28 (1.12)

210 (8.26)*
214 (8.41)*

160 (6.29)
164 (6.44)

Manual Drain Automatic Drain

* Minimum clearance to remove bowl

Bracket Mounting Bracket Kit Reference

Use 3 mm (1/8") screws to mount bracket to wall. Item Part Number
All models 18-025-003
(1.09 to 1.73)
28 to 44
63 (2.47)

38 (1.50)
24
(0.93)
7 (0.29)
6 (0.22)

46 (1.81)
38 (1.49)

Service Kits
Item Type Part number
Relieving models, 40 µm element 3820-14
Service kit
Non relieving models, 40 µm element 3820-13
Manual 773-03
Replacement drains
Automatic 3654-02
Service kit includes slip ring, diaphragm, valve seat with o-ring, valve,
valve spring, element, element gasket, and bowl o-ring.

7/97 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.300.300.03

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B07

Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures
can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult NORGREN.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.
Water vapor will pass through these units and will condense into liquid
if air temperature drops in the downstream system. Install an air dryer if
water condensation could have a detrimental effect on the application.

N/AL.8.300.300.04 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 7/97

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B07

Miniature Series 07
General Purpose Filter/Regulator
1/8" and 1/4" Port Sizes

● Compact design

● Full flow gauge ports

● Low torque, non-rising adjusting knob

● Snap action knob locks pressure setting when

pushed in

● Standard relieving models allow reduction of outlet

pressure even when the system is dead-ended

● Protects air operated devices by removing liquid and

solids contaminants

● Screw-on bowl reduces maintenance time

● Can be disassembled without the use of tools or

removal from the air line

Technical Data
Fluid: Compressed air
Maximum pressure:
Transparent bowl: 10 bar (150 psig) Ordering Information
Metal bowl: 17 bar (250 psig) See Ordering Information on the following
Operating temperature:* pages.
Transparent bowl: -20° to +50°C (0° to +125°F)
Metal bowl: -20° to +65°C (0° to +150°F)
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2°C (+35°F)
Particle removal: 5 µm or 40 µm filter element
Air quality: Within ISO 8573-1, Class 3 and Class 5 (particulates)
Typical flow at 10 bar (100 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set
ISO Symbols
pressure and a droop of 1 bar (15 psig) from set:
1/8" Ports: 6,2 dm3/s (13 scfm) with 5 µm element
1/4" Ports: 6,5 dm3/s (14 scfm) with 5 µm element
Nominal bowl size: 31 ml (1 fluid ounce)
Gauge ports:
1/8" PTF with PTF main ports
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO Rc main ports Automatic Drain Manual Drain
Relieving Relieving
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO G main ports
Drain connection: 1/8" pipe
Automatic drain operation: Spitter type drain operates momentarily
when a rapid change in air flow occurs or when the supply
pressure is reduced.
Materials:
Body: Zinc Automatic Drain Manual Drain
Bonnet: Acetal Non Relieving Non Relieving
Valve: Brass/nitrile
Valve seat: Acetal
Bowl:
Transparent: Polycarbonate
Metal: Zinc
Element: Sintered polypropylene
Elastomers: Nitrile

7/97 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.300.300.01

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B07

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
psig

bar g

PORT SIZE: 1/4"

8 ELEMENT: 40 µm
INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar g (150 psig)
RANGE 0,3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig)
100
OUTLET PRESSURE

6
80

60 4

40

2
20

0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 dm3/s

0 4 8 12 16 20 24 scfm
AIR FLOW

Ordering Information. Models listed include ISO G threads, transparent bowl, relieving diaphragm, automatic drain, 40 µm
element, 0,3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig) outlet pressure adjustment range* .

Port Size Model Number Flow† dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lbs)

G1/8 B07-101-A3KG 6,2 dm3/s (13) 0,26 (0.57)
G1/4 B07-201-A3KG 6,5 dm3/s (14) 0,26 (0.57)
† Typical flow with 7 bar (100 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set pressure and a 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set.

Alternative Models B 0 7 - ★ ★ ★- ★ ★ ★ ★
Port Size Substitute Threads Substitute
1/8" 1 PTF A
1/4" 2 ISO Rc taper B
ISO G parallel G
Bowl Relief Type Gauge Substitute
Transparent Relieving Without 01 Outlet Pressure Adjustment Ranges* Substitute
Transparent Non relieving Without 03 0.1 to 0.7 bar (1 to 10 psig) A
Metal Relieving Without 33 0.3 to 3.5 bar (5 to 50 psig) E
Metal Non relieving Without 35 0.3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig) K
Metal Relieving Without 05** 0.3 to 10 bar (5 to 145 psig) M**
Metal Non relieving Without 07**
Element Substitute
* Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in excess of,
5 µm 1
and less than, those specified. Do not use these units to
40 µm 3
control pressures outside of the specified ranges.
** When specifying 10 bar (150 psig) unit, eg. B07-205-A3MG, Drain Substitute
also note correct code at 5th and 6th digits. Automatic A
Manual M
Accessories

Wall Mounting Bracket and Tamper Resistant Ø 40 mm

Panel Nut for P1H Unit Panel Nut Field Modification Pressure Gauge R1/8 Connection 1/8" PTF Connection
Plastic: 18-025-003 Plastic: 2962-89 Knob and screw: 18-001-092 2 bar (30 psig): — 18-013-214
Metal: 2962-04 Screw only: 6097-08 4 bar (60 psig): 18-013-990 18-013-211
10 bar (150 psig): 18-013-989 18-013-212
25 bar (350 psig): 18-013-908 —

N/AL.8.300.300.02 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 7/97

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B07

Dimensions mm (inches) 41 (1.63)

Panel mounting hole diameter 30 mm (1.19")

38 (1.50)
Panel thickness 0 to 6 mm (0 to 0.25")

54 (2.13)
38 (1.50)

28 (1.1) 28 (1.1)

68 (2.67)

68 (2.67)
28 (1.12)
28 (1.12)

210 (8.26)*
214 (8.41)*

160 (6.29)
164 (6.44)

Manual Drain Automatic Drain

* Minimum clearance to remove bowl

Bracket Mounting Bracket Kit Reference

Use 3 mm (1/8") screws to mount bracket to wall. Item Part Number
All models 18-025-003
(1.09 to 1.73)
28 to 44
63 (2.47)

38 (1.50)
24
(0.93)
7 (0.29)
6 (0.22)

46 (1.81)
38 (1.49)

Service Kits
Item Type Part number
Relieving models, 40 µm element 3820-14
Service kit
Non relieving models, 40 µm element 3820-13
Manual 773-03
Replacement drains
Automatic 3654-02
Service kit includes slip ring, diaphragm, valve seat with o-ring, valve,
valve spring, element, element gasket, and bowl o-ring.

7/97 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.300.300.03

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B07

Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures
can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult NORGREN.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.
Water vapor will pass through these units and will condense into liquid
if air temperature drops in the downstream system. Install an air dryer if
water condensation could have a detrimental effect on the application.

N/AL.8.300.300.04 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 7/97

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 F72G

EXCELON®72
General Purpose Filter
1/4", 3/8" Port Sizes

● EXCELON design allows in-line or modular

installation with other Excelon 72 products

● High efficiency water and particle removal

● Quick release bayonet bowl

● Highly visible, prismatic liquid level indicator lens on

metal bowls

● Optional service indicator turns from green to red

when the filter element needs to be replaced

● Optional electrical service indicator also available

● Modular installations with EXCELON 72, 73, and 74

series can be made to suit particular applications
Technical Data
Fluid: Compressed air
Maximum pressure:
Transparent bowl: 10 bar (150 psig)
Metal bowl:
Manual or semi automatic drain: 17 bar (250 psig)
Automatic drain: 10 bar (150 psig)
Materials:
Operating temperature*:
Body: Zinc
Transparent bowl: -20° to +50°C (0° to +125°F)
Bowl:
Metal bowl: -20° to +65°C (0° to +150°F)
Transparent: Polycarbonate
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2°C
(+35°F). Guard for transparent bowl: Zinc
Partical removal: 5 µm, 25 µm or 40 µm. Within ISO 8573-1, Metal: Zinc
Class 3 and Class 5 Metal bowl liquid level indicator lens:
Typical flow at 6,3 bar (90 psig) inlet pressure and 0,5 bar (7 psig) Transparent nylon
pressure drop: Element: Sintered polypropylene
5 µm element: 26 dm3/s (55 scfm) Elastomers: Neoprene and nitrile
40 µm element: 30 dm3/s (63 scfm) Optional service life indicator:
Manual drain connection: 7/16-24 UNS male for 1/4" tube nut and Body: transparent nylon.
ferrule Internal parts: acetal,
Semi automatic drain connection: Push on 8 mm (5/16") ID tube Spring stainless steel.
Semi automatic drain operating conditions (pressure operated): Elastomers nitrile
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,1 bar Ordering Information
(1.5 psig) See Ordering Information on the following
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,1 bar pages.
(1.5 psig)
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 0,5 dm3/s (1 scfm)
Manual operation: Lift stem to drain bowl
Automatic drain connection: 1/8"
ISO Symbols
Automatic drain operating conditions (float operated):
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,3 bar
(5 psig)
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,2 bar (3 psig)
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 0,1 dm3/s (0.2 scfm)
Manual operation: Depress pin inside drain outlet to drain bowl
Automatic and Manual Drain
Nominal bowl size: Semi Automatic Drain
Short bowl: 56 ml (1.9 fluid ounce)
Long bowl: 65 ml (2.2 fluid ounce)

4/98 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.160.100.01

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 F72G

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
psig

bar g

psig

bar g
PORT SIZE: 1/4" PORT SIZE: 1/4"
0,8 5 µm ELEMENT 0,8 40 µm ELEMENT

1 1
INLET PRESSURE - bar g (psig) INLET PRESSURE - bar g (psig)
PRESSURE DROP

PRESSURE DROP
0,6 0,6
8 2,5 4,0 6,3 8,0 10,0 8 2,5 4,0 6,3 8,0 10,0
(36) (58) (91) (116) (150) (36) (58) (91) (116) (150)

6 0,4 6 0,4

4 4

0,2 0,2
2 2

0 0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s 0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 scfm 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 scfm

AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

Ordering Information. Models listed include ISO G threads, semi automatic drain, transparent bowl without guard, 40 µm element.
Models do not include the service life indicator.
Port Size Model Flow† dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lb)
G1/4 F72G-2GN-ST3 30 (63) 0,52 (1.15)
G3/8 F72G-3GN-ST3 30 (63) 0,52 (1.15)
† Typical flow with 6,3 bar (90 psig) inlet pressure and a 0,5 bar (7 psig) droop from set.

Alternative Models
F 7 2 G - ★ ★ ★ - ★★ ★

Port Size Substitute Element Substitute

1/4" 2 5 µm 1
3/8" 3 25 µm 2
40 µm 3

Threads Substitute Bowl Substitute

PTF A Metal with liquid level indicator D
ISO Rc taper B Transparent without guard T
ISO G parallel G Long transparent without guard L
Long transparent with guard W

Service Life Indicator Substitute Drain Substitute

With (visual) D 1/4 turn manual Q
With (electrical) E Semi automatic S
Without N Auto drain* A
* Supplied in long bowl options only

Accessories

Quikclamp and Service Life Indicator Service Life Indicator

Wall Mounting Bracket Quikclamp Wall Bracket (visual) (electrical)
4224-50 4214-52 5797-50 4020-51R

N/AL.8.160.100.02 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 4/98

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 F72G

50 (1.97)
Dimensions mm (inches)

48 (1.89)
Service Life
Indicator

(0.75)

53 (2.10)
19
185 (7.27)†
185 (7.27)†

192 (7.56)
134 (5.27) *

134 (5.27) *

141 (5.53)
Metal Bowl Transparent Bowl Transparent Bowl
with 1/4 Turn Manual Drain with 1/4 Turn Manual Drain or Guarded Transparent Bowl
with Automatic Drain
* For semi automatic drain add 30 mm (1.17") to 1/4 turn
manual drain shown.
† Minimum clearance required to remove bowl.
For semi automatic drain add 30 mm (1.17") to 1/4 turn
manual drain shown.

Bracket Mounting
Mounting Bracket Quikclamp and Quikclamp Wall Bracket
Use 4 mm (5/32") screws to mount bracket to wall. Use 5 mm (3/16") screws to mount bracket to wall
42 (1.65) Port CL
14 (0.55) 38 (1.50)
38(1.50)

60 (2.36)

59 (2.32)
74 (2.91)

Port C
L

20 (0.80)
4 (0.16)

12 (0.47)
5 (0.20)
39 (1.54)

51 (2.00)
6 (0.24)

Port C
L
Bracket Kit Reference
18.6 (0.73)

Item Part Number

Wall Bracket 4224-50
Quikclamp and Quikclamp wall bracket 4214-52

Service Kits
Item Type Part Number
Service kit Seal and gasket 4380-500
5 µm 5925-03
Elements 25 µm 5925-01
40 µm 5925-02
Visual 5797-50
Service life indicator
Electrical 4020-51
Liquid level lens kit Prismatic 4380-030
1/4 turn manual 619-50
Replacement drains Semi automatic 5379-RK
Automatic 4000-50R
Service kit includes drain and bowl o-rings.

4/98 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.160.100.03

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 F72G

Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and
temperatures can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult NORGREN.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid
power systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned
to consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.
Water vapor will pass through these units and will condense into
liquid if air temperature drops in the downstream system. Install an air
dryer if water condensation could have a detrimental effect on the
application.

N/AL.8.160.100.04 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 4/98

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 F73G

EXCELON® 73
General Purpose Filter
1/4", 3/8", 1/2" Port Sizes

● EXCELON design allows in-line or modular

installation

● Quick release bayonet bowl

● Highly visible, prismatic liquid level indicator lens

● Optional mechanical service indicator turns from

green to red when the filter element needs to be
replaced

● Optional electrical service indicator provides

electrical output when the filter element needs to be
replaced - see page N/AL.8.900.920

● Modular installations with EXCELON 72, 73, and 74

series can be made to suit particular applications

Technical Data Materials:

Fluid: Compressed air Body: Aluminum
Maximum pressure: Bowl:
Transparent bowl: 10 bar (150 psig) Transparent: Polycarbonate
Metal bowl: 17 bar (250 psig) Transparent with guard: Polycarbonate,
Operating temperature*: steel guard
Transparent bowl: -20° to +50°C (0° to +125°F) Metal: Aluminum
Metal bowl: -20° to +80°C (0° to +175°F) Metal bowl liquid level indicator lens:
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2°C Transparent nylon
(+35°F). Element: Sintered polypropylene
Particle removal: 5 µm, 25 µm, or 40 µm filter element Elastomers: Neoprene and nitrile
Air quality: Within ISO 8573-1, Class 3 and Class 5 (particulates)
Typical flow with a 40 µm element at 6,3 bar (90 psig) inlet Ordering Information
pressure and 0,5 bar (7 psig) pressure drop: 35 dm3/s (75 scfm) See Ordering Information on the following
Manual drain connection: 1/8" pages.
Automatic drain connection: 1/8"
Automatic drain operating conditions (float operated):
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,3 bar
(5 psig)
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,2 bar (3 psig) ISO Symbols
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 0,1 dm3/s (0.2 scfm)
Manual operation: Depress pin inside drain outlet to drain bowl
Nominal bowl size: 0,1 litre (3.5 fluid ounce)

Automatic Drain Manual Drain

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

4/98 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.180.100.01
 F73G

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
bar d
psid

bar d
psid
PORT SIZE: 3/8" PORT SIZE: 3/8"
ELEMENT: 5 µm ELEMENT: 40 µm

10 10
PRESSURE DROP

PRESSURE DROP
0,6 INLET PRESSURE: bar (psig) 0,6 INLET PRESSURE: bar (psig)
8 2,5 4,0 6,3 8,0 10,0 8 2,5 4,0 6,3 8,0 10,0
(36) (58) (90) (116) (150) (36) (58) (90) (116) (150)

6 0,4 6 0,4

4 4
0,2 0,2
2 2

0 0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s 0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s
0 20 40 60 80 100 scfm 0 20 40 60 80 100 scfm
AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

Ordering information
Models listed include ISO G parallel threads, automatic drain, metal bowl with liquid level indicator, and a 40 µm element.
Port Size Model Flow* dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lb)
G1/4 F73G-2GN-AD3 29 (62) 0,50 (1.1)
G3/8 F73G-3GN-AD3 35 (75) 0,50 (1.1)
G1/2 F73G-4GN-AD3 38 (80) 0,50 (1.1)
* Typical flow with a 40 µm element at 6,3 bar (90 psig) inlet pressure and 0,5 bar (7 psig) pressure drop.

Alternative Models
F 7 3 G - ★ ★ ★ - ★★ ★
Port Size Substitute Element Substitute
1/4" 2 5 µm 1
3/8" 3 25 µm 2
1/2" 4 40 µm 3

Threads Substitute Bowl Substitute

PTF A Metal with liquid level indicator D
ISO Rc taper B Transparent with guard P
ISO G parallel G Transparent T

Service Indicator Substitute Drain Substitute

With electrical service indicator * E Automatic A
With mechanical service indicator D Manual, 1⁄4 turn Q
Without N

* See page N/AL.8.900.920 for description and specifications.

Accessories

Mechanical Service Indicator Electrical Service Indicator

Wall Mounting Bracket (Field Conversion) (Field Conversion)
4424-50 5797-50 4020-51R

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

N/AL.8.180.100.02 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
4/98
 F73G

Dimensions mm (inches)
68 (2.68)

31 (1.22)

62 (2.45)
Optional
Mechanical
Service

60 (2.36)
Indicator

25 (1.00)

216 (8.50) *
207 (8.15) *

147 (5.80)

156 (6.15)
Automatic Drain
1/4 Turn Manual Drain
* Minimum clearance required to remove bowl.

Bracket Mounting Bracket Kit Reference

Use 6 mm (1/4" ) screws to mount bracket to wall. Model Part No.
60 (2.37)
All Models 4424-50
38 (1.50)

67 (2.64)

Port CL

28
(1.10) 18
(0.71)
4 (0.16)
6 (0.24)
48 (1.89)

61 (2.40)
7 (0.28)

Port CL
19 (0.74)

Service Kits
Item Type Part Number
Service kit Seal & Gasket 4380-600
5 µm 4438-01
Replacement elements 25 µm 4438-02
40 µm 4438-03
Liquid level lens kit Prismatic 4380-020
Automatic 4000-51R
Replacement drains
Manual quarter turn 619-50
Service kit includes automatic drain seal and bowl seal.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

4/98 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.180.100.03
 F73G

Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures
can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult Norgren.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.
Water vapor will pass through these units and will condense into liquid
if air temperature drops in the downstream system. Install an air dryer if
water condensation could have a detrimental effect on the application.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

N/AL.8.180.100.04 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
4/98
 F72C

Excelon®72
Oil Removal Filter
1/4", 3/8" Port Sizes

● EXCELON design allows in-line or modular

installation with other Excelon 72 products

● High efficiency oil and particle removal

● Quick release bayonet bowl

● Highly visible, prismatic liquid level indicator lens on

metal bowls

● Standard visual service life indicator turns from green

to red when the filter element needs to be replaced

● Optional electrical service indicator also available

● Modular installations with EXCELON 72, 73, and 74

series can be made to suit particular applications

Install an F72G filter with a 5 µm filter element upstream of the

F72C filter for optimum coalescing element life.
Technical Data
Fluid: Compressed air
Maximum pressure:
Transparent bowl:
Manual or semi automatic drain: 10 bar (150 psig) Nominal bowl size:
Automatic drain: 8 bar (116 psig) Short bowl: 56 ml (1.9 fluid ounce)
Metal bowl: Long bowl: 65 ml (2.2 fluid ounce)
Manual or semi automatic drain: 17 bar (250 psig) Materials:
Automatic drain: 8 bar (116 psig) Body: Zinc
Operating temperature*: Bowl:
Transparent bowl: -20° to +50°C (0° to +125°F) Transparent: Polycarbonate
Metal bowl: -20° to +65°C (0° to +150°F) Guard for transparent bowl: Zinc
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2°C Metal: Zinc
(+35°F). Metal bowl liquid level indicator lens:
Partical removal: 0,01 µm Transparent nylon
Air quality: Within ISO 8573-1, Class 1.7.2 Element:
Maximum remaining oil content in outlet air: Synthetic fibre and polyurethane foam
0,01 ppm at +21°C (+70°F) with an inlet concentration of 17 ppm. Elastomers: Neoprene and nitrile
Maximum flow with 6,3 bar (90 psig) inlet pressure†: Service life indicator:
4,5 dm3/s (9.5 scfm) Body: transparent nylon.
† Maximum flow to maintain stated oil removal performance.
Internal parts: acetal.
Manual drain connection: 7/16-24 UNS male for 1/4" tube nut and Spring: stainless steel.
ferrule Elastomers nitrile
Semi automatic drain connection: Push on 8 mm (5/16") ID tube
Semi automatic drain operating conditions (pressure operated):
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,1 bar (1.5 psig) Ordering Information
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,1 bar (1.5 psig) See Ordering Information on the following
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 0,5 dm3/s (1 scfm) pages.
Manual operation: Lift stem to drain bowl
Automatic drain connection: 1/8" ISO Symbols
Automatic drain operating conditions (float operated):
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,3 bar (5 psig)
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,2 bar (3 psig)
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 0,1 dm3/s (0.2 scfm)
Manual operation: Depress pin inside drain outlet to drain bowl Automatic and Manual Drain
Semi Automatic Drain

4/98 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.160.105.01

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 F72C

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

psig

bar g
Inlet Pressure Maximum Flow†
0,4
bar (psig) dm3/s (scfm)
1 (15) 1,8 (3.8) 5
3 (45) 3,1 (6.6) INLET PRESSURE: bar (psig)

PRESSURE DROP
0,3
5 (70) 4,0 (8.5) 4 1,6 2,5 4,0 6,3
(23) (36) (58) (91)
8,0
6,3 (90) 4,5 (9.5) (116)
7 (100) 4,7 (10.0) 3 0,2
9 (130) 5,4 (11.4)
† Maximum flow to maintain stated oil removal performance. 2

0,1
1 PORT SIZE: 1/4"
SATURATED ELEMENT

0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 dm3/s

0 2 4 6 8 10 scfm
AIR FLOW

Ordering Information. Models listed include ISO G threads, service life indicator, semi automatic drain, transparent bowl
without guard.
Port Size Model Flow† dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lb)
G1/4 F72C-2GD-ST0 4,5 (9.5) 0,40 (0.88)
G3/8 F72C-3GD-ST0 4,5 (9.5) 0,40 (0.88)
† Maximum flow with 6,3 bar (90 psig) inlet pressure, to maintain stated oil removal characteristics.

Alternative Models
F 7 2 C - ★ ★ ★ - ★★ ★

Port Size Substitute Element Substitute

1/4" 2 Coalescing 0
3/8" 3

Bowl Substitute
Threads Substitute Metal with liquid level indicator D
PTF A Transparent without guard T
ISO Rc taper B Long transparent without guard L
ISO G parallel G Long transparent with guard W

Service Life Indicator Substitute Drain Substitute

With (visual) D 1/4 turn manual Q
With (electrical) E Semi automatic S
Without N Auto drain* A
* Supplied in long bowl options only
Available with F72G pre-filter, see catalogue pages N/AL.8.160.800.01 to 04

Accessories

Quikclamp and Service Life Indicator Service Life Indicator

Wall Mounting Bracket Quikclamp Wall Bracket (visual) (electrical)
4224-50 4214-52 5797-50 4020-51

N/AL.8.160.105.02 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 4/98

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 F72C

50 (1.97)
Dimensions mm (inches)

48 (1.89)
Service Life
Indicator

(0.75)

53 (2.10)
19
185 (7.27)†
185 (7.27)†

192 (7.56)
134 (5.27) *

134 (5.27) *

141 (5.53)
Metal Bowl Transparent Bowl Transparent Bowl
with 1/4 Turn Manual Drain with 1/4 Turn Manual Drain or Guarded Transparent Bowl
with Automatic Drain
* For semi automatic drain add 30 mm (1.17") to 1/4 turn
manual drain shown.
† Minimum clearance required to remove bowl.
For semi automatic drain add 30 mm (1.17”) to 1/4 turn
manual drain shown.

Bracket Mounting
Mounting Bracket Quikclamp and Quikclamp Wall Bracket
Use 4 mm (5/32") screws to mount bracket to wall. Use 5 mm (3/16") screws to mount bracket to wall

42 (1.65) Port CL
14 (0.55) 38 (1.50)
38(1.50)

60 (2.36)

59 (2.32)
74 (2.91)

Port C
L

20 (0.80)
4 (0.16)

12 (0.47)
5 (0.20)
39 (1.54)

51 (2.00)
6 (0.24)

Port C
L
Bracket Kit Reference
18.6 (0.73)

Item Part Number

Wall Bracket 4224-50
Quikclamp and Quikclamp Wall Bracket 4214-52

Service Kits
Item Type Part Number
Service kit Seal and gasket 4380-500
Element Coalescing 5925-09
visual 5797-50
Service Life Indicator
electrical 4020-51
Liquid level lens kit Prismatic 4380-030
1/4 turn manual 619-50
Replacement drains Semi automatic 5379-RK
Automatic 4000-50R
Service kit includes drain and bowl o-rings.

4/98 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.160.105.03

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 F72C

Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and
temperatures can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult NORGREN.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid
power systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned
to consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.
Water vapor will pass through these units and will condense into
liquid if air temperature drops in the downstream system. Install an air
dryer if water condensation could have a detrimental effect on the
application.

N/AL.8.160.105.04 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 4/98

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 R07

Miniature Series 07
General Purpose Regulator
1/8" and 1/4" Port Sizes

● Compact design

● Full flow gauge ports

● Low torque, non-rising adjusting knob

● Snap action knob locks pressure setting when

pushed in

● Standard relieving models allow reduction of outlet

pressure even when the system is dead-ended

● Can be disassembled without the use of tools or

removal from the air line

Technical Data Ordering Information

Fluid: Compressed air See Ordering Information on the following
Maximum pressure: 20 bar (300 psig) pages.
Operating temperature: -20° to +65°C (0° to +150°F) *
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures
below +2°C (+35°F).
Typical flow at 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig)
set pressure and a droop of 1 bar (15 psig) from set:
1/8" ports: 6,5 dm3/s (14 scfm)
1/4" ports: 7 dm3/s (15 scfm) ISO Symbols
Gauge ports:
1/8" PTF with PTF main ports
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO Rc main ports
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO G main ports
Materials:
Body: Zinc Relieving Non relieving
Bonnet: Acetal
Valve: Brass/nitrile
Valve seat: Acetal
Elastomers: Nitrile

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

7/97 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.300.200.01
 R07

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
psig

bar g

PORT SIZE: 1/4"

8 INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar g (150 psig)
RANGE: 0,3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig)
100
OUTLET PRESSURE

6
80

60 4

40

2
20

0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 dm3/s

0 4 8 12 16 20 24 scfm
AIR FLOW

Ordering Information. Models listed include ISO G threads, relieving diaphragm, 0,3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig) outlet pressure
adjustment range* without gauge.

Port Size Model Number Flow† dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lbs)

G1/8 R07-100-RNKG 6,5 (14) 0,19 (0.31)
G1/4 R07-200-RNKG 7 (15) 0,19 (0.31)
† Approximate flow at 7 bar (100 psig) inlet pressure, 6.3 bar (90 psig) set pressure and a droop of 1 bar (14.5 psig) from set.

Alternative Models
R 0 7 - ★★ ★ - ★★★★
Port Size Substitute Threads Substitute
1/8" 1 PTF A
1/4" 2 ISO Rc taper B
ISO G parallel G
Option Substitute
Not applicable 0 Outlet Pressure Adjustment Ranges* Substitute
0,1 to 0,7 bar (1 to 10 psig) A
Option Substitute 0,3 to 3,5 bar (5 to 50 psig) E
Standard 0 0,3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig) K
Low flow seat 2 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) M**
H.P. unit, 10 bar (150 psig) 5**
Gauges Substitute
* Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in excess of, and less With G
than, those specified. Do not use these units to control pressures Without N
outside of the specified ranges.
** When specifying 10 bar (150 psig) unit, eg. R07-205-RNMG, also Diaphragm Substitute
note correct code at 6th digit. Relieving R
Non relieving N
Accessories

Wall Mounting Bracket and Tamper Resistant Ø 40 mm

Panel Nut for P1H Unit Panel Nut Field Modification Pressure Gauge R1/8 Connection 1/8" PTF Connection
Plastic: 18-025-003 Plastic: 2962-89 Knob and screw: 18-001-092 2 bar (30 psig): — 18-013-214
Metal: 2962-04 Screw only: 6097-08 4 bar (60 psig): 18-013-990 18-013-211
10 bar (150 psig): 18-013-989 18-013-212
25 bar (350 psig): 18-013-908 —

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

N/AL.8.300.200.02 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
7/97
 R07

Dimensions mm (inches)
Panel mounting hole diameter 30 mm (1.19")
Maximum panel thickness 0 to 6 mm (0 to 0.25")

41 (1.63)
19 23
(0.73) (0.91)

38 (1.50)
54 (2.13)

40 (1.57)

28 (1.1)
64 (2.52)

75 (2.91)
24 (0.95)

Bracket Mounting Bracket Kit Reference

Use 3 mm (1/8") screws to mount bracket to wall.
Item Part Number
All models 18-025-003
(1.09 to 1.73)
28 to 44
63 (2.47)

38 (1.50)
24
(0.93)
7 (0.29)
6 (0.22)

42 (1.65)
34 (1.34)

Service Kits
Item Type Part number
Relieving 3407-02
Service kit
Non relieving 3407-01
Service kit includes slip ring, diaphragm, standard valve seat with
o-ring, valve, valve spring.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

7/97 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.300.200.03
 R07

Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air systems
only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures can
exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult NORGREN.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.
Water vapor will pass through these units and will condense into liquid
if air temperature drops in the downstream system. Install an air dryer if
water condensation could have a detrimental effect on the application.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

N/AL.8.300.200.04 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
7/97
 R72G, R72R

EXCELON®72
Pressure Regulator
1/4", 3/8" Port Sizes

● EXCELON design allows in-line or modular

installation

● Full flow gauge ports

● Balanced valve design for optimum pressure control

● Push to lock adjusting knob with tamper resistant

accessory

● R72R reverse flow option

● Modular installations with EXCELON 72, 73, and 74

series can be made to suit particular applications

Technical Data Ordering Information

Fluid: Compressed air See Ordering Information on the following
Maximum pressure: 20 bar (290 psig) pages.
Operating temperature*: -20° to +65°C (0° to +150°F)
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2°C
(+35°F).
Approximate flow at 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar
(90 psig) set pressure and a droop of 1 bar (15 psig) from set:
33 dm3/s (70 scfm) ISO Symbols
Gauge ports:
1/8" PTF with PTF main ports
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO Rc main ports
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO G main ports
Materials:
Body: Zinc
Bonnet: Acetal
Valve: Brass R72G Relieving R72G Non Relieving
Elastomers: Nitrile
Bottom plug: Acetal

R72R Relieving R72R Non Relieving

4/98 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.160.200.01

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 R72G, R72R

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
psig

bar g

PORT SIZE: 1/4"

8 INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar g (150 psig)
RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar
100
OUTLET PRESSURE

6
80

60 4

40

2
20

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 scfm

AIR FLOW

Ordering Information. Models listed include unidirectional flow, ISO G threads, knob adjustment, relieving diaphragm, 0,3 to 10 bar
(5 to 150 psig) outlet pressure adjustment range* without gauge.
Port Size Model Flow† dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lb)
G1/4 R72G-2GK-RMN 33 (70) 0,36 (0.79)
G3/8 R72G-3GK-RMN 33 (70) 0,36 (0.79)
† Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set pressure and a 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set.

Alternative Models
R 7 2 ★ - ★ ★ ★ - ★★ ★
Flow Type Substitute Gauge Substitute
Standard G With G
Reverse flow R Without N

Outlet Pressure Adjustment Range* Substitute

Port Size Substitute
0,3 to 2 bar (5 to 30 psig) C
1/4" 2
0,3 to 4 bar (5 to 60 psig) F
3/8" 3
0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) M

Threads Substitute Diaphragm Substitute

PTF A Relieving R
ISO Rc taper B Non relieving N
ISO G parallel G
Adjustment Substitute
* Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures Knob K
in excess of, and less than, those specified. T-bar T
Do not use these units to control pressures
outside of the specified ranges.
** Units with 17 bar (250 psig) outlet pressure
range are available only with the T-bar
adjustment; therefore substitute T at the 7th
digit and S at the 12th position.

N/AL.8.160.200.02 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 4/98

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 R72G, R72R

Accessories

Quikclamp and Tamper Resistant

Wall Mounting Bracket Quikclamp Wall Bracket Neck Mounting Bracket Panel Nut Cover and Seal wire
4224-50 4214-52 74316-50 Plastic: 4248-89 4255-51
Includes plastic panel nut Seal Wire: 2117-01

Ø 40 mm
Pressure Gauge R1/8 Connection 1/8 PTF Connection
4 bar (60 psig): 18-013-990 18-013-211
10 bar (150 psig): 18-013-989 18-013-212
25 bar (360 psig): 18-013-908

Dimensions mm (inches)
Panel mounting hole diameter: 40 mm (1.57")
Panel thickness: 0 to 4 mm (0" to 0.16")

63 (2.48)
48 (1.89)

48 (1.89)
35 (1.38)

35 (1.38)
26 (1.01)

26 (1.01)

102 (4.03)
73 (2.88)
33 (1.31)

33 (1.31)

50 (1.97) 50 (1.97)

4/98 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.160.200.03

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 R72G, R72R

Bracket Mounting
Wall Bracket Quikclamp and Quikclamp Wall Bracket
Use 4 mm (5/32") screws to mount bracket to wall. Use 5 mm (3/16") screws to mount bracket to wall.

42 (1.65)

Port CL
14 (0.55) 38 (1.50)

38(1.50)

60 (2.36)
Port C
L

59 (2.32)
74 (2.91)
20 (0.80)
4 (0.16)

12 (0.47)
5 (0.20)
39 (1.54)

51 (2.00)
6 (0.24)

Port C
L
18.6 (0.73)

Neck Mounting for B72, R72, V72, includes plastic panel nut Bracket Kit Reference
Use 4 mm (5/32") screws to mount bracket to wall.
Item Part Number
Wall bracket 4224-50
49 (1.93)
Neck mounting wall bracket 74316-50
Quikclamp and Quikclamp wall bracket 4214-52
38 (1.50)

Port CL
4,4 (0.17)

7 (0.28)

30 (1.18)
34 (1.34)

Port CL

Service Kits
Item Type Part Number
Relieving 4381-500
Service kit
Non relieving 4381-501
Service kit includes diaphragm assembly, valve assembly, Warning
valve spring and o-rings. These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and
temperatures can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult NORGREN.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid
power systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned
to consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.
Water vapor will pass through these units and will condense into
liquid if air temperature drops in the downstream system. Install an air
dryer if water condensation could have a detrimental effect on the
application.

N/AL.8.160.200.04 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 4/98

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 R73G, R73R

EXCELON® 73
Pressure Regulator
1/4" 3/8", 1/2" Port Sizes

● EXCELON design allows in-line or modular

installation

● Full flow gauge ports

● Balanced valve design minimizes effect of variation

in the inlet pressure on the outlet pressure

● Standard relieving models allow reduction of

downstream pressure when the system is
dead-ended

● Optional reverse flow models available for use

downstream of directional control valves

● Modular installations with EXCELON 72, 73, and 74

series can be made to suit particular applications

Technical Data Ordering Information

Fluid: Compressed air See Ordering Information on the following
Maximum pressure: 20 bar (300 psig) pages.
Operating temperature*: -20° to +80°C (0° to +175°F)
*Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2°C
(+35°F).
Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig)
set pressure and 1 bar (15 psig) droop from from set: 60 dm3/s
(127 scfm)
Gauge ports: ISO Symbols
1⁄4 PTF with PTF main ports
Rc1/4 with ISO Rc main ports
Rc1/8 with ISO G main ports
Materials:
Body: Aluminum
Bonnet : Aluminum
Valve: Brass
Relieving Non relieving
Elastomers: Nitrile
Bottom plug: Acetal

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

7/98 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.180.200.01
 R73G, R73R

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

psig

bar
bar

PORT SIZE: 3/8"

psig

PORT SIZE: 3/8"

INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar (150 psig) INLET PRESSURE: 7 bar (100 psig)
RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig)

100 100

OUTLET PRESSURE
OUTLET PRESSURE

6 6
80 80

60 60 4
4

40 40

2 2
20 20

0 0 0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 dm3/s 0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s

0 40 80 120 160 200 scfm 0 20 40 60 80 100 scfm

AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

Ordering Information. Models listed include uni-directional flow, ISO G parallel threads, knob adjustment, relieving
diaphragm, and 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) outlet pressure adjustment range*.
Port Size Model Flow† dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lb)
G1/4 R73G-2GK-RMN Waiting on lab test 0,48 (1.1)
G3/8 R73G-3GK-RMN 60 (127) 0,48 (1.1)
G1/2 R73G-4GK-RMN 60 (127) 0,48 (1.1)
† Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set pressure and 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set.

Alternative Models R 7 3 ★ - ★ ★ ★ - ★★ ★
Flow Type Substitute Gauge Substitute
Uni-directional G With G
Reverse R Without N

Port Size Substitute Outlet Pressure Adjustment Range* Substitute

1/4" 2 0,3 to 4 bar (5 to 60 psig) F
3/8" 3 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) M
1/2" 4 0,7 to 17 bar (10 to 250 psig) S

Threads Substitute Diaphragm Substitute

PTF A Relieving R
ISO Rc taper B Non relieving N
ISO G parallel G

Adjustment Substitute
Knob K
T-bar T

* Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in excess of, and less

than, those specified. Do not use these units to control
pressures outside of the specified ranges.

Accessories

Neck Mounting Bracket Tamper Resistant Cover R1/4 R1/8 1/4 PTF
Wall Mounting Bracket With Zinc Panel Nut and Seal Wire†† Pressure Gauge Connection Connection Connection
4424-50 Bracket and nut: 4461-50 Cover and wire: 4455-51 4 bar (60 psig): 18-013-266 18-013-011 18-013-208
Nut: 5191-88 Replacement seal wire: 2117-01 10 bar (150 psig): 18-013-260 18-013-013 18-013-209
20 bar (300 psig): 18-013-267 18-013-014 18-013-210
†† Use padlock with shackle up to 8 mm (0.3" ) in diameter.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 7/98

N/AL.8.180.200.02 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 R73G, R73R

Dimensions mm (inches) 68 (2.68)

31 (1.22)
Panel mounting hole diameter: 48 mm (1.89" )
Panel thickness: 2 to 6 mm (0.06" to 0.25" )

62 (2.45)
56 (2.20)
50 (2.00)

39 (1.54)
(1.22)
31

96 (3.80)

103 (4.04)
Bracket Mounting 12 (0.45)
Bracket Kit Reference
Universal Wall Bracket for 73 Series Products Model Part No.
Use 6mm (1/4" ) screws to mount bracket to wall. All 73 Series products 4424-50
R73, B73 neck mounting bracket with zinc panel nut 5203-06
60 (2.37)
38 (1.50)

67 (2.64)

Port CL

28
(1.10) 18
(0.71)
4 (0.16)
6 (0.24)
48 (1.89)

61 (2.40)
7 (0.28)

Port CL
19 (0.74)

Neck Mounting Bracket for R73 and B73

Includes zinc panel nut. Use 6mm (1/4" ) screws to mount bracket to wall.
64 (2.5)
38 (1.5)

70 (2.75)

38
(1.5)
17 (0.66)
38 (1.5)

(1.0)

7 (0.27)
25

Service Kits
Item Type Part Number
Service kit Relieving 4381-600
Non-relieving 4381-601
Service kit includes diaphragm assembly, valve assembly, valve
spring, bottom plug o-ring.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

7/98 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.180.200.03
 R73G, R73R

Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures
can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult Norgren.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode cannot
be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 7/98

N/AL.8.180.200.04 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
Air line equipment

11-018 Precision Air Pressure

Regulator
1/4" Po rt Size

Fast response
Minimum overshoot during flow
changes
Constant bleed feature provides
maximum sensitivity to system
changes
Relieving feature allows reduction of
downstream pressure when the
system is dead-ended
Technical data
Fluid:
Compressed air
Inlet pressure range*
Ordering Information.
Low Pressure Models: 8 to 150 psig Models listed have PTF threads, hand wheel adjustment, and relieving diaphragm. A gauge is not included.
(0.55 to 10.3 bar)
High Pressure Models: 10 to 200 psig Port Size Outlet Pressure Adjustment Range* Model Number Flow scfm (dm3/s) Weight lbs (kg)
(0.7 to 13.8 bar) 1/4" 0.4 to 10 psig (0.03 to 0.69 bar) 11-018-146 (low pressure) 12 (5.66)† 1.4 (0.64)
* Inlet pressure must be at least 7 psig (0.5 bar) greater than 1/4" 1.0 to 60 psig (0.1 to 4.1 bar) 11-018-100 (low pressure) 12 (5.66)† 1.4 (0.64)
the adjusted outlet pressure for proper operation. 1/4" 3 to 150 psig (0.2 to 10.3 bar) 11-018-110 (high pressure) 12 (5.66)†† 1.4 (0.64)
Operating temperature*: * Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in excess of, and less than, those specified. Do not use these units to control pressures outside of the specified ranges.
32° to 160°F (0° to 70°C) † Typical flow with 100 psig (7 bar) inlet pressure, 60 psig (4.1 bar) set pressure and 0.125 psig (0.009 bar) droop from set.
** Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at †† Typical flow with 200 psig (14 bar) inlet pressure, 60 psig (4.1 bar) set pressure and 0.250 psig (0.017 bar) droop from set.
temperatures below 35°F (2°C). Note: 5 micron prefiltration required.
Repeatability
Low Pressure Models: 0.02 psig (0.001
bar) for flow change; 0.05 psig (0.004
bar) when turning supply off and on Alternative Models
High Pressure Models: 0.08 psig (0.006 11 ˙18 ˙˙˙
bar) for flow change; 0.16 psig (0.011
bar) when turning supply off and on Threads Substitute Screw Adjustment Substitute
PTF 0 100 with slotted screw adjustment 101
Constant bleed feature: Under dead-end 110 with slotted screw adjustment 112
ISO G parallel 8
conditions, a small, constant bleed of
ISO G Rc 9
pilot air will escape thru the relief
passage in the bottom plug. This will be
accompanied by a slight residual outlet
pressure of 1 to 4 inches H2O (2.5 to 10
millibar). Service Kits
Gauge ports: ISO Symbols Type Part number
1/4" PTF with PTF main ports Low Pressure Models 2787-01
Rc1/4 with ISO G and ISO Rc main ports High Pressure Models 2787-02
Special tool to install main valve seat 681-01
Materials
Service kit includes o-rings, seals, pilot diaphragm, pilot spring, main
Body and bonnet: Zinc diaphragm, main valve, main valve seat, diffuser screen, constant bleed
orifice and orifice filter
Main valve: Polycarbonate
Main valve seat: Teflon Relieving
Pilot valve: Stainless steel
Pilot valve seat: Aluminum
Main diaphragm: Nitrile
Pilot diaphragm
Low Pressure Models:302 SS
High Pressure Models: Nitrile
Bottom plug: Brass
Elastomers: Nitrile, neoprene, polyurethane

ALE-56 www.norgren.com/info/US-ALE-56
 11-018 Precision Air Pressure Regulator
1/4" Po rt Size

Typical Performance Characteristics

LOW PRESSURE MODELS - FLOW CHARACTERISTICS LOW PRESSURE MODELS - REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS
psig

psig
INLET PRESSURE: 100 psig (7 bar) INLET PRESSURE: 150 psig (10.3 bar)
bar

bar
RANGE: 1 to 60 psig (0.1 to 4.1 bar) RANGE: 1 to 60 psig (0.1 to 4.1 bar)
4.15 60 4.15 60

4.10 4.10
59 59
2.10 2.10
30 30
2.05 2.05
OUTLET PRESSURE

OUTLET PRESSURE
2.00 29 2.00 29

0.70 0.70
10 10
0.65 0.65
9 9
0.60 0.60

0.35 5 0.35 5

0.30 0.30
4 4
0 2 4 6 8 10 scfm 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 psig

0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 dm3/s 0 2 4 6 8 10 bar

AIR FLOW INLET PRESSURE

HIGH PRESSURE MODELS - FLOW CHARACTERISTICS HIGH PRESSURE MODELS - REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS
psig

INLET PRESSURE: 200 psig (14 bar) INLET PRESSURE: 200 psig (14 bar)
bar

RANGE: 3 to 150 psig (0.2 to 10.35 bar) RANGE: 3 to 150 psig (0.2 to 10.3 bar)

psig
10.35 150

bar
10.30
10.4
150
10.20 148
10.3

6.2 90 148
OUTLET PRESSURE

6.1
88 OUTLET PRESSURE 6.2 90

4.2 6.1
60 88
4.1
4.2
4.0 58 60
4.1
2.1
30 4.0 58

2.0
2.1
28 30
0 2 4 6 8 10 scfm 2.0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 dm3/s 28
AIR FLOW 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 psig
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 bar
INLET PRESSURE
Panel mounting hole diameter: 0.47" (12 mm)
Maximum panel thickness: 0.094" (2.4 mm)
2.12 (54)
2.12 (54)

4.55 (116)
2.52 (64)
0.56 (14)

Dimensions in inches (mm)

ALE-57
Air line equipment

R38 Instrument
Regulator
Aluminum Model 1/4" Port Size

Compact instrument units with high

performance
Stable regulation with temperature
compensation
Excellent flow and regulation
characteristics
Panel Mounting facility
Technical data
Fluid:
Compressed air
Maximum pressure:
290 psig (20 bar) Ordering Information.
Operating temperature: Models listed are relieving type with 0.6 to 30 psig (0.04 to 2 bar) outlet pressure adjustment range *, and PTF threads. A gauge is not included.
-40° to 175°F (-40° to 80°C) * Port Size Model Number Flow† scfm (dm3/s) Weight lbs (kg)
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at 1/4" PTF R38-200-RNCA 17 (8) 1.06 (0.48)
temperatures below 35°F (2°C).
† Typical flow with 100 psig (7 bar) inlet pressure, 15 psig (1 bar) set pressure and 1 psig (0.05 bar) droop from set.
Typical relief differential at 30
psig (2 bar) outlet pressure:
2.3 psig (0.16 bar) Alternative Models
Maximum bleed flow at 30 R38 ˙˙˙ ˙˙˙˙
psig (2 bar) outlet pressure Threads Substitute
Port Size Substitute
(relieving types only): 1/4” PTF 2 PTF A
0.003 scfm (1.5 cm3/s)† ISO Rc taper B
† Maximum bleed rate occurs under dead-end (noflow) Material Substitute ISO G parallel D
conditions. Aluminum, nitrile elastomers 0 API.LP.INT K
Gauge ports: Aluminum, Viton elastomers 1
Outlet Pressure Adjustment Ranges* Substitute
1/4 NPT
Mounting Option Substitute 0.6 to 30 psig (0.04 to 2 bar) C
Materials Without 0 1 to 60 psig (0.07 to 4 bar) F
Body: Aluminum With bracket and nut 1 3.6 to 100 psig (0.25 to 7 bar) K
Bonnet: Aluminum With panel nut only 2
Gauges Substitute
With handwheel and nut 3
Adjusting screw: Steel With handwheel, bracket and nut 4
Without N
Elastomeric materials: Nitrile With handwheel only 5
Diaphragm Substitute
* Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in Relieving R
excess of, and less than, those specified. Do not Non relieving N
use these units to control pressures outside of the
specified ranges.

ISO Symbol

ALE-58 www.norgren.com/info/US-ALE-58
 R38 Instrument Regulator
Aluminum Model 1/4" Port Size

Panel mounting hole diameter: 1.65" (42 mm) Typical Performance Characteristics
Panel thickness: 0" to 0.24" (0 to 6 mm)
FLOW CHARACTERISTICS - PORT SIZE: 1/4"

bar g
1.26 (32)

psig
INLET PRESSURE - 100 psig (7 bar g)
2.52 (64) 4

50

OUTLET PRESSURE
3

2.95 (75)
2.52 (64)

40

2 30

20

1
0.51 (13)
10

0 0
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 scfm

0 2 4 6 8 10 dm3/s
AIR FLOW
∅1.65 (42)
5.71 (145)

REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS - PORT SIZE: 1/4"

1.18 (30)
2.09 (53)

bar g

psig
MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED 100% FLOW
FLOW THROUGH 1/4" PIPE scfm dm3/s
10%
60 100%
4 7.9 3.7
200%

50
OUTLET PRESSURE

3
40
All Dimensions in Inches (mm) 5 2.4

2 30

3.6 1.7
20
1 2.5 1.2
10

0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 psig

0 2 4 6 8 bar g
INLET PRESSURE

Service Kits
Item Type Part number
30 psig (2 bar) Range Relieving R38-100-R
Non relieving R38-100-NR
60, 105 psig (4 bar, 7 bar) Range Relieving R38-101-R
Non relieving R38-101-NR
Service kit includes diaphragm assembly, o-ring, valve, valve spring and 8 pan head screws.

ALE-59
Air line equipment

R40, R41
R40 Conventional Pilot Regulator, and R41 Feedback
Pilot Regulator
1/4" Port Size

Pilot regulators are used to control the

outlet pressure of a pilot operated
regulator (ordered separately)
The pilot regulator is installed in an
accessible location in the compressed
air system; pilot operated regulator is
installed at any point without regard
to accessibility
Conventional pilot regulator provides
good pressure regulation, rapid
response to changing flow demands,
and excellent stability.
Feedback pilot regulator provides
superior pressure regulation under
changing flow demands where
changes in flow demand are not Ordering Information.
sudden or cyclic. Models listed are relieving with constant bleed, 10 to 250 psig (0.7 to 17 bar) outlet pressure adjustment range *, PTF ports.
Constant bleed feature provides Port Size Type Model Flow† scfm (dm3/s) Weight lb (kg)
maximum sensitivity to system 1/4" Conventional Pilot R40-200-BNSA 6.4 (3) 1.66 (0.75)
changes 1/4" Feedback Pilot R41-204-BNSA†† 6.4 (3) 1.66 (0.75)

Relief feature allows reduction of † Typical flow with 100 psig (7 bar) inlet pressure, 90 psig (6.3 bar) set pressure and 15 psig (1 bar) droop from set.
†† Do not use the R41 feedback pilot regulator to control outlet pressures at or less than 100 psig (7 bar). Use the 11-104 feedback pilot regulator at those pressures.
downstream pressure when the
system is dead-ended
Technical data Alternative Models
Fluid: R˙˙ 2˙˙ BN˙˙
Compressed air
Type Substitute Threads Substitute
Inlet pressure range: R40 Conventional 40 PTF A
10 psig (0.7 bar) to 450 psig (31 bar) R41 Feedback 41 ISO Rc taper B
maximum* ISO G parallel G
Mounting/Type Substitute
* For best performance, inlet pressure should be at least 10
psig (0.7 bar) greater than the desired regulated pressure, but Remote/R40 Conventional 00
must not exceed the specified maximum. Remote/R41 Feedback 04 Outlet Pressure Adjustment Ranges* Substitute
Operating temperature: 2 to 50 psig (0.1 to 3.5 bar) R40 only E
* Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in
excess of, and less than, those specified. Do not 5 to 125 psig (0.3 to 8.5 bar) R40 only L
0° to 175°F (-20° to 80°C) **
use these units to control pressures outside of the 10 to 250 psig (0.7 to 17 bar) S
** Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at
specified ranges.
temperatures below 35°F (2°C).

Maximum bleed rate at 50 Feedback Pilot Regulator Warning

The feedback line must sense the pilot operated regulator outlet pressure and must be connected before turning on the air supply. If the
psig (3.5 bar) outlet feedback line is not connected, the pilot operated regulator outlet pressure will rapidly increase to the inlet pressure when the adjusting
pressure: knob on the pilot regulator is turned clockwise.
0.25 scfm (0.12 dm3/s)†
†Maximum bleed rate occurs under dead-end (no flow)
conditions.

Pilot ports:
ISO Symbols
1/4" PTF, ISO G, or ISO Rc
R41 feedback port: 1/8" PTF, ISO G, or
ISO Rc
Materials
Body, bonnet: Aluminum
Valve: Teflon
Elastomers: Nitrile R40 Conventional Pilot Regulator R41 Feedback Pilot Regulator
with Pilot Operated Regulator with Pilot Operated Regulator

ALE-60 www.norgren.com/info/US-ALE-60
 R40, R41
R40 Conventional Pilot Regulator,
and R41 Feedback Pilot Regulator
1/4" Port Size

Panel mounting hole diameter: 1.89" (48 mm) 2.5 (63)

Maximum panel thickness: 0.13" (3 mm)
Typical Performance Characteristics
FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

2.0 (51)

psig
bar
PORT SIZE: 1/4"
8 INLET PRESSURE: 100 psig (7 bar)
RANGE: 5 to 125 psig (0.3 to 8.6 bar)

100

OUTLET PRESSURE
6
80
1/4" Pilot
1/8" Feedback Port (Out) 60
4
Port (R41 only) 5.2 (133)

OUT 40
3.19 (81)

0.27 (7) Dia.

2.32 (59)

2.01 (51)
(2 places) † 20

0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 scfm
1.14 (29)
1.63 (42)

1.57
1.14 (29)

1/4" Pilot Port (In) (40) 1/16" Inlet †† 0 1 2 3 4 5 dm3/s

AIR FLOW

† Mounting holes for subbase mounting.

†† Air inlet for subbase mounting.

Dimensions in inches (mm) Service Kits

Type Part number
R40, R41 5945-41
Service kit contains diaphragm, valve spring, guide bushing, valve, valve spring, filter screen,
and all o-rings.

ALE-61
Air line equipment

11-400, 20AL
Conventional Pilot Regulators
1/4" Port Size

Pilot regulators are used to control the

outlet pressure of a pilot operated
regulator (ordered separately)
The pilot regulator is installed in an
accessible location in the compressed
air system; pilot operated regulator is
installed at any point without regard
to accessibility
Conventional pilot regulator provides
good pressure regulation, rapid
response to changing flow demands,
and excellent stability.
Constant bleed feature provides
maximum sensitivity to system
changes
Relief feature allows reduction of Ordering Information.
downstream pressure when the Models listed are relieving with constant bleed, PTF threads, without gauge.
system is dead-ended Port Size Model Number Range psig (bar) Weight lbs (kg)
Technical data 1/4" 11-400-2G/AC103 1 to 30 (0.06 to 2) 1.98 (0.90)
1/4" 11-400-2G/AE103 1 to 60 (0.06 to 4) 2.07 (0.94)
Fluid: 1/4" 11-400-2G/AG103 2 to 100 (0.16 to 7) 2.2 (1.00)
Compressed air filtered to 5µm 1/4" 20AL-X2G/AK103 100 to 300 (7 to 20) 2.3 (1.05)
Maximum inlet pressure:
360 psig (25 bar)
Operating temperature: Service Kits
0° to 175°F (-20° to 80°C) * Type Part number
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at 11 400-20AL-X 11 400-100/20AL
temperatures below 35°F (2°C).
Service kit includes: diaphragm assemblies, valve assembly, valve spring o-rings and valve seats for pilots.
Typical flow with 100 psig (7
bar) inlet pressure, 23 psig
(1.6 bar) set pressure and 1.5
psig (0.1 bar) droop from
from set:
4.2 scfm (2 dm3/s)
Gauge ports:
1/8" PTF
Materials:
Body, bonnet: Zinc
Elastomers: Nitrile

ISO Symbol

Conventional Pilot Regulator

with Pilot Operated Regulator

ALE-62 www.norgren.com/info/US-ALE-62
 11-400, 20AL
Conventional Pilot Regulators
1/4" Po rt Size

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

psig
psig

bar,g
bar,g

PORT SIZE: 1/4 " PORT SIZE: 1/4 "

INLET PRESSURE: 100 psig (7 bar) INLET PRESSURE: 100 psig (7 bar)
RANGE: 1 to 30 psig (0.06 to 2 bar) RANGE: 2 to 100 psig (0.16 to 7 bar)
24 100
1.6 8

Secondary Pressure
Secondary Pressure

1.2 6
16 80

0.8 4

8 40
0.4 2

0 0 0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 scfm 0 2 4 6 8 10 scfm

0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 dm3/s 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 dm3/s
Air Flow Flow

REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS

psig
bar,g
PORT SIZE: 1/4 "
INLET PRESSURE: 150 psig (10 bar)
RANGE: 1 to 30 psig (0.06 to 2 bar)
30 Curves are 50% of recommended flow
Mounting Dimensions 2

(Shown with optional gauge and mountinggbracket)

Secondary Pressure

1.5 1.8 scfm

20
.40 (10) max
.20 (5) min

3.35 (85) 2.17 (55)

1
1.3 scfm

10
panel mount 0.8 scfm
0.5
0.28 (7)

.63 (16) hole 1.062 (27) 0.6 scfm

(typ 2) 0.4 scfm
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 psig
3.15 (80)
2.76 (70)

3.74 (95)

0 2 4 6 8 10 bar
1.26 (32) Primary Pressure

REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS
psig
bar,g

PORT SIZE: 1/4 "

INLET PRESSURE: 150 psig (10 bar)
RANGE: 2 to 100 psig (0.16 to 7 bar)
3.35 (85) Curves are 50% of recommended flow
100
8
5.70 - 6.50 (145 - 165)

Secondary Pressure

6 6.0 scfm
80

4
3.9 scfm

40
3.15 (80)

2 2.7 scfm
.55 (14)

1.8 scfm

1.3 scfm
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 psig

0 2 4 6 8 10 bar
1.97 (50) Primary Pressure

3.15 (80)
Dimensions in inches (mm)

ALE-63
Air line equipment

11-104
Feedback Pilot Regulator
1/4" Port Size

Pilot regulators are used to control the

outlet pressure of a pilot operated
regulator (ordered separately)
The pilot regulator is installed in an
accessible location in the compressed
air system; pilot operated regulator is
installed at any point without regard
to accessibility
Feedback pilot regulator provides
superior pressure regulation under
changing flow demands where
changes in flow demand are not
sudden or cyclic.
Constant bleed feature provides
maximum sensitivity to system
changes Ordering Information.
Relief feature allows reduction of Model listed is relieving, constant bleed, 5 to 100 psig (0.3 to 7 bar) outlet pressure adjustment range†, with PTF ports.
downstream pressure when the Port Size Type Model Weight lb (kg) Pressure psig (bar)
system is dead-ended 1/4" PTF Feedback Pilot 11-104-001 3.38 ( 1.53) 5-105 (.3-7)
1/4" PTF Feedback Pilot 11-104-002 3.38 ( 1.53) 50-250 (3-17)
Technical data
Fluid: † Outlet pressures can be adjusted to pressures in excess or, and less than, those specified. Do not use these units to control pressures outside
of the specified ranges.
Compressed air
Inlet pressure range:
10 psig (0.7 bar) to 400 psig (27.6 bar)
maximum* Feedback Pilot Regulator Warning
* For best performance, inlet pressure should be at least 10 The feedback line must sense the pilot operated regulator outlet pressure and
psig (0.7 bar) greater than the desired regulated pressure, but
must not exceed the specified maximum. must be connected before turning on the air supply. If the feedback line is not
Operating temperature: connected, the pilot operated regulator outlet pressure will rapidly increase to the
0 to 175°F (-20° to 80°C) ** inlet pressure when the adjusting knob on the pilot regulator is turned clockwise.
** Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at
temperatures below 35°F (2°C).

Maximum bleed rate at 50

psig (3.5 bar) outlet
pressure:
0.25 scfm (0.12 dm3/s)†
†Maximum bleed rate occurs under dead-end (no flow)
conditons.

Pilot ports:
1/4" PTF
Feedback port:
ISO Symbols
1/8" PTF
Materials
Body, bonnet: Zinc
Valve seat: Brass
Valve ball: Stainless steal
Elastomers: Nitrile
11-104 Feedback Pilot Regulator
with Pilot Operated Regulator

ALE-64 www.norgren.com/info/US-ALE-64
 11-104
Feedback Pilot Regulator
1/4" Port Size

Panel mounting hole diameter: 1.06" (27 mm)

Maximum panel thickness: 0.38" (10 mm)

3.25 (83)

Service Kits
Type Part number
11-104 1970-11
Service kit includes: diaphragm assemblies, valve assembly, valve spring o-rings and valve seats for pilots.
6.16 (157)
3.18 (81)
0.56
(14)

3.13 (80)

Dimensions ininches (mm)

ALE-65
Air line equipment

Pilot Operated Regulators

11-042 and 11-008

Designed for systems that require

pressure regulation at an inaccessible
location.
A pilot regulator (ordered separately)
controls the outlet pressure of the
pilot operated regulator.
Technical data
Fluid:
Compressed air 11-042 11-008
Inlet pressure range: Constant bleed type
10 psig (0.7 bar) to 400 psig (27.6 bar)
Operating temperature:
0° to 175°F (-20° to 80°C) **
** Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at
temperatures below 35°F (2°C). 11-042 and 11-008 Pilot Operated Regulator Ordering Information
Models listed include relieving diaphragm and PTF threads. Also order a pilot regulator.
Materials
11-042 Port Size Model Flow* scfm (dm3/s) Weight lb (kg)
1/4" 11-042-001 120 (57) 2.8 (1.3)
Body: zinc 3/8" 11-042-002 120 (57) 2.7 (1.2)
Bonnet: aluminum 1/2" 11-042-003 120 (57) 2.6 (1.2)
Bottom plug: acetal 3/4" 11-042-007 300 (142) 4.8 (2.2)
1" 11-042-008 300 (142) 4.6 (2.1)
Valve: brass
1-1/4" 11-042-009 300 (142) 4.3 (2.0)
Elastomers: nitrile 1/2" 11-008-130 70 (33) 1.6 (0.7)
11-008 3/4" 11-008-009 110 (52) 4.9 (2.2)
1" 11-008-110 180 (85) 4.6 (2.1)
Body: zinc
Bonnet: aluminum * Typical flow with 100 psig (0.7 bar) inlet pressure, 90 psig (6.3 bar) set pressure and a droop of 5 psig (0.35 bar) from set.

Bottom plug:
1/2", 3/4 ports: brass
1" ports: glass filled nylon
Valve: brass 11-042 Alternative Models
Elastomers: nitrile 11-˙42-˙˙˙
Threads Substitute With Gauge Substitute
PTF 0 1/4" main ports 004
ISO G parallel 8 3/8" main ports 005
1/2" main ports 006
3/4" main ports 010
1" main ports 011
1-1/4" main ports 012

Alternative Models
11-˙08-˙˙˙
Threads Substitute W/160 psig (11 bar) gauge Substitute
PTF 0 1/2" main ports 142
ISO G parallel 8

Feedback Pilot Regulator Warning

The feedback line must sense the pilot operated regulator outlet pressure and must be connected before turning on the air supply. If the
feedback line is not connected, the pilot operated regulator outlet pressure will rapidly increase to the inlet pressure when the adjusting
knob on the pilot regulator is turned clockwise.

ALE-66 www.norgren.com/info/US-ALE-66
 Pilot Operated Regulators
11-042 and 11-008

11-042 Typical Performance Characteristics

A FLOW CHARACTERISTICS FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

bar

psig

bar

psig
PORT SIZE: 1/2" PORT SIZE: 1"
8 PILOT SPRING RANGE: 5 to 125 psig (0.3 to 8.5 bar) 8 PILOT SPRING RANGE: 5 to 125 psig (0.3 to 8.5 bar)
INLET PRESSURE: 100 psig 0.7 bar) INLET PRESSURE: 100 psig (0.7 bar)
100 With R40 CONVENTIONAL PILOT: 100 With R40 CONVENTIONAL PILOT:
With R41 FEEDBACK PILOT: With R41 FEEDBACK PILOT:

OUTLET PRESSURE

OUTLET PRESSURE
6 6
80 80

4 60 4 60

40 40
2 2
20 20

0 0 0 0
0 40 80 120 160 200 240 scfm 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 scfm

0 20 40 60 80 100 dm3/s 0 50 100 150 200 250 dm3/s

AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

RELIEF CHARACTERISTICS
11-042 Service Kits
D

bar

psig

8
Type Part number
100 Kit for 1/4", 3/8", 1/2" units 4158-01
OUTLET PRESSURE

6 Kit for 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" units 4158-02

80
C

O-ring kit for 1/4", 3/8", 1/2" units 4158-03

4 60 O-ring kit for 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" units 4158-04
Kit contains filter screen, diaphragm, and all o-rings.
B 40
O-ring kit contains filter screen and all o-rings.
2 TYPICAL ALL MODELS
20 INLET PRESSURE: 200 psig (13.8 bar)

Port Size A B C D
0 0
1/4", 3/8", 1/2" 4.16 2.71 1.48 5.07 0 40 80 120 160 200 scfm

(106) (69) (38) (129) 0 20 40 60 80 100 dm3/s

RELIEF AIR FLOW
3/4", 1", 1-1/4" 4.16 3.65 1.86 5.97
(106) (93) (47) (152)
Dimensions in inches (mm)

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS WITH CONVENTIONAL PILOT

bar

psig

PORT SIZE: 1/2"

11-008 8 120 PILOT SPRING RANGE: 5 to 100 psig (0.3 to 6.9 bar) 11-008 Service Kits
INLET PRESSURE: 150 psig (10.3 bar)

100 Type Part number

OUTLET PRESSURE

6 1/2" ported units 695-01

80
3/4", 1" ported units 696-01
A

4 60 Kit contains diaphragm, valve, and all o-rings.

40
2
20

0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 scfm

0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s
AIR FLOW

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS WITH CONVENTIONAL PILOT FLOW CHARACTERISTICS WITH CONVENTIONAL PILOT
D

bar

psig

bar

psig

PORT SIZE: 1" PORT SIZE: 3/4"

8 PILOT SPRING RANGE: 5 to 100 psig (0.3 TO 6.9 bar) 120 PILOT SPRING RANGE: 5 to 100 psig (0.3 TO 6.9 bar)
8
INLET PRESSURE: 150 psig (10.3 bar) INLET PRESSURE: 150 psig (10.3 bar)
C

100 100
OUTLET PRESSURE

OUTLET PRESSURE

6 6
80 80
B
4 60 60
4

Port Size A B C D 40 40
1/2" 3.34 3.38 1.50 3.30 2 2
20 20
(85) (86) (38) (84)
3/4", 1" 4.91 4.63 1.69 4.36 0 0 0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 scfm
(125) (118) (43) (111) 0 40 80 120 160 200 240 scfm
0 25 50 75 100 125 dm3/s 0 20 40 60 80 100 dm3/s
Dimensions in inches (mm) AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

ALE-67
Air line equipment

Pilot Operated Regulators

R18 and R24

Designed for systems that require

pressure regulation at an inaccessible
location.
A pilot regulator (ordered separately) R24
controls the outlet pressure of the R18 R24
pilot operated regulator.
Technical data
R18 Ordering Information
Fluid: Models listed include relieving diaphragm and PTF threads. Also order a pilot regulator.

Compressed air Port Size Model Flow* scfm (dm3/s) Weight lb (kg)
1-1/2" R18-B00-RNXA 2000 (944) 6.82 (3.09)
Inlet pressure range: 2" R18-C00-RNXA 2000 (944) 6.61 (2.99)
10 psig (0.7 bar) minimum to 1⁄4" R24-201-RNXA 1.16 (0.73)
450 psig (31 bar) maximum 3⁄8" R24-301-RNXA 1.54 (0.70)
Operating temperature: 1⁄2" R24-401-RNXA 1.50 (0.68)
3⁄4" R24-601-RNXA 2.60 (1.18)
0° to 175°F (-18° to 80°C)* 1" R24-801-RNXA 2.60 (1.18)
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at
temperatures below 35°F (2°C).
1-1⁄4" R24-A01-RNXA 2.51 (1.14)

R24 * Typical flow with 100 psig (0.7 bar) inlet pressure, 90 psig (6.3 bar) set pressure and a droop of 15 psig (1 bar) from set.

Fluid:
Compressed air
Inlet pressure range: Alternative Models - R18
10 psig (0.7 bar) to 300 psig (20 bar) R18-˙00-˙˙X˙
Operating temperature:
Port Size Substitute Threads Substitute
0° to 175°F (-20° to 80°C)** 1-1/2" B PTF A
** Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at
temperatures below 35°F (2°C). 2" C ISO G parallel G
Materials Diaphragm Substitute Gauge* Substitute
R18 Relieving R Without N
Non relieving (do not use with a
Body, bonnet, bottom plug, valve: feedback pilot regulator) N
Aluminum
Elastomers: Nitrile Alternative Models - R24
R24 R24-˙˙˙-˙˙˙˙
Body, top cap: zinc Port Size Substitute Threads Substitute
main valve, adjusting screw: brass 1/4" 2 PTF A
pilot valve, relief valve: acetal 3/8" 3 ISO G parallel G
1/2" 4
Elastomers: nitrile 3/4" 6 Spring Substitute
Bottom plug: acetal 1" 8 None X
1-1/4" A Gauge* Substitute
Without N
Option Substitute
Not applicable 0 Diaphragm Substitute
Type Substitute Relieving R
Pilot operated 1

* A factory installed gauge is only available with PTF threads (A in last position of model number). For additional options see the website for this product.

Feedback Pilot Regulator Warning

The feedback line must sense the pilot operated regulator outlet pressure and must be connected before turning on the air supply. If the
feedback line is not connected, the pilot operated regulator outlet pressure will rapidly increase to the inlet pressure when the adjusting
knob on the pilot regulator is turned clockwise.

ALE-68 www.norgren.com/info/US-ALE-68
R18
5.98 (152)
Pilot Operated Regulators
R18 and R24
Dimensions in inches (mm)

7.24 (184)
Typical Performance Characteristics

5.51 (140)
FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

bar g

psig
R18 PORT SIZE: 2"
8 PILOT SPRING RANGE: 5 to 125 psig (0.3 TO 8.5 bar)

3.56 (91)
INLET PRESSURE: 100 psig (0.7 bar)
100 R18 with R40 CONVENTIONAL PILOT:
R18 with R41 FEEDBACK PILOT:

OUTLET PRESSURE
6
80

4 60

Relief (exhaust) port

R18 Service Kits 40

2
Type Part number 20

R18 5945-40
0 0
R18 service lit contains filter screen and all o-rings. 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 scfm

R24 0 200 400 600

AIR FLOW
800 1000 dm3/s

RELIEF CHARACTERISTICS

bar g

psig
8
2.72 (69)

2.72 (69)
100

OUTLET PRESSURE
6
80

4 60

40
PORT SIZE: 2"
2 INLET PRESSURE: 150 psig (10 bar)
20 R18 with R40 CONVENTIONAL PILOT:
∅1.18 (30) R18 with R41 FEEDBACK PILOT:

0 0
0.1 (3) max

0 40 80 120 160 200 scfm

2.87 (73)

3.15 (80)

0 20 40 60 80 100 dm3/s
AIR FLOW
4.29 (109)

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS WITH CONVENTIONAL PILOT

5.04 (128)

psig
PORT SIZE: 1/2"

bar g
R24 120
INLET PRESSURE: 150 psig (10 bar)
8 PILOT SPRING RANGE: 10 to 125 psig (0.7 to 8.6 bar)

100

OUTLET PRESSURE 6
80

4 60

40
2.09 (53) 2
3.74 (95) 20
3/4", 1", 1-1/4" ports
0 0
0 40 80 120 160 200 240 scfm

dm3/s
Typical Installation Typical Installation 0 20 40 60
AIR FLOW
80 100

Feedback Pilot and Pilot Operated Regulator Conventional Pilot and Pilot Operated Regulator RELIEF FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
bar g

psig

FEEDBACK CONVENTIONAL
PILOT REGULATOR 8 TYPICAL ALL MODELS
PILOT
REGULATOR INLET PRESSURE: 200 psig (14 bar g)
100
OUTLET PRESSURE

6
80
SUPPLY FEEDBACK SUPPLY
AIR LINE AIR
4 60

40

PILOT 2
OUTPUT 20
PILOT
LINE
OUTPUT
LINE
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 scfm
0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s
AIR FLOW
SUPPLY
SUPPLY R24PilotOperatedFlow1-1/4"
AIR
AIR FLOW CHARACTERISTICS WITH CONVENTIONAL PILOT
bar g

psig

PORT SIZE: 1-1/4"

INLET PRESSURE: 150 psig (10 bar)
PILOT OPERATED 8 PILOT SPRING RANGE: 10 to 125 psig (0.7 to 8.6 bar)
REGULATOR PILOT OPERATED
REGULATOR 100
OUTLET PRESSURE

6
80
OUTLET OUTLET
AIR AIR
60
4

R24 Service Kits 40

2
Item Port Size Part number 20

Service kit 1⁄4", 3⁄8", 1⁄2" 5292-54

0 0
Service kit 3⁄4", 1", 1-1⁄4" 5292-55 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 scfm

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 dm3/s

Service kits include seals, main valve and spring. AIR FLOW

ALE-69
 P1H, PTH Combination Unit

Miniature Series 07
Filter/Regulator-Lubricator
1/8" and 1/4" Port Sizes

● Compact design

● Filter removes liquids and solid particles down to

5 µm

● Push to lock adjusting knob with tamper resistant

option

● Micro-Fog lubricator provides air line lubrication to

one or more air driven tools or other devices

● Nearly constant oil density output with varying air

flow

● Can be disassembled without the use of tools or

removal from the air line

Technical Data
Fluid: Compressed air
Maximum pressure:
Transparent bowl: 10 bar (150 psig)
Metal bowl: 17 bar (250 psig)
Operating temperature:*
Materials:
Transparent bowl: -20° to +50°C (0° to +125°F)
Polycarbonate bowl standard, zinc bowl
Metal bowl: -20° to +65°C (0° to +150°F)
optional. Zinc body. Nitrile elastomeric
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below
+35°F (+2°C) materials.
Typical flow at 7 bar (100 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar Filter/Regulator: Acetal bonnet. Sintered
(90 psig) set pressure and a droop of 1 bar (15 psig) from set: polypropylene element. Brass/Nitrile valve.
1/8" ports: T.B.A. Lubricator: Transparent nylon sight dome.
1/4" ports: 3 dm3/s (6 scfm)
Drain connection: 1/8" pipe Ordering Information
Filter/Regulator See Ordering Information on the following
Partical removal: 5 µm or 40 µm. Within ISO 8573-1, Class 3 and pages.
Class 5
Recommended regulating pressure ranges†:
0,3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig) standard ISO Symbols
0,3 to 3,5 bar (5 to 50 psig) optional
† Outlet pressures can be adjusted to pressures in excess of, and less than those
specified. Do not use these units to control pressures outside of the specified
ranges.
Gauge ports:
1/8" PTF with PTF main ports
Relieving filter/regulator with automatic drain, lubricator with
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO Rc main ports
manual drain
1/8" ISO Rc with ISO G main ports
Automatic drain operation: Spitter type drain operates momentarily
when a rapid change in air flow occurs or when the supply
pressure is reduced.
Lubricator
Start point (i.e., minimum flow required for lubricator operation):
Non relieving filter/regulator with automatic drain, lubricator
0,24 dm3/s (0.5 scfm) at 6,3 bar (90 psig) inlet pressure with manual drain
Nominal bowl capacity: 31 ml (1 fluid ounce)
Recommended lubricants: See page N/AL.8.990.935

9/97 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.300.805.01

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 P1H, PTH

Typical Performance Characteristics

FLOW CHARACTERISTICS FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

psig

bar g

psig

bar g
PORT SIZE: 1/4" PORT SIZE: 1/4"
8 INLET PRESSURE: 7 bar (10 psig) 8 INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar (150 psig)
RANGE: 0,3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig) RANGE: 0,3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig)
100 100
OUTLET PRESSURE

OUTLET PRESSURE
6 6
80 80

60 4 60 4

40 40
2 2
20 20

0 0 0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 dm3/s 0 2 4 6 8 10 dm3/s

0 4 8 12 16 20 24 scfm 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 scfm
AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

Ordering Information. Models listed include ISO G threads, transparent bowls, filter/regulator with relieving diaphragm,
automatic drain, 40 µm element, 0,3 to 7 bar (5 to 100 psig) outlet pressure adjustment range*, lubricator with manual drain.

Port Size Model Number Flow† dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lbs)

G1/8 P1H-101-A3AG T.B.A. 0,35 (0.78)
G1/4 P1H-201-A3AG 3,9 (8.2) 0,35 (0.78)
† Approximate flow at 7 bar (100 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig)
set pressure and a droop of 1 bar (15 psig) from set.

Alternative Models P ★ H - ★ ★ ★- ★ ★ ★ ★
Integral Wall Bracket Substitute
Threads Substitute
Without (P1H Combination Unit) 1
PTF A
With (PTH Combination Unit) T
ISO Rc taper B
ISO G parallel G
Port Size Substitute
1/8" 1
Lubricator Reservoir Substitute
1/4" 2
Transparent with drain A
Transparent without drain Q
Outlet Pressure
Metal with drain M
Filter/Regulator Adjustment Range* Relief
Metal without drain F
Bowl bar psig Type Gauge Substitute
Transparent 0,3 to 8,6 5 to 125 Relieving Without 01
Transparent 0,3 to 8,6 5 to 125 Non relieving Without 02 Filter/Regulator Element Substitute
Transparent 0,3 to 3.5 5 to 50 Relieving Without 04 5 µm 1
Transparent 0,3 to 3.5 5 to 50 Non relieving Without 06 40 µm 3
Metal 0,3 to 8,6 5 to 125 Relieving Without 41
Metal 0,3 to 8,6 5 to 125 Non relieving Without 42 Filter/Regulator Drain Substitute
Metal 0,3 to 3.5 5 to 50 Relieving Without 44 Automatic A
Metal 0,3 to 3.5 5 to 50 Non relieving Without 46 Manual M

* Do not use these units to control pressures outside of the

specified ranges.

N/AL.8.300.805.02 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 9/97

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 P1H, PTH

Accessories

Tamper Resistant Seal Wall Mounting Bracket and Wall Bracket Panel Nut Tamper Resistant
Wire for Lubricator Panel Nut for P1H Unit for PTH Unit Field Modification
2117-01 Plastic: 18-025-003 6700-30 Plastic: 2962-89 Knob and screw: 18-001-092
Metal: 2962-04 Screw only: 6097-08

Ø 40 mm
Pressure Gauge R1/8 Connection 1/8" PTF Connection
2 bar (30 psig): — 18-013-214
4 bar (60 psig): 18-013-990 18-013-211
10 bar (150 psig): 18-013-989 18-013-212
25 bar (360 psig): 18-013-908 —

Dimensions – mm (Inches)

P1H PTH
Combination Unit Combination Unit
45 (1.78) 45 (1.78)
90 (3.55)
32 (1.26)

43 (1.68)
38 (1.50)
54 (2.13)

38 (1.50)

4 **
(0.174)
Dia.
68 (2.67)

(0.55)
14
42 (1.65)
28 (1.12)

78 (3.07) Without Drain

10 (0.38)
94 (3,72) Automatic Drain
98 (3,87) Manual Drain

(0.55)
211 (8.31)*

14

7
(0.29)
Dia.

* Minimum clearance to remove bowl.

** Use 51 mm (2") long screws, 5/32" diameter,
to mount PTH Unit to wall.

9/97 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/AL.8.300.805.03

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 P1H, PTH

Wall Bracket for P1H Combination Unit Wall Bracket reference

Use 1/8" (3 mm) screws to mount bracket to wall. Model Part number
P1H combination units 18-025-003

Wall bracket Installed on filter/regulator

(1.09 to 1.73)
28 to 44
63 (2.47)

38 (1.50)
24
(0.93)
7 (0.29)
6 (0.22)

46 (1.81)
38 (1.49)

Service Kits
Item Type Part number
Service kits, relieving, 40 µm element 3820-14
filter/regulator non relieving, 40 µm element 3820-13
Service kit, lubricator 3795-03
Manual 773-03
Replacement drains
Automatic 3654-02
Replacement wall Integral 2 piece 6700-30
bracket for PTH unit

Filter/regulator service kit contains slip ring, diaphragm, valve seat

with o-ring, valve, valve spring, element, element gasket, and
bowl o-ring.
Lubricator service kit contains sight-feed dome seal, cartridge o-ring,
and bowl o-ring.

Warning

These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air systems
only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures can
exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for non-
industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not within
published specifications, consult NORGREN.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the system
instructional manual if protection against a failure mode cannot be
adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific warnings
found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these products.

N/AL.8.300.805.04 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 9/97

We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
 B72, L72

EXCELON® 72
Filter/Regulator-Lubricator Combination Units
1/4" and 3/8" Port Sizes

● True modularity with Norgren Quikclamp™

connections

● Quick release bayonet bowl

● Lubricator flow sensor provides a nearly constant

oil/air ratio over a wide range of air flows

● All around (360°) visibility of the lubricator sight-feed

dome simplifies installation and adjustment

● Regulator balanced valve minimizes effect of variation

in the inlet pressure on the outlet pressure

Use Micro-Fog models in applications containing one or more

points of lubrication.
Use Oil-Fog models to lubricate a single tool, cylinder, or other air
driven device.

Technical Data
Fluid: Compressed air
Maximum pressure:
Transparent bowl: 10 bar (150 psig)
Metal bowl: Materials:
Manual or semi automatic drain: 17 bar (250 psig) Body: Zinc
Automatic drain: 10 bar (150 psig) Bonnet: Acetal
Operating temperature*: Filter/Regulator valve: Brass
Transparent bowl: -20° to +50°C (0° to +125°F) Bowl:
Metal bowl: -20° to +65°C (0° to +150°F) Transparent: Polycarbonate
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2°C (+35°F). Transparent with guard: Polycarbonate,
Particle removal: 5 µm, 25 µm, or 40 µm filter element zinc guard
Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 (90 psig) set Metal: Zinc
pressure and 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set: ??? dm3/s (??? scfm) Metal bowl liquid level indicator lens:
Waiting on lab test Transparent nylon
Manual drain connection: 1/8" Sight-Feed dome: Transparent nylon
Semi automatic drain connection: Push on 8 mm (5/16") ID tube Element: Sintered polypropylene
Semi automatic drain operating conditions (pressure operated): Elastomers: Neoprene, nitrile, and Geolast®
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,1 bar (1.5 psig)
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,1 bar (1.5 psig) Ordering Information
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 0,5 dm /s (1 scfm)
3 See Ordering Information on the following pages.
Manual operation: Lift stem to drain bowl
Automatic drain connection: 1/8"
Automatic drain operating conditions (float operated):
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,3 bar (5 psig)
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,2 bar (3 psig)
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 0,1 dm3/s (0.2 scfm)
Manual operation: Depress pin inside drain outlet to drain bowl
ISO Symbol
Nominal bowl size:
Short bowl: 56 ml (1.9 fluid ounce)
Long bowl: 65 ml (2.2 fluid ounce)
Gauge ports:
1/8 PTF with PTF main ports
Rc 1/8 with ISO Rc and ISO G main ports
Recommended lubricants: See page Filter with automatic drain, Regulator with relieving diaphragm,
Lubricator with manual drain
N/AL.8.900.935

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

4/98 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.160.805.01
 EXCELON® 72 F/R-L Combination Units

Ordering information. Models listed in order table have ISO G parallel threads. Filter/Regulator (F/R) has knob adjustment,
semi automatic drain, short transparent bowl without guard, 40 µm element, relieving diaphragm, and 10 bar (150 psig) regulating
spring. A gauge is not included. Lubricator (L) is a Micro-Fog model with 1/4 turn manual drain and short transparent bowl without
guard.

Combination Unit Type Port Size Model Flow* dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lb)
Filter/Regulator-Lubricator G1/4 C72H-2GK-ST3-RMN-QTN ?? (??) waiting on test 1,08 (2.37)
(F/R-L) G3/8 C72H-3GK-ST3-RMN-QTN ?? (??) waiting on test 1,08 (2.37)
* Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set pressure and 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set.

Alternative Models ★ 7 2 ★ - ★ ★ ★ - ★ ★★ -★★ ★ - ★ ★ ★

Shutoff/Lockout Valve, Quikmount Substitute Accessories Substitute
Standard Combination (No C Quikclamp wall brackets B
Shutoff/Lockout Valve, No accessories N
no Quikmount)
With Shutoff/Lockout valve on inlet D Lubricator Reservoir Substitute
With Quikmount pipe adapters E Short metal with liquid level indicator D
on inlet and outlet Short transparent without guard T
With Shutoff/Lockout Valve on inlet G Long transparent without guard L
and Quikmount pipe adapter on Long transparent with guard W
outlet
Lubricator Drain Substitute
Closed bottom E
Combination Unit Type Substitute
Manual, 1⁄4 turn Q
Standard Micro-Fog F/R-L H
Standard Oil-Fog F/R-L J
Micro-Fog F/R-L with porting K
block between filter/regulator
and lubricator
Oil-Fog F/R-L with porting L
block between filter/regulator
and lubricator

Port Size Substitute Regulator Gauge Substitute

1/4" 2 With gauge G
3/8" 3 No gauge N

Threads Substitute Regulation spring ** Substitute

PTF A 0,3 to 2 bar (5 to 30 psig) C
ISO Rc taper B 0,3 to 4 bar (5 to 60 psig) F
ISO G parallel G 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) M

Pressure Adjustment Substitute Regulator Diaphragm Substitute

Knob K Non-relieving N
T-bar T Relieving R

Filter Drain Substitute

Automatic † A
Manual, 1⁄4 turn Q
Semi automatic S

Filter Bowl Substitute

Short metal with liquid level indicator D Filter Element Substitute
Short transparent without guard T 5 µm 1
Long transparent without guard L 25 µm 2
Long transparent with guard W 40 µm 3

** Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in excess of, and less than, those specified. Do not use these units to control pressures outside of the
specified ranges.
† Supplied in long bowl options only.

Accessories. See page N/AL.8.160.700.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

N/AL.8.160.805.02 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
4/98
 EXCELON® 72 F/R-L Combination Units

Dimensions mm (inches). See pages N/AL.8.160.300, N/AL.8.160.400, N/AL.8.160.600, and N/AL.8.160.700 for
dimensions of individual products and the Quikclamp wall bracket.
Standard Micro-Fog Type C72H- 108 (4.22) Alternative Micro-Fog Type D72H- 164 (6.46)
Standard Oil-Fog Type C72J- Alternative Oil-Fog Type D72J-

(1.50)

(1.50)
38

38
Shown with optional gauge and Includes Shutoff/Lockout valve.
Quikclamp wall bracket. Shown with optional gauge and
Quikclamp wall brackets.
54 54 54 54
(2.11) (2.11) (2.11) 56 (2.24) (2.11)

59 (2.32)

59 (2.32)
Alternative Micro-Fog Type E72H- 152 (6.00) Alternative Micro-Fog Type G72H- 187 (7.35)
Alternative Oil-Fog Type E72J- Alternative Oil-Fog Type G72J-
(1.50)

(1.50)
38

38
Includes Quikmount pipe adapters. Includes Shutoff/Lockout valve and
Shown with optional gauge and Quikmount pipe adapter.
Quikclamp wall brackets. Shown with optional gauge and
Quikclamp wall brackets. 54
113 (4.48) (2.11) 113 (4.48)
59 (2.32)

59 (2.32)
Alternative Micro-Fog Type C72K- 143 (5.61) Alternative Micro-Fog Type D72K- 200 (7.85)
Alternative Oil-Fog Type C72L- Alternative Oil-Fog Type D72L- (1.50)
(1.50)

38
38

Includes porting block. Includes Shutoff/Lockout valve and

porting block.
Shown with optional gauge and
Quikclamp wall brackets. Shown with optional gauge and
Quikclamp wall brackets. 54
54 35 54 54
(2.11) (1.39) (2.11) (2.11) 92 (3.63) (2.11)
59 (2.32)
59 (2.32)

Alternative Micro-Fog Type E72K- 188 (7.39) Alternative Micro-Fog Type G72K- 222 (8.74)
Alternative Oil-Fog Type E72L- Alternative Oil-Fog Type G72L-
(1.50)

(1.50)
38

38

Includes Quikmount pipe adapters Includes Shutoff/Lockout valve,

and porting block. Quikmount pipe adapter,
Shown with optional gauge and and porting block.
Quikclamp wall brackets. Shown with optional gauge and
Quikclamp wall brackets. 54
149 (5.87) (2.11) 149 (5.87)
59 (2.32)
59 (2.32)

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

4/98 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.160.805.03
 EXCELON® 72 F/R-L Combination Units

Typical Performance Characteristics

B72 WITH L72 MICRO-FOG LUBRICATOR FLOW CHARACTERISTICS B72 WITH L72 OIL-FOG LUBRICATOR FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
psig

bar g

psig

bar g
PORT SIZE: 1/4" ELEMENT: 40 µm PORT SIZE: 1/4" ELEMENT: 40 µm
12 INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar g (150 psig) 12 INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar g (150 psig)
RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig)
150 150
OUTLET PRESSURE

OUTLET PRESSURE
9 9
120 120

90 6
NEW CURVES NEEDED 90 6 NEW CURVES NEEDED
60 Waiting on lab test 60 Waiting on lab test
3 3
30 30

0 0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s 0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s

0 20 40 60 80 100 scfm 0 20 40 60 80 100 scfm

AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures
can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult Norgren.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

N/AL.8.160.805.04 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
4/98
 B73, L73

EXCELON® 73
Filter/Regulator-Lubricator Combination Units
1/4", 3/8", 1/2" Port Sizes

● True modularity with Norgren Quikclamp™

connections

● Quick release bayonet bowl

● Lubricator flow sensor provides a nearly constant

oil/air ratio over a wide range of air flows

● All around (360°) visibility of the lubricator sight-feed

dome simplifies installation and adjustment

● Regulator balanced valve minimizes effect of variation

in the inlet pressure on the outlet pressure

Use Micro-Fog models in applications containing one or more

points of lubrication.
Use Oil-Fog models to lubricate a single tool, cylinder, or other air
driven device.

Technical Data Materials:

Fluid: Compressed air Body: Aluminum
Maximum pressure: Bonnet: Aluminum
Transparent bowl: 10 bar (150 psig) Filter/Regulator valve: Brass
Metal bowl: 17 bar (250 psig) Bowl:
Operating temperature*: Transparent: Polycarbonate
Transparent bowl: -20° to +50°C (0° to +125°F) Transparent with guard: Polycarbonate,
Metal bowl: -20° to +80°C (0° to +175°F) steel guard
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2°C Metal: Aluminum
(+35°F). Metal bowl liquid level indicator lens:
Particle removal: 5 µm, 25 µm, or 40 µm filter element Transparent nylon
Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 (90 psig) set Sight-Feed dome: Transparent nylon
pressure and 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set: ??? dm3/s Element: Sintered plastic
(??? scfm) Waiting on lab test Elastomers: Neoprene and nitrile
Manual drain connection: 1/8"
Automatic drain connection:1/8" Ordering Information
Automatic drain operating conditions (float operated): See Ordering Information on the following
Bowl pressure required to close drain: Greater than 0,3 bar pages.
(5 psig)
Bowl pressure required to open drain: Less than 0,2 bar (3 psig)
Minimum air flow required to close drain: 0,1 dm3/s (0.2 scfm) ISO Symbol
Manual operation: Depress pin inside drain outlet to drain bowl
Nominal bowl size: 0,1 litre (3.5 fluid ounce)
Gauge ports:
1⁄4 PTF with PTF main ports
ISO Rc1/4 with ISO Rc main ports
ISO Rc1/8 with ISO G main ports Relieving, automatic drain on filter, manual drain on lubricator
Recommended lubricants: See page N/AL.8.900.935

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

4/98 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.180.805.01
 EXCELON® 73 F/R-L Combination Units

Ordering information
Models listed in order table have ISO G parallel threads. Filter/Regulator (F/R) has knob adjustment, automatic drain, metal bowl
with liquid level indicator, 40 µm element, relieving diaphragm, and 10 bar (150 psig) regulating spring. A gauge is not included.
Lubricator (L) is a Micro-Fog model with 1/4 turn manual drain and metal bowl with liquid level indicator.

Combination Unit Type Port Size Model Flow* dm3/s (scfm) Weight kg (lb)
G1/4 C73H-2GK-AD3-RMN-QDN ?? (??) waiting on test 1,36 (3.0)
Filter/Regulator-Lubricator G3/8 C73H-3GK-AD3-RMN-QDN ?? (??) waiting on test 1,36 (3.0)
(F/R-L) G1/2 C73H-4GK-AD3-RMN-QDN ?? (??) waiting on test 1,36 (3.0)
* Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set pressure and 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set.

Alternative Models ★ 7 3 ★ - ★ ★ ★ - ★ ★★ -★★ ★ - ★ ★ ★

Lockout Valve/ Quikmount Substitute Accessories Substitute
Standard Combination (No C Quikclamp wall brackets B
Lockout Valve, no Quikmount) Accessories B and Q C
With Lockout valve on inlet D No accessories N
With Quikmount pipe adapters E Lubricator quick fill nipple Q
on inlet and outlet
With Lockout valve on inlet and G Lubricator Bowl Substitute
Quikmount pipe adapter on Metal with liquid level indicator D
outlet Transparent with guard P
Transparent T
Combination Unit Type Substitute
Lubricator Drain Substitute
Standard Micro-Fog F/R-L H
Closed bottom E
Standard Oil-Fog F/R-L J
Manual, 1⁄4 turn Q
Micro-Fog F/R-L with porting K
block between filter/regulator
and lubricator Filter/Regulator Gauge Substitute
Oil-Fog F/R-L with porting L With gauge G
block between filter/regulator No gauge N
and lubricator
Regulation Spring * Substitute
0,3 to 4 bar (5 to 60 psig) F
0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) M
0,7 to 17 bar (10 to 250 psig)** S

Filter/Regulator Diaphragm Substitute

Non-relieving N
Relieving R

Port Size Substitute Filter Element Substitute

1/4" 2 5 µm 1
3/8" 3 25 µm 2
1/2" 4 40 µm 3

Threads Substitute Filter Bowl Substitute

PTF A Metal with liquid level indicator D
ISO Rc taper B Transparent with steel guard P
ISO G parallel G Transparent T

Pressure Adjustment Substitute Filter Drain Substitute

Knob K Automatic A
T-bar T Manual, 1⁄4 turn Q

* Outlet pressure can be adjusted to pressures in excess of, and less ** Units with 17 bar (250 psig) outlet pressure range are available only
than, those specified. Do not use these units to control with the standard metal bowl.
pressures outside of the specified ranges.

Accessories. See page N/AL.8.180.700.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

N/AL.8.180.805.02 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
4/98
 EXCELON® 73 F/R-L Combination Units

Dimensions mm (inches). See pages N/AL.8.180.300, N/AL.8.180.400, N/AL.8.180.600, and N/AL.8.180.700 for
dimensions of individual products and the Quikclamp wall bracket.
Standard Micro-Fog Type C73H- 150 (5.91) Alternative Micro-Fog Type D73H- 218 (8.58)
Standard Oil-Fog Type C73J- Alternative Oil-Fog Type D73J-
Shown with optional gauge and Includes lockout valve.

51 (2.00)

51 (2.00)
Quikclamp wall bracket. Shown with optional gauge and
Quikclamp wall brackets.
75 75 61 75
(2.95) (2.95) (2.40) 82 (3.23) (2.95)

(3.25)

(3.25)
83

83
Alternative Micro-Fog Type E73H- 213 (8.39) Alternative Micro-Fog Type G73H- 249 (9.80)
Alternative Oil-Fog Type E73J- Alternative Oil-Fog Type G73J-
Includes Quikmount pipe adapters. Includes lockout valve and
51 (2.00)

51 (2.00)
Shown with optional gauge and Quikmount pipe adapter.
Quikclamp wall brackets. Shown with optional gauge and
Quikclamp wall brackets. 61
163 (6.42) (2.40) 163 (6.42)
(3.25)

(3.25)
83

83
Alternative Micro-Fog Type C73K- 197 (7.76) Alternative Micro-Fog Type D73K- 264 (10.39)
Alternative Oil-Fog Type C73L- Alternative Oil-Fog Type D73L-
Includes porting block. Includes lockout valve and
51 (2.00)

51 (2.00)
porting block.
Shown with optional gauge and
Quikclamp wall brackets. Shown with optional gauge and
Quikclamp wall brackets.
75 47 75 61 75
(2.95) (1.85) (2.95) (2.40) 128 (5.04) (2.95)
(3.25)

(3.25)
83

83

Alternative Micro-Fog Type E73K- 259 (10.20) Alternative Micro-Fog Type G73K- 295 (11.63)
Alternative Oil-Fog Type E73L- Alternative Oil-Fog Type G73L-
Includes Quikmount pipe Includes lockout valve, Quikmount
51 (2.00)

51 (2.00)

adapters and porting block. pipe adapter, and porting block.

Shown with optional gauge and Shown with optional gauge and
Quikclamp wall brackets. Quikclamp wall brackets.
61
210 (8.27) (2.40) 210 (8.27)
(3.25)

(3.25)
83

83

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

4/98 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
N/AL.8.180.805.03
 EXCELON® 73 F/R-L Combination Units

Typical Performance Characteristics

F/R WITH MICRO-FOG LUBRICATOR FLOW CHARACTERISTICS F/R WITH OIL-FOG LUBRICATOR FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

psig
psig

bar
PORT SIZE: 3/8"
bar

PORT SIZE: 3/8"

ELEMENT: 40 µm ELEMENT: 40 µm
INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar (150 psig) INLET PRESSURE: 10 bar (150 psig)
RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) RANGE: 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig)
100 100

OUTLET PRESSURE
OUTLET PRESSURE

6 6
80 80
NEW CURVES NEEDED NEW CURVES NEEDED
60 4 Waiting on lab test 60 4 Waiting on lab test
40 40

2 2
20 20

0 0 0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 dm3/s 0 20 40 60 80 100 dm3/s

0 40 80 120 160 200 scfm 0 40 80 120 160 200 scfm

AIR FLOW AIR FLOW

Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures
can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult Norgren.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.

Our policy is one of continuous research and development.

N/AL.8.180.805.04 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
4/98
Válvulas

SERIES V60-63
Válvulas en línea
Accionamiento eléctrico y neumático
3/2, 5/2, 5/3 y 2 x 3/2

2 4

12 10 10 14
3 1 5
2 4

12 10
10 14
3 1 5

Gran caudal Válvulas 3/2, accionamiento eléctrico

Volumen reducido Función Tamaño de Acciona- Alimentación Escape piloto Caudal Presión de Presión del Modelo
la conexión miento piloto (l/min) trabajo (bar) piloto (bar)
Sistema probado de juntas NC G1/8 Sol/aire Interno Libre 750 2 ... 8 – V60A413A-A#***
Diferentes opciones de mando NC G1/8 Sol/aire Externo Libre 750 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V60A423A-A#***
manual como estándar NC G1/8 Solenoide/muelle Interno Libre 750 3 ... 8 – V60A417A-A#***
Libre de mantenimiento NC G1/8 Sol/aire Interno Conducido 750 2 ... 10 – V60A413D-C#13A
NC G1/4 Sol/aire Interno Libre 1300 2 ... 8 – V61B413A-A#***
Bajo consumo (2 W) NC G1/4 Sol/aire Externo Libre 1300 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V61B423A-A#***
Aplicación para controles NC G1/4 Solenoide/muelle Interno Libre 1300 3 ... 8 – V61B417A-A#***
piloto NC G1/4 Sol/aire Interno Conducido 1300 2 ... 10 – V61B413D-C#13A
NC G3/8 Sol/aire Interno Libre 2600 2 ... 8 – V62C413A-A#***
DATOS TÉCNICOS NC
NC
G3/8
G1/2
Sol/aire
Sol/aire
Externo
Interno
Libre
Libre
2600
4200
-0,9 ... 8
2 ... 8
3 ... 8
–
V62C423A-A#***
V63D413A-A#***
Fluido: NC G1/2 Sol/aire Externo Libre 4200 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V63D423A-A#***
Aire comprimido, filtrado a 50 NA G1/8 Sol/aire Interno Libre 750 2 ... 8 – V60A313A-A#***
µm, lubricado y no lubricado. NA G1/8 Sol/aire Externo Libre 750 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V60A323A-A#***
NA G1/4 Sol/aire Interno Libre 1300 2 ... 8 – V61B313A-A#***
Funcionamiento: NA G1/4 Sol/aire Externo Libre 1300 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V61B323A-A#***
Control electromagnético o NA G3/8 Sol/aire Interno Libre 2600 2 ... 8 – V62C313A-A#***
neumático NA G1/2 Sol/aire Interno Libre 4200 2 ... 8 – V63D313A-A#***
Conexión: – G1/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 750 1,5 ... 8 – V60A411A-A#***
– G1/8 Doble sol Externo Libre 750 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V60A422A-A#***
G 1/8 hasta G 1/2
– G1/4 Doble sol Interno Libre 1300 1,5 ... 8 – V61B411A-A#***
Presión de trabajo: – G1/4 Doble sol Externo Libre 1300 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V61B422A-A#***
1,5/2 hasta 8/10 bar – G3/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 2600 1,5 ... 8 – V62C411A-A#***
– G3/8 Doble sol Externo Libre 2600 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V62C422A-A#***
Caudal: – G1/2 Doble sol Interno Libre 4200 1,5 ... 8 – V63D411A-A#***
Tamaño 3/2, 5/2 2 x 3/2, 5/3 – G1/2 Doble sol Externo Libre 4200 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V63D422A-A#***
G1/8 750 500
G1/4 1300 950
Válvulas 2 x 3/2, accionamiento eléctrico
G3/8 2600 1900
Función Tamaño de Acciona- Alimentación Escape piloto Caudal Presión de Presión del Modelo
G1/2 4200 2200 (5/3) la conexión miento piloto (l/min) trabajo (bar) piloto (bar)
Datos para el Suministro: NC G1/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 500 2 ... 8 – V60AA11A-A#***
-10°C a +50°C. NC G1/8 Doble sol Interno Conducido 500 2 ... 10 – V60AA11D-C#13A
NC G1/4 Doble sol Interno Libre 950 2 ... 8 – V61BA11A-A#***
Temperatura ambiente:
NC G1/4 Doble sol Interno Conducido 950 2 ... 10 – V61BA11D-C#13A
-10°C a +50°C NC G3/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 1900 2 ... 8 – V62CA11A-A#***
Consultar nuestro Servicio Técnico para NA G1/8 Sol/Sol Interno Libre 500 2 ... 8 – V60AB11A-A#***
temperaturas inferiores a +2°C.
NA G1/4 Doble sol Interno Libre 950 2 ... 8 – V61BB11A-A#***
NA/NC G1/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 500 2 ... 8 – V60AC11A-A#***
NA/NC G1/8 Doble sol Interno Conducido 500 2 ... 10 – V60AC11D-C#13A
NA/NC G1/4 Doble sol Interno Libre 950 2 ... 8 – V61BC11A-A#***
*** Insertar código bobina según tabla adjunta o 000 para versión sin solenoide . Para opciones de mando manual, sustituir '#' como sigue: 2 = pulsar y
bloquear, 3 = sólo pulsar
NC = Normalmente cerrada, NA = Normalmente abierta
NC/NC = Ambas válvulas normalmente cerradas (vía P) NA/NA = Ambas válvulas normalmente abiertas (vía P) NA/NC = 1 válvula
normalmente abierta, 1 válvula normalmente cerrada (vía P)
Para información técnica sobre variants del solenoids, ver 'Códigos de voltaje y bobina' en la página 75

74 www.norgren.com/info/nec/es074
Válvulas 5/2, accionamiento eléctrico
Tamaño de la conexión Accionamiento Alimentación piloto Escape piloto Caudal (l/min) Presión de trabajo (bar) Presión del piloto (bar) Modelo
G1/8 Sol/aire Interno Libre 750 2 ... 8 – V60A513A-A#***
G1/8 Sol/aire Externo Libre 750 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V60A523A-A#***
G1/8 Solenoide/muelle Interno Libre 750 3 ... 8 – V60A517A-A#***
G1/8 Sol/aire Interno Conducido 750 2 ... 10 – V60A513D-C#13A
G1/8 Sol/aire Externo Conducido 750 -0,9 ... 10 3 ... 10 V60A523D-C#13A
G1/4 Sol/aire Interno Libre 1300 2 ... 8 – V61B513A-A#***
G1/4 Sol/aire Externo Libre 1300 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V61B523A-A#***
G1/4 Solenoide/muelle Interno Libre 1300 3 ... 8 – V61B517A-A#***
G1/4 Sol/aire Interno Conducido 1300 2 ... 10 – V61B513D-C#13A
G3/8 Sol/aire Interno Libre 2600 2 ... 8 – V62C513A-A#***
G3/8 Sol/aire Externo Libre 2600 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V62C523A-A#***
G3/8 Solenoide/muelle Interno Libre 2600 3 ... 8 – V62C517A-A#***
G3/8 Solenoide/muelle Externo Libre 2600 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V62C527A-A#***
G1/2 Sol/aire Interno Libre 4200 2 ... 8 – V63D513A-A#***
G1/2 Sol/aire Externo Libre 4200 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V63D523A-A#***
G1/2 Sol/muelle Interno Libre 4200 3 ... 8 – V63D517A-A#***
G1/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 750 2 ... 8 – V60A511A-A#***
G1/8 Doble sol Externo Libre 750 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V60A522A-A#***
G1/8 Doble sol Interno Conducido 750 2 ... 10 – V60A511D-C#13A
G1/4 Doble sol Interno Libre 1300 2 ... 8 – V61B511A-A#***
G1/4 Doble sol Externo Libre 1300 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V61B522A-A#***
G1/4 Doble sol Interno Conducido 1300 2 ... 10 – V61B511D-C#13A
G3/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 2600 2 ... 8 – V62C511A-A#***
G3/8 Doble sol Externo Libre 2600 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V62C522A-A#***
G1/2 Sol/Sol Interno Libre 4200 2 ... 8 – V63D511A-A#***

Válvulas 5/3, accionamiento eléctrico

Función Tamaño de la conexión Accionamiento Alimentación piloto Escape piloto Caudal (l/min) Presión de trabajo (bar) Presión del piloto (bar) Modelo
TCB G1/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 500 3 ... 8 – V60A611A-A#***
TCB G1/8 Doble sol Externo Libre 500 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V60A622A-A#***
TCB G1/8 Doble sol Externo Conducido 500 -0,9 ... 10 3 ... 10 V60A622D-C#13A
TCB G1/4 Doble sol Interno Libre 950 3 ... 8 – V61B611A-A#***
TCB G1/4 Doble sol Externo Libre 950 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V61B622A-A#***
TCB G1/4 Doble sol Interno Conducido 950 3 ... 10 – V61B611D-C#13A
TCB G3/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 1900 3 ... 8 – V62C611A-A#***
TCB G3/8 Doble sol Externo Libre 1900 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V62C622A-A#***
TCB G1/2 Sol/Sol Interno Libre 2200 2,5 .... 8 – V63D611A-A#***
CAE G1/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 500 3 ... 8 – V60A711A-A#***
CAE G1/8 Doble sol Externo Libre 500 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V60A722A-A#***
CAE G1/4 Doble sol Interno Libre 950 3 ... 8 – V61B711A-A#***
CAE G1/4 Doble sol Externo Libre 950 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V61B722A-A#***
CAE G1/4 Doble sol Interno Conducido 950 3 ... 10 – V61B711D-C#13A
CAE G3/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 1900 3 ... 8 – V62C711A-A#***
CAE G3/8 Doble sol Externo Libre 1900 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V62C722A-A#***
CAE G1/2 Sol/Sol Interno Libre 2200 2,5 .... 8 – V63D711A-A#***
CAP G1/8 Doble sol Interno Libre 500 3 ... 8 – V60A811A-A#***
CAP G1/4 Doble sol Interno Libre 950 3 ... 8 – V61B811A-A#***
CAP G1/4 Doble sol Externo Libre 950 -0,9 ... 8 3 ... 8 V61B822A-A#***
CAP G3/8 Doble solenoide Interno Libre 1900 3 ... 8 – V62C811A-A#***
*** Insertar código bobina según tabla adjunta o 000 para versión sin solenoide . Para opciones de mando manual, sustituir '#' como sigue: 2 = pulsar y bloquear, 3 = sólo pulsar
Nota: Opciones de retorno por muelle mecánico bajo demanda.
TCB = Todas las Conexiones Cerradas, CAE = Centro Abierto a Escape, CAP = Centro Abierto a Presión.

CÓDIGOS DE VOLTAJE Y BOBINAS

Bobina 22 mm DIN EN 175 301-803 (DIN 43650 B) Bobina 22 mm standard industrial
Voltaje Código bobina Potencia arranque/mant. Modelo Voltaje Código bobina Potencia arranque/mant. Modelo
24 V c.c. 13L 2W V10626-A13L 24 V c.c. 13J 2W QM/48/13J/21
24 V 50/60 Hz 14L 4/2,5 VA V10626-A14L 24 V 50/60 Hz 14J 4/2,5 VA QM/48/14J/21
48 V 50/60 Hz 16L 4/2,5 VA V10626-A16L 48 V 50/60 Hz 16J 4/2,5 VA QM/48/16J/21
110/120 V 50/60 Hz 18L 4/2,5 VA V10626-A18L 110/120 V 50/60 Hz 18J 4/2,5 VA QM/48/18J/21
220/240 V 50/60 Hz 19L 6/5 VA V10626-A19L 220/240 V 50/60 Hz 19J 6/5 VA QM/48/19J/21
Los conectores deben solicitarse por separado – ver página 77

75
Válvulas

SERIE V60-63
Válvulas en línea
Accionamiento eléctrico y neumático
3/2, 5/2, 5/3 y 2 x 3/2

Válvulas 3/2, accionamiento neumático

Función Tamaño de la conexión Accionamiento 12 Accionamiento 10 Caudal (l/min) Presión de trabajo (bar) Presión del piloto (bar) Modelo
NC G1/8 Aire Muelle 750 -0,9 ... 10 2,5 ... 10 V60A4D7A-XA090
NC G1/4 Aire Muelle 1300 -0,9 ... 10 2,5 ... 10 V61B4D7A-XA090
NC G3/8 Aire Muelle 2600 -0,9 ... 10 2,5 ... 10 V62C4D7A-XA090
NC G1/2 Aire Muelle 4200 -0,9 ... 16 3 ... 16 V63D4D7A-XA090
NA G1/8 Muelle Aire 750 -0,9 ... 10 2,5 ... 10 V60A3D7A-XA090
NA G1/4 Muelle Aire 1300 -0,9 ... 10 2,5 ... 10 V61B3D7A-XA090
NA G3/8 Muelle Aire 2600 -0,9 ... 10 2,5 ... 10 V62C3D7A-XA090
NA G1/2 Muelle Aire 4200 -0,9 ... 16 3 ... 16 V63D3D7A-XA090
– G1/8 Aire Aire 750 -0,9 ... 10 1,5 ... 10 V60A4DDA-XA020
– G1/4 Aire Aire 1300 -0,9 ... 10 1,5 ... 10 V61B4DDA-XA020
– G1/2 Aire Aire 4200 -0,9 ... 16 1,5 ... 16 V63D4DDA-XA020
NC = Normalmente cerrada, NA = Normalmente abierta

Válvulas 2 x 3/2, accionamiento neumático

Función Tamaño de la conexión Accionamiento 14 Accionamiento 12 Caudal (l/min) Presión de trabajo (bar) Presión del piloto (bar) Modelo
NC G1/8 Aire Aire 500 2 ... 10 2 ... 10 V60AADDA-XA020
NC G1/4 Aire Aire 950 2 ... 10 2 ... 10 V61BADDA-XA020

Válvulas 5/2, accionamiento neumático

Tamaño de la conexión Accionamiento 12 Accionamiento 10 Caudal (l/min) Presión de trabajo (bar) Presión del piloto (bar) Modelo
G1/8 Aire Muelle 750 -0,9 ... 10 2,5 ... 10 V60A5D7A-XA090
G1/4 Aire Muelle 1300 -0,9 ... 10 2,5 ... 10 V61B5D7A-XA090
G3/8 Aire Muelle 2600 -0,9 ... 10 2,5 ... 10 V62C5D7A-XA090
G1/2 Aire Muelle 4200 -0,9 ... 16 3 ... 16 V63D5D7A-XA090
G1/8 Aire Aire 750 -0,9 ... 10 1,5 ... 10 V60A5DDA-XA020
G1/4 Aire Aire 1300 -0,9 ... 10 1,5 ... 10 V61B5DDA-XA020
G3/8 Aire Aire 2600 -0,9 ... 10 1,5 ... 10 V62C5DDA-XA020
G1/2 Aire Aire 4200 -0,9 ... 16 1,5 ... 16 V63D5DDA-XA020

Válvulas 5/3, accionamiento neumático

Función Tamaño de la conexión Accionamiento 14 Accionamiento 12 Caudal (l/min) Presión de trabajo (bar) Presión del piloto (bar) Modelo
TCB G1/8 Aire Aire 500 -0,9 ... 10 3 ... 10 V60A6DDA-XA020
TCB G1/4 Aire Aire 950 -0,9 ... 10 3 ... 10 V61B6DDA-XA020
TCB G3/8 Aire Aire 1900 -0,9 ... 10 3 ... 10 V62C6DDA-XA020
CAE G1/8 Aire Aire 500 -0,9 ... 10 3 ... 10 V60A7DDA-XA020
CAE G1/4 Aire Aire 950 -0,9 ... 10 3 ... 10 V61B7DDA-XA020
CAP G1/8 Aire Aire 500 -0,9 ... 10 3 ... 10 V60A8DDA-XA020
Nota: Cambio de posición central interna mediante muelle.
TCB = Todas las Conexiones Cerradas, CAE = Centro Abierto a Escape, CAP = Centro Abierto a Presión.

ACCESORIOS
Válvulas Conectores
Silenciador en bronce Estándar industrial 22 mm DIN EN 175301-803 DIN EN 175301-803
sinterizado 2-polos + PE (DIN 43650 B) (DIN 43650 C)
2-polos + PE 3-polos + PE

0014510 G1/8
0014610 G1/4 0680000 15...30 V c.c.; LED, supresor puntas tensión 0680003 12...250 V c.a./c.c. 0588666 12...250 V c.a./c.c.
0014710 G3/8 0664811 15...30 V c.c.; LED, supresor puntas tensión 0102144 12...250 V c.a./c.c.; cable 3 m
0014810 G1/2 0664812 150...250 V c.a.; glim lamp

76
Conectores 22 mm según Standard Industrial
Conector Longitud Voltaje Características Modelo
del cable c.a. c.c.
Conector con cable integrado 1000 mm 250 V 250 V – M/P43313/1
Conector con cable integrado 3000 mm 250 V 250 V – M/P43313/3

Conector con indicador – 12 ... 24 V 12 ... 24 V Lámpara M/P24121/1

Conector con indicador – 115 V 115 V Neón M/P24121/2
Conector con prensaestopas e indicador – 230 V 230 V Neón M/P24121/3

Conector con indicador y cable integrado 1000 mm 24 V 24 V LED,VDR M/P43314/11

Conector con indicador y cable integrado 3000 mm 24 V 24 V LED,VDR M/P43314/13
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 1000 mm 115 V 115 V LED,VDR M/P43314/21
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 3000 mm 115 V 115 V LED,VDR M/P43314/23
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 1000 mm 230 V 230 V LED,VDR M/P43314/31
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 3000 mm 230 V 230 V LED,VDR M/P43314/33

Juntas luminosas – 12 ... 24 V 12 ... 24 V LED verde M/P40859

Juntas luminosas – 110 ... 120 V 110 ... 120 V LED verde M/P40886
Juntas luminosas – 220 ... 240 V 220 ... 240 V LED verde M/P40860

77
Válvulas

ISO˙STAR
Accionamiento por piloto y solenoide
Sub-base
5/2 y 5/3, ISO #1-ISO #3

Corredera y camisa Solenoide

anticorrosión para una Tamaño Función Acciona- Regulador Posición Modelos solenoide final Modelos de solenoide CNOMO
duración máxima. miento de caudal inter- Presión de Modelo Presión de Modelo
media trabajo (bar) trabajo (bar)
Reguladores de caudal
ISO #1 5/2 Sol/muelle – – 1,8 ... 10 SXE9573-A71-00/*** 1,8 ... 16 SXE9573-Z71-81/***
integrados en los modelos
ISO #1 5/2 Sol/muelle Integrado – 1,8 ... 10 SXE9573-A81-00/*** 1,8 ... 16 SXE9573-Z81-81/***
ISO #1 y #2.
ISO #1 5/2 Sol/muelle neumático – – 1 ... 10 SXE9573-A70-00/*** 1 ... 10 SXE9573-Z70-60/***
Solenoides de bajo consumo ISO #1 5/2 Sol/muelle neumático Integrado – 1 ... 10 SXE9573-A80-00/*** 1 ... 10 SXE9573-Z80-60/***
con mando manual como ISO #1 5/2 Sol/sol – – 2 ... 10 SXE0573-A50-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE0573-Z50-81/***
standard. ISO #1 5/2 Sol/sol Integrado – 2 ... 10 SXE0573-A60-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE0573-Z60-81/***
ISO #1 5/3 Sol/sol Integrado TCB 2 ... 10 SXE9673-A60-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE9673-Z60-81/***
Amplia gama de sub-bases y
ISO #1 5/3 Sol/sol Integrado CAE 2 ... 10 SXE9773-A60-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE9773-Z60-81/***
accesorios.
ISO #1 5/3 Sol/sol Integrado CAP 2 ... 10 SXE9873-A60-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE9873-Z60-81/***
ISO #2 5/2 Sol/muelle – – 1,8 ... 10 SXE9574-A71-00/*** 1,8 ... 16 SXE9574-Z71-81/***
DATOS TÉCNICOS ISO #2 5/2 Sol/muelle Integrado – 1,8 ... 10 SXE9574-A81-00/*** 1,8 ... 16 SXE9574-Z81-81/***
Fluido: ISO #2 5/2 Sol/muelle neumático – – 1 ... 10 SXE9574-A70-00/*** 1 ... 10 SXE9574-Z70-60/***
ISO #2 5/2 Sol/muelle neumático Integrado – 1 ... 10 SXE9574-A80-00/*** 1 ... 10 SXE9574-Z80-60/***
Aire comprimido, filtrado,
ISO #2 5/2 Sol/sol – – 2 ... 10 SXE0574-A50-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE0574-Z50-81/***
lubricado, no lubricado y seco.
ISO #2 5/2 Sol/sol Integrado – 2 ... 10 SXE0574-A60-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE0574-Z60-81/***
Presión de trabajo: ISO #2 5/3 Sol/sol Integrado TCB 2 ... 10 SXE9674-A60-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE9674-Z60-81/***
Máximo 16 bar, ver ISO #2 5/3 Sol/sol Integrado CAE 2 ... 10 SXE9774-A60-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE9774-Z60-81/***
características individuales. ISO #2 5/3 Sol/sol Integrado CAP 2 ... 10 SXE9874-A60-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE9874-Z60-81/***
ISO #3 5/2 Sol/muelle – – 1,8 ... 10 SXE9575-A71-00/*** 1,8 ... 16 SXE9575-Z71-81/***
Caudal: ISO #3 5/2 Sol/muelle neumático – – 1 ... 10 SXE9575-A70-00/*** 1 ... 10 SXE9575-Z70-60/***
ISO #1 1230 l/min ISO #3 5/2 Sol/sol – – 2 ... 10 SXE0575-A50-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE0575-Z50-81/***
ISO #2 2450 l/min ISO #3 5/3 Sol/sol – TCB 2 ... 10 SXE9675-A50-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE9675-Z50-81/***
ISO #3 4400 l/min ISO #3 5/3 Sol/sol – CAE 2 ... 10 SXE9775-A50-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE9775-Z50-81/***
ISO #3 5/3 Sol/sol – CAP 2 ... 10 SXE9875-A50-00/*** 2 ... 16 SXE9875-Z50-81/***
Temperatura ambiente:
TCB = Todas las Conexiones Cerradas, CAE = Centro Abierto a Escape, CAP = Centro Abierto a Presión. Recambios no disponibles para estas válvulas.
-15°C a +50°C accto. eléctrico *** Insertar códigos de voltaje para modelos estándar o CNOMO según la tabla adjunta. Solicitar conectores por separado.
-15°C a +80°C accto. neumático. Mando manual en modelos de solenoide final: Pulsar para activar el retorno por muelle, con bloqueo
Consultar nuestro Servicio Técnico para Mando manual en modelos de solenoide CNOMO (-60/***): Selector dos posiciones
temperaturas inferiores a +2°C. Mando manual en modelos de solenoide CNOMO (-81/***): Pulsar para activar el retorno por muelle

Códigos de voltaje y bobinas de recambio para modelos de 10 bar

Voltaje Bobina de 22 mm con conector interface Bobina de 22 mm con conector interface Bobina de 30 mm con conector interface
según standard industrial según DIN 43650 tabla B según DIN 43650 tabla A
Código Potencia arranque/mant. Modelo Código Potencia arranque/mant. Modelo Código Potencia arranque/mant. Modelo
12 V c.c. 12J 2W QM/48/12J/21
24 V c.c. 13J 2W QM/48/13J/21 13L 2W V10626-A13L 23N 1,5 W V10633-A23N
24 V 50/60 Hz 14J 4/2,5 VA QM/48/14J/21 28N 2 VA V10633-A28N
110/120 V 50/60 Hz 18J 4/2,5 VA QM/48/18J/21
220/240 V 50/60 Hz 19J 6/5 VA QM/48/19J/21

Códigos de voltaje para solenoides CNOMO

Voltaje Bobina de 30 mm con conector
interface según DIN 43650 tabla A
Código Potencia arranque/mant. Modelo
24 V c.c. 33N 4W V10633-A33N
110/120 V c.a. 88N 8 VA V10633-A88N
230 V c.a. 89N 8 VA V10633-A89N
Para detalles de los conectores e indicadores, ver página 72

70 www.norgren.com/info/nec/es070
Válvulas de accionamiento neumático
Tamaño Función Accionamiento Regulador de Posición Presión de trabajo Modelo
caudal intermedia (bar)
ISO #1 5/2 Piloto/muelle – – -0,9 ... 16 SXP9573-170-00
ISO #1 5/2 Piloto/muelle Integrado – -0,9 ... 16 SXP9573-180-00
ISO #1 5/2 Piloto/piloto – – -0,9 ... 16 SXP0573-170-00
ISO #1 5/2 Piloto/piloto Integrado – -0,9 ... 16 SXP0573-180-00
ISO #1 5/3 Piloto/piloto Integrado TCB -0,9 ... 16 SXP9673-180-00
ISO #1 5/3 Piloto/piloto Integrado CAE -0,9 ... 16 SXP9773-180-00
ISO #1 5/3 Piloto/piloto Integrado CAP -0,9 ... 16 SXP9873-180-00
ISO #1 5/2 Piloto/muelle – – -0,9 ... 16 SXP9574-170-00
ISO #1 5/2 Piloto/muelle Integrado – -0,9 ... 16 SXP9574-180-00
ISO #1 5/2 Piloto/piloto – – -0,9 ... 16 SXP0574-170-00
ISO #1 5/2 Piloto/piloto Integrado – -0,9 ... 16 SXP0574-180-00
ISO #1 5/3 Piloto/piloto Integrado TCB -0,9 ... 16 SXP9674-180-00
ISO #1 5/3 Piloto/piloto Integrado CAE -0,9 ... 16 SXP9774-180-00
ISO #1 5/3 Piloto/piloto Integrado CAP -0,9 ... 16 SXP9874-180-00
ISO #1 5/2 Piloto/muelle – – -0,9 ... 16 SXP9575-170-00
ISO #1 5/2 Piloto/piloto – – -0,9 ... 16 SXP0575-170-00
ISO #1 5/3 Piloto/piloto – TCB -0,9 ... 16 SXP9675-170-00
ISO #1 5/3 Piloto/piloto – CAE -0,9 ... 16 SXP9775-170-00
ISO #1 5/3 Piloto/piloto – CAP -0,9 ... 16 SXP9875-170-00
TCB = Todas las Conexiones Cerradas, CAE = Centro Abierto a Escape, CAP = Centro Abierto a Presión. Recambios no disponibles para estas válvulas.

BASES
Sub-bases VDMA 24 345
Forma A Forma C Forma D Disco de bloqueo
Conexiones laterales Manifold Placa final

ISO#1 M/P19126 (G1/4) CQM/22152/3/21 CQM/22152/3/22 FP 8382

ISO#2 M/P19132 (G3/8) CQM/22253/3/21 CQM/22253/3/22 FP 8482
ISO#3 M/P19138 (G1/2) CQM/22354/3/21 CQM/22354/3/22 FP 8582

Opciones de las bases universales

Base modular Placa final* Placa final, conexiones Placa de transición Disco de bloqueo
Conexiones laterales e inferiores laterales abiertas

ISO#1 CQM/22152/3/27 (G1/4) CQM/22152/3/28 (G3/8) CQM/22152/3/31 (G3/8) CQM/22152/3/29 (#1-#2) M/P43173
ISO#2 CQM/22253/3/27 (G3/8) CQM/22253/3/28 (G1/2) CQM/22253/3/31 (G1/2) M/P43174
* Todas las vías se suministran tapadas para una configuración del sistema óptima.

ACCESORIOS
Regulador presión placa sandwich Regulador presión placa sandwich Regulador presión placa sandwich Placa reguladora de doble presión

ISO #1 V71010-KB1 Vía 1 reg. V71012-KB2 Vía 2 reg. V71012-KB3 Vía 4 reg. V71012-KB4 Vías 2+4 reg.
ISO #2 V71010-KC1 Vía 1 reg. V71012-KC2 Vía 2 reg. V71012-KC3 Vía 4 reg. V71012-KC4 Vías 2+4 reg.
ISO #3 V71010-KD1 Vía 1 reg. V71012-KD2 Vía 2 reg. V71012-KD3 Vía 4 reg. V71012-KD4 Vías 2+4 reg.

71
Válvulas

ISO˙STAR
Accionamiento por piloto y solenoide
Sub-base
5/2 y 5/3, ISO #1-ISO #3

Conectores 22mm según Standard Industrial o DIN 43650 Tabla B, IP65

Conector Tipo Longitud Voltaje Características Modelo
del cable c.a. c.c.
Conector con cable integrado 22 mm Standard industrial 1000 mm 250 V 250 V – M/P43313/1
Conector con cable integrado 22 mm Standard industrial 3000 mm 250 V 250 V – M/P43313/3

Conector con prensaestopas DIN43650 Forma B – 12 ... 250 V 12 ... 250 V – 0657868000000

Conector con indicador 22 mm Standard industrial – 12 ... 24 V 12 ... 24 V Lámpara M/P24121/1

Conector con indicador 22 mm Standard industrial – 115 V 115 V Neón M/P24121/2
Conector con prensaestopas e indicador 22 mm Standard industrial – 230 V 230 V Neón M/P24121/3

Conector con indicador y cable integrado 22 mm Standard industrial 1000 mm 24 V 24 V LED,VDR M/P43314/11
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 22 mm Standard industrial 3000 mm 24 V 24 V LED,VDR M/P43314/13
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 22 mm Standard industrial 1000 mm 115 V 115 V LED,VDR M/P43314/21
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 22 mm Standard industrial 3000 mm 115 V 115 V LED,VDR M/P43314/23
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 22 mm Standard industrial 1000 mm 230 V 230 V LED,VDR M/P43314/31
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 22 mm Standard industrial 3000 mm 230 V 230 V LED,VDR M/P43314/33
Juntas luminosas 22 mm Standard industrial – 12 ... 24 V 12 ... 24 V LED verde M/P40859
Juntas luminosas 22 mm Standard industrial – 110 ... 120 V 110 ... 120 V LED verde M/P40886
Juntas luminosas 22 mm Standard industrial – 220 ... 240 V 220 ... 240 V LED verde M/P40860

Conector con indicador DIN43650 Forma B – – 24 V LED 0664811

Conector con indicador DIN43650 Forma B – 250 V – LED 0664812
Conector con indicador 22 mm standard industrial – – 15 V, 30 V LED 0680000

Conectores 30 mm según DIN 43 650 Tabla A, IP65

Conector Longitud Voltaje Características Modelo
del cable c.a. c.c.
Conector con cable integrado 1000 mm 250 V 250 V – M/P43315/1
Conector con cable integrado 3000 mm 250 V 250 V – M/P43315/3

Conector con prensaestopas – 250 V 300 V – M/P15737

Conector con prensaestopas – – 240 V – M/P19117
Conector con prensaestopas – 250 V 300 V – 0570275
Conector con prensaestopas – 12 ... 250 V 12 ... 250 V – 0663303
Conector con prensaestopas – 12 ... 240 V 12 ... 240 V – 0570110
Conector con indicador – 10 ... 50 V 10 ... 50 V Lámpara M/P24120/1
Conector con indicador – 70 ... 115 V 70 ... 115 V Neon M/P24120/2
Conector con indicador y prensaestopas – 150 ... 240 V 150 ... 240 V Neon M/P24120/3

Conector con indicador y cable integrado 1000 mm 24 V 24 V LED,VDR M/P43316/11

Conector con indicador y cable integrado 3000 mm 24 V 24 V LED,VDR M/P43316/13
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 3000 mm 110 V 110 V LED,VDR M/P43316/23
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 1000 mm 220 V 220 V LED,VDR M/P43316/31
Conector con indicador y cable integrado 3000 mm 220 V 220 V LED,VDR M/P43316/33
Juntas luminosas – 12 ... 24 V 12 ... 24 V LED verde M/P40861
Juntas luminosas – 110 ... 120 V 110 ... 120 V LED verde M/P40880
Juntas luminosas – 220 ... 240 V 220 ... 240 V LED verde M/P40862

Conector con prensaestopas – 250 V 300 V – M/P15737

72
Válvulas de control

V14 - Súper 120

Accionamiento por solenoide y piloto
Manifold de longitud fija, sub-base modular
5/2 y 5/3, GÊ

Válvulas compactas de gran

caudal
Sub-base y manifolds de perfil
bajo
Materiales ligeros y resistentes
a la corrosión
Función Accionamiento Alimentación Posición Presión de Presión del kg Modelo Kit de Montaje
Compatibles con multipolo y piloto intermedia trabajo (bar) piloto (bar) mantenimiento
Fieldbus 5/2 Sol/Muelle Interno – 1,8 ... 10 – 0,155 V14B517A-B21*A V10316-K30 Todas las bases
Montaje en superficie o Raíl DIN 5/2 Sol/Muelle Externo – -0,9 ... 10 1,8 ... 10 0,155 V14B527A-B21*A V10316-K30 Sub-bases
5/2 Sol/Muelle Int. doble – 1,8 ... 10 – 0,155 V14B5F7A-B21*A V10316-K30 Sub-base y manifold
Flexible y ampliable 5/2 Sol/Muelle Ind. ext. – -0,9 ... 10 1,8 ... 10 0,165 V14B5E7A-B21*A V10316-K30 Todas las bases
5/2 Sol/Sol Interno – 1,2 ... 10 – 0,215 V14B511A-B21*A V10316-K30 Todas las bases
5/2 Sol/Sol Externo – -0,9 ... 10 1,2 ... 10 0,215 V14B522A-B21*A V10316-K30 Sub-bases
Datos técnicos 5/2 Sol/Sol Int. doble – 1,8 ... 10 – 0,215 V14B5FFA-B21*A V10316-K30 Sub-base y manifold
Fluido: 5/2 Sol/Sol Ind. ext. – -0,9 ... 10 1,2 ... 10 0,235 V14B5EEA-B21*A V10316-K30 Todas las bases
5/2 Piloto prioritario/Piloto – - -0,9 ... 10 1,2 ... 10 0,100 V14B59DA-X0060 V10316-K30 Todas las bases
Aire comprimido y filtrado,
5/2 Piloto/Muelle – - -0,9 ... 10 1,8 ... 10 0,100 V14B5D7A-X0090 V10316-K30 Todas las bases
lubricado y no lubricado 5/2 Piloto/Piloto – - -0,9 ... 10 1,2 ... 10 0,100 V14B5DDA-X0020 V10316-K30 Todas las bases
Presión de trabajo: 5/3 Sol/Sol Interno TCB 2,2 ... 10 - 0,225 V14B611A-B21*A V10317-K30 Todas las bases
Máxima 10 bar. Ver características 5/3 Sol/Sol Externo TCB -0,9 ... 10 2,2 ... 10 0,225 V14B622A-B21*A V10317-K30 Sub-base
individuales. 5/3 Sol/Sol Int. doble TCB 2,2 ... 10 – 0,225 V14B6FFA-B21*A V10317-K30 Sub-base y manifold
5/3 Sol/Sol Interno CAE 2,2 ... 10 - 0,225 V14B711A-B21*A V10318-K30 Todas las bases
Caudal: 5/3 Sol/Sol Externo CAE -0,9 ... 10 2,2 ... 10 0,225 V14B722A-B21*A V10318-K30 Sub-base
l/min 5/3 Sol/Sol Interno CAP 2,2 ... 10 - 0,225 V14B811A-B21*A V10347-K30 Todas las bases
5/2 1152 5/3 Sol/Sol Externo CAP -0,9 ... 10 2,2 ... 10 0,225 V14B822A-B21*A V10347-K30 Sub-base
5/3 Piloto/Piloto – TCB -0,9 ... 10 2,2 ... 10 0,110 V14B6DDA-X0020 V10317-K30 Todas las bases
5/3 1014 5/3 Piloto/Piloto – CAE -0,9 ... 10 2,2 ... 10 0,110 V14B7DDA-X0020 V10318-K30 Todas las bases
Temperatura ambiente: 5/3 Piloto/Piloto – CAP -0,9 ... 10 2,2 ... 10 0,110 V14B8DDA-X0020 V10347-K30 Todas las bases
-20°C a +80°C accto. neumático TCB = Todas las Conexiones Cerradas, CAE = Centro Abierto a Escape, CAP = Centro Abierto a Presión.
* Insertar código de voltaje según tabla adjunta. Mando manual bloquear y pulsar como standard.
-20°C a +50°C accto. eléctrico Para mando manual botón pulsador, sustituir el décimo dígito por 3, ej. V14B517A-B31*A. Solicitar los conectores por separado.
Consultar nuestro Servicio Técnico para
temperaturas inferiores a +2°C. Características eléctricas para los
Códigos de voltaje y bobinas solenoides
Materiales Voltaje Código Potencia arranque/mant. Bobina Tolerancias de voltaje: ±10%
Cuerpo: aleación de aluminio 6 V c.c. 1 1,5 W V10025-A11 Funcionamiento: 100% E.D.
12 V c.c. 2 1,7 W V10025-A12 Orificio de entrada: 0,8 mm
Corredera y émbolo: aleación de Conexión eléctrica: DIN 43 650 Tabla 'C'
aluminio 24 V c.c. 3 1,7 W V10025-A13
24 V 50/60 Hz 4 4,1/2,9 VA V10025-A14 Clase de protección: IP65 (DIN 40 050)
Sub-base y manifold: aleación de 48 V 50/60 Hz 6 4,1/2,9 VA V10025-A16 Para detalles de los conectores y juntas luminosas, ver página 382
aluminio 110 V 50/60 Hz 8 3,5/2,5 VA V10025-A18
Tapas finales: copolimero 240 V 50/60 Hz 9 3,5/2,5 VA V10025-A19
reforzado en fibra de vidrio
Juntas: nitrilo
Bobina sin conector
Modelos con cable IP65
(300 mm)
alternativos Selección de válvulas
Islas de válvulas - ver página 236 Ver Selector en la página 215 para instrucciones
de cómo solicitar una válvula del tipo Súper.

Voltaje Código Potencia Bobina

12 V c.c. B*12G 2,0 W V10617-A12
24 V c.c. B*13G 2,0 W V10617-A13
* Insertar código de mando manual - 2 = pulsar y bloquear, 3 = sólo pulsar

www.norgren.com/info/es248

248
 V14 - Súper 120
Accionamiento por solenoide y piloto
Manifold de longitud fija, sub-base modular
5/2 y 5/3, GÊ

Sub-bases y accesorios
Conjunto sub-base Conjunto sub-base Sub-base modular Sub-base enchufable Kit tapa final
Conexiones laterales Conexiones inferiores

V14BAX**-XXXXX Simple presión V14BCX**-XXXXX Simple presión V14B517R-Q010G Conexiones laterales V14B517R-Q0108 Conexiones laterales V11240-G30 Conexiones laterales
V14BAX**-**XXX Doble presión V14BCX**-**XXX Doble presión V14B517R-Q020G Conexiones inferiores V14B517R-Q0208 Conexiones inferiores V14B517R-Q051G Conexiones inferiores
Manifold de longitud fija Sub-base individual Sub-base individual Sub-base individual Placa alimentación/escape
Conexiones laterales Conexiones inferiores Conexiones inferiores intermedios

V10028-G** V10121-G01 G1⁄4 V10122-G01 G1⁄4 V10486-G01 G1/4 V14B517A-Q240G

01, 02, 04, 06, 08, 10, 12 estaciones
Placa ciega para estaciones sin utilizar Indicador de presión Kit de montaje en raíl DIN Raíl DIN Kit de tirantes opcional

V14B517A-Q2700 V14B517A-Q2800 V10319-K30 V10009-C00 1 m V11072-C02 C20 Tirante

V00056-C01 Tuerca del tirante
Bloque regulador de presión Kit de manòmetre para PRV Bloque regulador de Presostato Kit de juntas ciegas Tapón para manifold
caudal

V14B517A-Q2103 Dual V14B517A-Q2120 Dual V14B517A-Q2201 V14B517A-Q1700 V10040-K96 Sub-base modular V10320-K01 Manifold G3/8
V14B517A-Q2106 Mono vía 2 V14B517A-Q2121 Mono – – – V10320-K02 Manifold G1/4
V14B517A-Q2109 Mono vía 4

V14B5*7A V14B5**A
5/2 Válvulas de simple solenoide 5/2 Válvulas de doble solenoide
G1/4 G1/4
10

10
5

5
8

8
47

47
30,2

30,2

'5' '1' '3' '5' '1' '3'

27 140 27 178

* *
10 A/F

'2' '2'
19

19

'4' '4'
1,8

1,8

21 5,5 21
52 95
* Mando manual * Mando manual

V14B5E7A V14B5EEA
5/2 Válvulas de simple solenoide con alimentación externa independiente 5/2 Válvulas de doble solenoide con alimentación externa independiente
G1/4 G1/4
8

10
10

8
47
47

35

12
35

14 14
5

5 1 3 5 1 3
27 155 27 208

* SW 10
1,5

0,9

* SW 10
2
0,9

19
1,5

4
2 M5 21
19

4 39,2 41,3
M5 21 105
* Mando manual * Mando manual
39,2 52

249
Válvulas de control

V14 - Súper 120

Accionamiento por solenoide y piloto
Manifold de longitud fija, sub-base modular
5/2 y 5/3, GÊ

5/3 Válvulas de doble solenoide 5/2 Válvulas de simple piloto y piloto prioritario
V14B***A V1485D7A y V14B59DA
G1/4
G1/4
10

8
5
8

14 12

35
5
47

5 1 3
30,2

'5' '1' '3' 102

27 193

*
M5 SW 10

0,9
1,5
'2'
19

'4' 2

19
1,8

21 4
73 5 21
* Mando manual
45,2 52

5/2 y 5/3 - Válvula doble piloto Sub-base individual – Conexión lateral Sub-base individual – Conexión inferior
V14B*DDA V10121-G01 V10122-G01
ø 9,5
G1/4 67
ø5
8

14 12 5 1 3
35

19
16
5

5 1 3 28

45
102
G 1/4
46
80

M5 SW 10 67
0,9
1,5

32
2
19
19

4
7
38

5 21 ø5
45,2 52 ø 9,5
80
46
23
G 1/4
G 1/4

5 1 3
4 2 12
33
Manifold 14 12
N x 20 4 2
16

16 20
M5
M3
14 12
G 1/4

52
M5 23
54
22,5

5
5
6,6
73,5

G 3/8
28,5

53
1

1
3

5 B 15
A 30

N = número de estaciones

Modelo No. estaciones A B kg

V10028-G01 1 48 - 0,158
V10028-G02 2 70 58 0,247
V10028-G04 4 110 98 0,398
V10028-G06 6 150 138 0,544
V10028-G08 8 190 178 0,693
V10028-G10 10 230 218 0,844
V10028-G12 12 270 258 0,997
Se suministran con la junta para alimentación interna del piloto V10238-C01. Para las válvulas con
doble presión de alimentación hay que pedir la junta por separado V10239-C01.

250
 V14 - Súper 120
Accionamiento por solenoide y piloto
Manifold de longitud fija, sub-base modular
5/2 y 5/3, GÊ

Conjuntos de sub-base modular para montaje en raíl DIN o superficie Bloque regulador de presión
V14B517A-Q210*
77 8 23
66,9
41

19
13
G 3/8 Ø8 PIF

'82'
'84' 5 1 3
G 1/8

64
61
41

33

'12/14'
24

12,5
1

24 53
71
Vista
A
'A '
Kit manómetro
21 29
V14B517A-Q212*
5,5
14

18
33
35

2 4 2

34
4
2 4 2
(N x 20) + 87

4
2 4 2
4
2 4 2
Bloque regulador de caudal
4 V14B517A-Q2201
20

2 4 2
11 21
10

19
35
17

Ø8 PIF
14

64
5,5

61

G 1/4 1 31 25

21,5 15,5
32,5 44 27
58 24 53

N = número de estaciones

Conjuntos de sub-base modular Conjunto presostato

V14CAX**-XXXXX Conexiones laterales, G1/4 V14B517A-Q1700
V148AX**-XXXXX Conexiones laterales, Ø 8 mm
V14CCX**-XXXXX Conexiones inferiores, G1/4
V148CX**-XXXXX Conexiones inferiores, Ø 8 mm
24
19

Configuraciones especiales disponibles hasta 16 estaciones.

** = 02 a 16 estaciones . 52
19

*
- +
39
29

*Presión - ajustar con

19

llave hexagonal Â" AF

11

**
52 8
**Adaptación para sub-base Súper 120

251
Valves

Nugget 200 Spool Valves

1/4" and 3/8" Solenoid Pilot Actuated
3/2, 5/2, & 5/3 Inline Valves

Long lasting spool design

High flow compact valves
Wide range of operators and
voltages available
Three functional types: available in
3/2, 5/2, and 5/3 configurations
Technical Data
Medium:
Filtered and lubricated or non-
lubricated compressed air or vacuum. Solenoid Operating Specifications
Operation: Inlet Pressure Range for Solenoid Operated Valves:
Spool valve solenoid pilot actuated. With Internal Pilot Supply: 15 to 150 psig* (1.03 to 10.3 bar)
Mounting: With External Pilot Supply: 10" Hg vacuum to 150 psig (10.3 bar)

Stacking – through holes on manifold Temperature Range (Ambient/Inlet):

Solenoid Operated Valves: -20° to 120°F** (-29° to 50°C)
base.
Low Wattage Solenoids: -20° to 155°F** (-29° to 68°C)
Inline – through holes in valve body.
Operator Pilot Pressures:
Port Size: Maximum Pilot Pressure: 150 psig (10.3 bar)
PTF – 1/4", 3/8", 1/2" Minimum Pilot Pressure at 150 psig (10.3 bar) main valve inlet pressures are given in the following table:
ISO G – 1/4", 3/8" . * Minimum Inlet Pressure is dependent on the type of operator and return used. See Operator Pilot Pressure specifications in
Operating Pressure: Operating Specifications.
** With the dew point of supply air less than air temperature below 35°F (2°C)
Maximum 150 psig (10.3 bar).
Operating Temperature: Minimum Pilot Pressures
-20° to 120°F (-29° to 50°C) Spring
Consult Technical Service for use below 35°F (2°C). Operator Return Nondetent Detented Centered
psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar)
Materials: Solenoid Solenoid 15 (1.0) 25 (1.7) 45 (3.1)
Body: Aluminum Solenoid Spring 35 (2.4) – –
Spool: Anodized aluminum
Solenoid Operator Base: plastic
Plunger and spring: Stainless steel
Elastomers: Nitrile and special nitrile- Average Flow Factors in Cv‡ (l/min)
based low-friction elastomers. Flow Path
Port Port
Port 1 to 2 2 to 3
Valve Size 1 to 4 4 to 5
3-Port, Inline 1/4" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
3/8" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
5-Port, Inline 1/4" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
3/8" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
‡ Flow Rating determined in accordance with NFPA/T3.21.3, Pneumatic fluid power – Flow test procedure and reporting method
– For fixed orifice components.

VAL-162 www.norgren.com/usa
 Nugget 200 Spool Valves
1/4" and 3/8" Solenoid Pilot Actuated
3/2, 5/2, & 5/3 Inline Valves

Solenoid Pilot Operated Inline Valves

Port Pressure Weight Repair
Body** Operator Description Type Size Function* psig lbs. Kit
K41DA00 KS1-KV2 Sol/spring 3/2 1/4" 35 - 150 2.22 54237-59
K41EA00 KS1-KV2 Sol/spring 3/2 3/8" 35 - 150 2.22 54237-59
K71DA00 KS6-KV2 Sol/spring 5/2 1/4" 35 - 150 2.22 54237-56
K71EA00 KS6-KV2 Sol/spring 5/2 3/8" 35 - 150 2.22 54237-56
K41DA00 KV2-KV2 Double Solenoid 3/2 1/4" 15 - 150 4.4 54237-59
K41EA00 KV2-KV2 Double Solenoid 3/2 3/8" 15 - 150 4.4 54237-59
K71DA00 KV2-KV2 Double Solenoid 5/2 1/4" 15 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K71EA00 KV2-KV2 Double Solenoid 5/2 3/8" 15 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K81DA00 KV0-KV0 Double Solenoid 5/3 1/4" APB 15 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K81EA00 KV0-KV0 Double Solenoid 5/3 3/8" APB 15 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K81DA05 KV0-KV0 Double Solenoid 5/3 1/4" COS 15 - 150 4.4 54237-57
K81EA05 KV0-KV0 Double Solenoid 5/3 3/8" COS 15 - 150 4.4 54237-57
K81DA06 KV0-KV0 Double Solenoid 5/3 1/4" COE 15 - 150 4.4 54237-58
K81EA06 KV0-KV0 Double Solenoid 5/3 3/8" COE 15 - 150 4.4 54237-58
K41DA00 KVL-KVL Double Solenoid 3/2 1/4" 25 - 150 4.4 54237-59
K41EA00 KVL-KVL Double Solenoid 3/2 3/8" 25 - 150 4.4 54237-59
K71DA00 KVL-KVL Double Solenoid 5/2 1/4" 25 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K71EA00 KVL-KVL Double Solenoid 5/2 3/8" 25 - 150 4.4 54237-56
* APC - all ports blocked COS - cylinder open to supply COE - cylinder ports open to exhaust
** Standard valves are equipped with PTF threads, solenoid operators with locking overrides, internal pilot, 120V/60 Hz-110V/50 Hz coils and cable grip connectors. Optional solenoid operators, coil voltages and electrical connectors
can be ordered using the information on the web address.
Vacuum service availale with externally piloted valves.
Note: For ISO-G threads, insert “G” in the 5th position.

Solenoid Pilot Operators

Operator Operating Weight Repair
Position PTF ISO G Description Pressure psig lbs. Kit
Standard Solenoid Operator with Rotatable Grip Connector*
2-Position Valves KV1 KVB non-locking override, nondetented, internal pilot 15 - 150 .53 54344-17
KV2 KVC locking override, nondetented, internal pilot 15 - 150 .53 54344-17
KV4 KVE non-locking override, nondetented, external pilot 15 - 150 .53 54344-17
KV5 KVF locking override, nondetented, external pilot 15 - 150 .53 54344-17
KV6 KVG non-locking override, detented, internal pilot 15 - 150 .53 54344-17
KVL KVN locking override, detented, internal pilot 15 - 150 .53 54344-17
3-Position Valves KV8 KVJ non-locking override, spring centered, internal pilot 45 - 150 .53 54344-17
KV0 KVA locking override, spring centered, internal pilot 45 - 150 .53 54344-17
KV3 KVD non-locking override, spring centered, external pilot 15 - 150 .53 54344-17
Standard Solenoid Operator without Electrical Connector*
2-Position Valves K11 K1B non-locking override, nondetented, internal pilot 15 - 150 .53 54344-17
K16 K1G non-locking override, detented, internal pilot 15 - 150 .53 54344-17
K1L K1N locking override, detented, internal pilot 15 - 150 .53 54344-17
3-Position K10 K1A locking override, spring centered, internal pilot 45 - 150 .53 54344-17
* Standard voltage is 110/1250 AC 50/60 Hz. For optional voltages add three characters to the end of the part number. For low wattage options contact Application Engineering.
** For external pilot options contact Application Engineering.
† Electrical connectors for KQX series solenoid operators go to web address.

VAL-163
Valves

Nugget 200 Spool Valves

1/4" and 3/8" Solenoid Pilot Actuated
3/2, 5/2, & 5/3 Inline Valves
Dimensions in inches (mm)

KUx/KVx Series (cable grip)

K2x/K3x Series (conduit)
K4x/K5x Series (molded cord)

KUx/KVx
2.87 (73)
K2x/K3x
2.99 (76)
K4x/K5x
KUx/KVx 2.63 (67)
K2x/K3x
2.52 (64) K4x/K5x
2.35 (60)

K2x/K3x
2.99 (76)

KUx/KVx
3.67 (93) External Pilot Port
1/8 PTF or G 1/8 ISO

.55
(17.0)

1.63 (41)
.29
(7.4)
1.25
(31.8)

Inline Bodies

3-WAY – 1/4" & 3/8" PORTS 4-WAY – 1/4" & 3/8" PORTS
K41 K71 or K81
2.48 (63.0) 3.54 (89.9)
.56 .56 1.09 1.09
(14.2) (14.2) (27.7) (27.7)
1 3
3 1 5
1.08 1.08
(27.4) (27.4)

2.16
10

12

2.16
14
12

(54.8) (54.8)
.84 MOUNTING
(21.3) HOLES .84
.26 (6.6) DIA. (21.3)
(2 Places)
2 2 4

.69 .69 1.10 1.10

(17.5) (17.5) (27.9) (27.9) .26 (6.6) DIA.
(2 Places)

1.24 (31.5) 1.77 (45.0)

1/4 or 3/8 PTF .55 .55
G 1/4 or G 3/8 ISO (14.0) (14.0) 1/4 or 3/8 PTF
(3 Places) G 1/4 or G 3/8 ISO
(5 Places)

1.26
(32.0) 1.26
(32.0)

VAL-164 www.norgren.com/usa
Valves

Nugget 200 Spool Valves

1/4", 3/8", and 1/2" Air Pilot Actuated
3/2, 5/2, & 5/3 Inline Valves

Long lasting spool design

High flow compact valves
Mounting styles: inline and fixed
length manifold.
Three functional types: available in
3/2, 5/2, and 5/3 configurations
Technical Data
Medium:
Filtered and lubricated or non-
lubricated compressed air or vacuum.
Operation:
Spool valve air pilot actuated.
Mounting:
Stacking – through holes on manifold
base.
Inline – through holes in valve body.
Port Size:
PTF – 1/4", 3/8", 1/2"
ISO G – 1/4", 3/8" .
Operating Pressure: Minimum Pilot Pressures
10 Hg vacuum to 150 psig (10.3 bar). Operator Return Spring
For details see overleaf. Nondetent Detented Centered
Operating Temperature: psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar)
Large Air Large Air 15 (1.0) 25 (1.7) 45 (3.1)
-20° to 160°F (-29° to 71°C) Large Air † Small Air 35 (2.4) – –
Consult Technical Service for use below 35°F (2°C).
Small Air Small Air 25 (1.7) – –
Materials: Large Air Spring 35 (2.4) – –
Body: Aluminum Low Pressure Air†† Spring 4 (.27) – –
Spool: Anodized aluminum Small Air Spring 65 (4.5) – –
Air Bleed Air Bleed 15 (1.0) 25 (1.7) –
Solenoid Operator Base: plastic Air Bleed Spring 35 (2.4) – –
Plunger and spring: Stainless steel † Pressure applied simultaneously to both operators. The piston area of the KA2 operator is approximately twice that of the KA1
Elastomers: Nitrile and special nitrile operator.
based low-friction elastomers. †† Pressure applied to port B of KA6 operator (port A open). A minimum vacuum of 6.1 inches Hg (KS1 return) applied to A (port
B open) will also operate the valve. The KA6 operator can also be used as a differential pressure operator with or without return
spring. The differential pressure required to shift the valve without return spring is less than 1 psig (2" Hg). To reduce the
possibility of internal contamination, it is suggested that a filter/breather be installed in the port.

Average Flow Factors in Cv‡ (l/min)

Flow Path
Port Port
Port 1 to 2 2 to 3
Valve Size 1 to 4 4 to 5
3-Port, Inline 1/4" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
3/8" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
5-Port, Inline 1/4" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
3/8" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
1/2" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
‡ Flow Rating determined in accordance with NFPA/T3.21.3, Pneumatic fluid power – Flow test procedure and reporting method
– For fixed orifice components.

VAL-165
Valves

Nugget 200 Spool Valves

1/4", 3/8", and 1/2" Air Pilot Actuated
3/2, 5/2, & 5/3 Inline and Stacking ValvesValves
Air Pilot Operated Inlinde Valves
Port Pilot Pressure Weight Repair
Body* Operator Description Type Size psig lbs. Kit
K41DA00 KS1-KA2 Air/spring 3/2 1/4" 35 - 150 2.22 54237-59
K41EA00 KS1-KA2 Air/spring 3/2 3/8" 35 - 150 2.22 54237-59
K71DA00 KS6-KA2 Air/spring 5/2 1/4" 35 - 150 2.22 54237-56
K71EA00 KS6-KA2 Air/spring 5/2 3/8" 35 - 150 2.22 54237-56
K71FA00 KS6-KA2 Air/spring 5/2 1/2" 35 - 150 2.22 54237-56
K41DA00 KA2-KA2 Air/Air 3/2 1/4" 15 - 150 4.4 54237-59
K41EA00 KA2-KA2 Air/Air 3/2 3/8" 15 - 150 4.4 54237-59
K71DA00 KA2-KA2 Air/Air 5/2 1/4" 15 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K71EA00 KA2-KA2 Air/Air 5/2 3/8" 15 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K71FA00 KA2-KA2 Air/Air 5/2 1/2" 15 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K81DA00 KAC-KAC Air/Air 5/3 1/4" 45 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K81EA00 KAC-KAC Air/Air 5/3 3/8" 45 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K81FA00 KAC-KAC Air/Air 5/3 1/2" 45 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K81DA05 KAC-KAC Air/Air 5/3 1/4" 45 - 150 4.4 54237-57
K81EA05 KAC-KAC Air/Air 5/3 3/8" 45 - 150 4.4 54237-57
K81FA05 KAC-KAC Air/Air 5/3 1/2" 45 - 150 4.4 54237-57
K81DA06 KAC-KAC Air/Air 5/3 1/4" 45 - 150 4.4 54237-58
K81EA06 KAC-KAC Air/Air 5/3 3/8" 45 - 150 4.4 54237-58
K81FA06 KAC-KAC Air/Air 5/3 1/2" 45 - 150 4.4 54237-58
K41DA00 KAA-KAA Air/Air 3/2 1/4" 25 - 150 4.4 54237-59
K41EA00 KAA-KAA Air/Air 3/2 3/8" 25 - 150 4.4 54237-59
K71DA00 KAA-KAA Air/Air 5/2 1/4" 25 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K71EA00 KAA-KAA Air/Air 5/2 3/8" 25 - 150 4.4 54237-56
K71FA00 KAA-KAA Air/Air 5/2 1/2" 25 - 150 4.4 54237-56
* Standard valves are equipped with PTF threads. For additional options see our website.
Note: For ISO-G threads, insert “G” in the 5th position. 1/2" ported bodies are not available with ISO G threads.

Air Operators
Operator
Minimum operating Weight Repair
Position ISO-G PTF Description Pressure psig (bar) lbs. (kg) Kit
2-Position Valves KAB KAA detent, large air 25 (1.7) 0.73 (.33) 54344-16
KA5 KA2 nondetent, large air 15 (1.0) 0.70 (.32) 54344-16
KAF KAE detent bleed - .02 (.5mm) diameter bleed orifice 25 (1.7) 0.73 (.33) 54344-16
KA9 KA8 nondetent bleed - .02 (.5mm) diameter bleed orifice 15 (1.0) 0.70 (0.32) 54344-16
KA7 KA6 nondetent, low pressure (inline only) 4 (.27) 2.46 (1.12)
KA4 KA1 nondetent, air bias (small air), return for manual 25 (1.7) 0.33 (0.15) 54344-16
operators or as air bias with KA2 or KA5
KS5 KS4 nondetent, spring bias, use with KA2 or KA5 35 (2.5) 0.44 (0.20) 54344-16
3-Position Valves KAD KAC spring centered 45 (3.1) 0.73 (0.33) 54344-16

Air Operators
KAA/KAF KA1, KA4 KS4, KS5 KA6, KA7
KA2, KA5 SMALL AIR SPRING BIAS LOW PRESSURE
KA8, KA9 (AIR BIAS) 2.30 1.25
LARGE AIR (58.4) (31.8)
.52 1.16
1.51 (13.2) 1/8 PTF (29.5)
(38.4) or
G 1/8 ISO
1.16 1/8-27 PTF or
(29.5) G 1/8 ISO

1/8-27 PTF or
G 1/8 ISO
.59
(15.0) 4.53
(115.0)

Air Bleed Operators KA1 Air Bias Operator KS4 Spring Bias Operator KA6 Low Pressure Operator
Constantly bleeds a small amount When pressure is applied to Piston area of the KS4 operator is the same 1/8-27 PTF or (inline valves only)
of air to atmosphere. The valve the KA1 operator the valve as the KA2 operator. The piston of the KS4 G 1/8 ISO .85
(2 Places) (21.6) Operator shifts the valve spool with only 4 psig
spool shifts when air bleed is spool shifts to the KA2 end. operator is spring loaded to shift the valve (.28 bar) applied to Port B (Port A open). A
stopped by a customer-supplied When pressure is applied to spool to the KA2 end. The valve spool shifts minimum vacuum of 6.1" Hg (with KS1 spring
on-off valve. both the KA1 and KA2 to the KS4 end when pressure is applied to return) applied to port A (Port B open) will also
operators the valve spool the KA2 operator. When pressure is applied to operate the valve. Can also be used as a
shifts to the KA1 end. both the KS4 and KA2 operators the valve differential pressure operator with or without
Dimensions in inches (mm) spool shifts to the KA2 end. spring return.

VAL-166 www.norgren.com/usa
Nugget 200 Spool Valves
1/4", 3/8", or 1/2" Ports, Manual and Mechanical Actuated 3/2,
5/2, & 5/3 Inline Valves
Long lasting spool design
High flow compact valves
Wide range of Manual and
Mechanical Operators available
Three functional types available in
3/2, 5/2, and 5/3 configurations
Technical Data
Medium:
Filtered and lubricated or non-
lubricated compressed air or vacuum.
Operation:
Spool valve manual or mechanical Average Flow Factors in Cv‡ (l/min)
actuation. Flow Path
Port Port
Mounting: Port 1 to 2 2 to 3
Stacking – through holes on manifold Valve Size 1 to 4 4 to 5
base. 3-Port, Inline 1/4" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
Inline – through holes in valve body. 3/8" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
5-Port, Inline 1/4" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
Port Size: 3/8" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
1/4", 3/8", or 1/2" PTF, or 1/4", or 1/2" 1.6 (1600) 1.7 (1700)
3/8" ISO-G ‡ Flow Rating determined in accordance with NFPA/T3.21.3, Pneumatic fluid power – Flow test procedure and reporting method
– For fixed orifice components.
Operating Pressure:
Maximum 150 psig (10.3 bar). For
details see overleaf. Manual Operators
Operating Temperature: Min.
Operating
-20°F to 160°F (-29°C to 71°C) Position Operator Description Force lbs. (kg)
Consult Technical Service for use below 35°F (2°C).
2-Position KB0 Palm Button - Black, Nondetent (Inline Only) 18.0 (8.2)
Materials: KB1 Palm Button - Red, Nondetent (Inline Only) 18.0 (8.2)
Body: Aluminum KB2 Palm Button - Green, Nondetent (Inline Only) 18.0 (8.2)
Spool: Anodized aluminum KB3 Palm Button - Black, Detent (Inline Only) 9.0 (4.1)
KB4 Palm Button - Red, Detent (Inline Only) 9.0 (4.1)
Elastomers: Nitrile and special nitrile- KB5 Palm Button - Green, Detent (Inline Only) 9.0 (4.1)
based low-friction elastomers. KF0 Foot Pedal, Nondetent 11.0 (5.0)
KK0 Knob - Black, Nondetent 18.0 (8.2)
Stackable inline lockout valve (1/4")
KK1 Knob - Black, Detent 9.0 (4.1)
Compliant with SEMI Standard S2-0200, section 17 KL0 Lever, Nondetent (Inline Only) 9.0 (4.1)
“Hazardous Energy Control”. This valve is lockable only in KL1 Lever, 2-Position Detent (Inline Only) 7.0 (3.2)
the position in which the hazardous energy is removed. KL5 Lever, Nondetent 9.0 (4.1)
KL6 Lever, 2-Position Detent 7.0 (3.2)
Order Information
KT0 Treadle, Nondetent (Inline Only) 13.0 (5.9)
K910121: Includes valve assembly with panel mount washer, KT1 Treadle, 2-Position Detent (Inline Only) 9.0 (4.1)
nut, black knob and lockout key. 3-Position KB6 Palm Button - Black, Spring Centered 9.0 (4.1)
Kits KK2 Knob - Black, Spring Centered 9.0 (4.1)
KK3 Knob - black, 3-Position Detent 9.0 (4.1)
40164-K30: Includes cross bar and tie rods for connecting two
KL2 Lever, Spring Centered (Inline Only) 7.0 (3.2)
valves for simultaneous operation of both valves. Additional kits KL3 Lever, 3-Position Detent (Inline Only) 7.0 (3.2)
may be used to create multi-valve manifolds. KL7 Lever, Spring Centered 7.0 (3.2)
KL8 Lever, 3-Position Detent 7.0 (3.2)
KT2 Treadle, Spring Centered 9.0 (4.1)

Mechanical Operators
Min.
Operating
Position Operator Description Force lbs. (kg)
2-Position KP0 Tappet, Nondetent 18.0 (8.2)
KR2 Lever Roller, Nondetent (Inline Only) 11.0 (5.0)
KR3 One-Way Trip Roller, Nondetent 11.0 (5.0)
KR4 Lever Roller, Nondetent 11.0 (5.0)
KR5 One-Way Trip Roller, Nondetent (Inline Only) 11.0 (5.0)

VAL-167
Valves

Nugget 200 Spool Valves

1/4", 3/8", or 1/2" Ports, Manual and Mechanical Actuated 3/2, 5/2, & 5/3 Inline and Stacking Valves
Dimensions in inches (mm)

Mechanical Operators
KP0 – TAPPET KR2 – LEVER ROLLER KR4 – LEVER ROLLER

1.45 2.47 2.44

(36.8) (62.7) (61.5)
1.40
.38 (97.1) (35.6)
TRAVEL
.13 (3.2)
OVERTRAVEL

1.58
(40.1) 1.52
(38.6)

3.02 2.96
(76.7) (75.2)
.38 (9.7)
DIA.
.84 .84
(21.4) (21.4)

.22 (5.6) .75 (19.1) .75 (19.1)

OVERTRAVEL DIA. DIA.
.65 (16.5) .22 (5.6)
TRAVEL OVERTRAVEL
.65 (16.5)
TRAVEL

KR5 – LEVER ROLLER KR3 – LEVER ROLLER

ONE-WAY TRIP ONE-WAY TRIP

3.47
(88.1) 3.42
1.40 (87.0)
(35.6)

1.52
1.58 (38.6)
(40.1) 3.34
(84.8)
3.40
(86.4)
.87
(22.1)
.87
(22.1)

.26 (6.6) .75 (19.1)

.75 (19.1) OVERTRAVEL DIA.
DIA. .70 (17.8)
.26 (6.6) TRAVEL
OVERTRAVEL
.70 (17.8)
TRAVEL

Spring Return & KS6 Spring Return

End Cap KC0 – END CAP
KS1– SPRING RETURN SPACER BLOCK – Used only with spring
1.26 (32)

(5/2) .39 1.00 centered manual operators (KK2, KL2,

(9.9) (25.4)
1.10 KL7, KT2).
(27.9)
2.16 (55)

1.12 (28)

VAL-168 www.norgren.com/usa
 Nugget 200 Spool Valves
1/4", 3/8", or 1/2" Ports, Manual and Mechanical Actuated 3/2, 5/2, & 5/3 Inline and Stacking Valves
Dimensions in inches (mm)
Manual Operators
KB0/KB5 – PALM BUTTON KK0/KK3 – KNOB
3.34 3.15 KK1
(84.8) KB3/KB5
(80.0)
2.30 KB0/KB2 2.19 KK0
(58.4) (55.6)
.38 (9.7)
TRAVEL .38 (9.7)
TRAVEL
KK0, KK1

1.38 1.00
(35.1) (25.4)

M20 x 1.5 – 6g
Pnl Mtg Hole – .81 (20.6)
Max Pnl Thk – .25 (6.4) .19 (4.8) TRAVEL
.19 (4.8) KK2, KK3
2.99
(75.9) KK2, KK3

KL0/KL3 – LEVER KL5/KL8 – LEVER

1.35 1.79 Travel (2-position) Travel (2-position)
.85 .80
(34) (45) KL0, KL1 (22) (20) KL5, KL6
.90 .90 .40 .40 Travel (3-position)
(23) (23) Travel (3-position)
(10) (10) KL7, KL8
KL2, KL3

1.00 1.00
(25) (25)
Dia. Dia.

3.90 3.98
(99) (101)

2.5
(64) KL0

3.5
(89) KL1/KL3 2.07
(53) KL5
3.07
(78) KL6/KL8
KT0/KT2 – TREADLE

1.18 (30.0)
TRAVEL
7.42
(188.5)
KF0 – FOOT PEDAL
.56 (14.2)
TRAVEL

1.58
2.81 (40.1)
(71.4)

5.04
(128.0)

4.28
(108.7) KT0

5.28
(134.1) KT1/KT2

VAL-169
Valves

Nugget 200 Spool Valves

1/4", 3/8", or 1/2" Ports, Manual and Mechanical Actuated 3/2, 5/2, & 5/3 Inline and Stacking Valves

Nugget 200 Product Deconfigurator — Air, Manual, and Mechanical Operators and Solenoid
Operators with Locking Override
1 0 End 1 2 End 3-Way Valves
1 2 End 1 4 End 4-Way Valves
Valve Body Operator Operator
See Optional Coil Voltages
K 4 1 D A 0 0 – KS1 – KV2 1W6 p. VAL-171

Valve Type (inline bodies) OPERATORS FOR 2-POSITION OPERATORS FOR 3-POSITION INLINE
K41 – 3-Way, 2-Position, 3-Port INLINE AND STACKING BODIES AND STACKING BODIES
K71 – 4-Way, 2-Position, 5-Port
K81 – 4-Way, 3-Position, 5-Port Pilot Port Pilot Port
PTF ISO PTF ISO
STACKING BODIES WITHOUT JUNCTION BOX – COMMON Air Operators Air Operators
PRESSURE PORT 1 ONLY (USE WHEN SPEED CONTROLS KAC KAD Spring Centered
KAA KAB Detent, Large Air
ARE NEEDED KA2 KA5 Nondetent, Large Air
IN EXHAUST PORTS 3 & 5) Standard Solenoid Operators with Rotatable Cable Grip
KAE KAF Detent Bleed – .02 (.5 mm) Diameter
Connector & Locking Override
K78 – 4-Way, 2-Position, 5-Port Bleed Orifice
K88 – 4-Way, 3-Position, 5-Port KV0 KVA Spring Centered, Internal Pilot
Standard Solenoid Operator with Rotatable Cable Grip KV3 KVD Spring Centered, External Pilot
Connector & Locking Override
STACKING BODIES – COMMON PRESSURE Standard Solenoid Operator without Electrical
KV2 KVC Nondetent, Internal Pilot
PORT 1 AND COMMON EXHAUST PORTS 3 & 5 K79 – 4-Way, Connector, with Locking Override
KV5 KVF Nondetent, External Pilot
2-Position, 5-Port KVL KVN Detent, Internal Pilot K10 K1A Spring Centered, Internal Pilot
K89 – 4-Way, 3-Position, 5-Port
Standard Solenoid Operator without Electrical Connector, Standard Solenoid Operators with Rotatable 1/2"
with Locking Override Conduit Connector & Locking Override
K1L K1N Detent, Internal Pilot K30 K3A Spring Centered, Internal Pilot

Standard Solenoid Operator with Rotatable 1/2" Conduit Standard Solenoid Operator with Molded Plug
Connector & Locking Override Connector: 5-foot, 3-Conductor Cable & Locking
Override
K32 K3C Nondetent, Internal Pilot
K35 K3F Nondetent, External Pilot K50 K5A Spring Centered, Internal Pilot
K3L K3N Detent, Internal Pilot Manual Operators
K3M K3P Detent, External Pilot
KB6 Palm Button – Black, Spring
Standard Solenoid Operator with Molded Cord Connector, Centered
5 Foot/3-Conductor Cable & Locking Override KK2 Knob – Black, Spring Centered
K52 K5C Nondetent, Internal Pilot KK3 Knob – Black, 3 Position Detent
K55 K5F Nondetent, External Pilot KL2 Lever, Spring Centered (Inline Only)
K5L K5N Detent, Internal Pilot KL3 Lever, 3-Position Detent (Inline Only)
BASIC BODY/PORT SIZE KL7 Lever, Spring Centered
D – 1/4" Body, 1/4" Ports CSA Listed Solenoid Operator with Fixed 1/2" Conduit KL8 Lever, 3 Position Detent
E – 1/4" Body, 3/8" Ports Connector & Locking Override KT2 Treadle, Spring Centered
F – 1/4" Body, 1/2" Ports KD2 KDC Nondetent, Internal Pilot
CSA Listed Solenoid Operator without Electrical
Connector, with Locking Override
KQ2 KQC Nondetent, Internal Pilot
PORT THREAD Hazardous Location Solenoid Operator
A – National Taper (PTF) — Inline Valves Only with Locking Override
G – ISO (G Series) KX2 KXC Nondetent, Internal Pilot
Manual Operators
KB0 Palm Button – Black, Nondetent (Inline Only)
KB1 Palm Button – Red, Nondetent (Inline Only)
KB2 Palm Button – Green, Nondetent
(Inline Only)
JUNCTION BOX (STACKING BODY ONLY) KB3 Palm Button – Black, Detent (Inline Only)
0 – No Junction Box KB4 Palm Button – Red, Detent (Inline Only)
5 – Junction Box With Lights (KMx Series Operators only) KB5 Palm Button – Green, Detent (Inline Only)
8 – Junction Box Without Lights (K6x/K7x Series Operators only) KF0 Foot Pedal, Nondetent
KK0 Knob – Black, Nondetent
KK1 Knob – Black, Detent
KL0 Lever, Nondetent (Inline Only)
KL1 Lever, 2-Position Detent (Inline Only)
SPOOL TYPE KL5 Lever, Nondetent
0 – 2- or 3-Position, All Ports Blocked KL6 Lever, 2-Position Detent
5 – 3-Position, Inlet Open to Cylinder KT0 Treadle, Nondetent (Inline Only)
6 – 3-Position, Exhaust Open to Cylinder KT1 Treadle, 2-Position Detent (Inline Only)
Mechanical Operators
KP0 Tappet, Nondetent
OPERATORS FOR INLINE AND STACKING BODIES – KR2 Lever Roller, Nondetent (Inline Only)
1 0 END 3-WAY, 1 2 END 4-WAY Spring Operators and End Cap KR3 One-Way Trip Roller, Nondetent
KR4 Lever Roller, Nondetent
KS1 – Return For All 3-Way Valves and 4-Way Valves With Manual Operators
KR5 One-Way Trip Roller, Nondetent
(Except KF0 Foot Pedal)
(Inline Only)
KS6 – Return For 4-Way Valves With Air, Solenoid, Mechanical
Operators and KF0 Manual Operators
KC0 – End Cap For Use With Manual Operators

VAL-170 www.norgren.com/usa
 Nugget 200 Spool Valves
1/4", 3/8", or 1/2" Ports, Manual and Mechanical Actuated 3/2, 5/2, & 5/3 Inline and Stacking Valves
Nugget 200 Product Deconfigurator — Solenoid Operators
with Nonlocking Override
1 0 End 1 2 End 3-Way Valves
1 2 End 1 4 End 4-Way Valves
Valve Body Operator Operator
See Optional Coil Voltages
K 4 1 D A 0 0 – KS1 – KV2 1W6 below

Valve Type
INLINE BODIES
K41 – 3-Way, 2-Position, 3-Port
K71 – 4-Way, 2-Position, 5-Port
K81 – 4-Way, 3-Position, 5-Port OPERATORS FOR 2-POSITION OPERATORS FOR 3-POSITION INLINE
INLINE AND STACKING BODIES AND STACKING BODIES
STACKING BODIES WITHOUT JUNCTION BOX –
COMMON PRESSURE PORT 1 ONLY (USE WHEN Pilot Port Pilot Port
PTF ISO PTF ISO
SPEED CONTROLS ARE NEEDED IN EXHAUST
Air Operators
PORTS 3 & 5) Standard Solenoid Operator with Rotatable Cable Grip
Connector KAC KAD Spring Centered
K78 – 4-Way, 2-Position, 5-Port
K88 – 4-Way, 3-Position, 5-Port & Nonlocking Override Standard Solenoid Operators with Rotatable Cable
KV1 KVB Nondetent, Internal Pilot Grip Connector & Nonlocking Override
STACKING BODIES – COMMON PRESSURE KV4 KVE Nondetent, External Pilot KV8 KVJ Spring Centered, Internal Pilot
PORT 1 AND COMMON EXHAUST PORTS 3 & 5 KV6 KVG Detent, Internal Pilot
K79 – 4-Way, 2-Position, 5-Port Standard Solenoid Operators with Rotatable 1/2"
Standard Solenoid Operator without Electrical Connector, Conduit Connector & Nonlocking Override
K89 – 4-Way, 3-Position, 5-Port
with Nonlocking Override
K38 K3J Spring Centered, Internal Pilot
K11 K1B Nondetent, Internal Pilot
BASIC BODY/PORT SIZE K16 K1G Detent, Internal Pilot Hazardous Location Solenoid Operator with
D – 1/4" Body, 1/4" Ports Nonlocking Override — Inline Valves Only
Standard Solenoid Operator with Rotatable 1/2" Conduit
E – 1/4" Body, 3/8" Ports KX8 KXB Spring Centered, Internal Pilot
Connector
F – 1/4" Body, 1/2" Ports & Nonlocking Override
K31 K3B Nondetent, Internal Pilot
PORT THREAD K34 K3E Nondetent, External Pilot
A – National Taper (PTF) K36 K3G Detent, Internal Pilot
G – ISO (G Series) CSA Listed Solenoid Operator with Fixed 1/2" Conduit
Connector
& Nonlocking Override
JUNCTION BOX (STACKING BODY ONLY)
0 – No Junction Box KD1 KDB Nondetent, Internal Pilot
5 – Junction Box With Lights (KMx Series Operators only) CSA Listed Solenoid Operator without Electrical
8 – Junction Box Without Lights (K6x/K7x Series Operators only) Connector, with Nonlocking Override
KQ1 KQB Nondetent, Internal Pilot
SPOOL TYPE KQ6 KQG Detent, Internal Pilot
0 – 2- or 3-Position, All Ports Blocked Hazardous Location Solenoid Operator with Nonlocking
5 – 3-Position, Inlet Open to Cylinder Override
6 – 3-Position, Exhaust Open to Cylinder — Inline Valves Only
KX1 KXB Nondetent, Internal Pilot
OPERATORS FOR INLINE AND STACKING BODIES
1 0 END 3-WAY, 1 2 END 4-WAY
Spring Operators and End Cap
KS1 – Return For All 3-Way Valves and 4-Way Valves With Manual Operators
(Except KF0 Foot Pedal)
KS6 – Return For 4-Way Valves With Air, Solenoid, Mechanical
Operators and KF0 Manual Operators
KC0 – End Cap For Use With Manual Operators

Optional Coil Voltages and Additional Part Number Characters

Standard Wattage Low Wattage
KVx, K1x, K3x, K5x, KUx, K0x, K2x,
& K7x K4x, & K6x KDx, Series KQx Series KMx Series KXx Series
Operators Operators Operators Operators Operators Operators
Voltages Single Double Single Double Single Double Single Double Single Double Single Double
60 Hz 50 Hz DC Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid
120 110 – Standard Standard 1WH 2WH Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard – –
240 220 – 1W6 2W6 – – 1TE 2TE 1T2 2T2 1TN 2TN 1NH 2NH
12 12 – 1W3 2W3 – – – – – – – – – –
24 24 – 1W4 2W4 1WJ 2WJ 1TD 2TD 1T1 2T1 1TM 2TM – –
48 48 – 1W5 2W5 – – – – – – – – – –
– 240 – – – – – – – 1T3 2T3 – – – –
120 100 – – – – – – – – – – – Standard Standard
– – 6 1W7 2W7 1WK 2WK 1TF 2TF 1T4 2T4 – – 1N7 2N7
– – 12 1W1 2W1 1WF 2WF 1T6 2T6 1T5 2T5 1TS 2TS 1NA 2NA
– – 24 1W2 2W2 Standard 1TH 2TH 1T6 2T6 1TT 2TT 1ND 2ND
– – 48 – – – – 1TJ 2TJ 1T7 2T7 1TU 2TU – –
– – 115 – – 1WL 2WL 1TK 2TK 1T8 2T8 1TX 2TX – –
– – 10.5 – – – – – – 1T9 2T9 – – – –
Example: On K41DA00-KS6-KV1, change from standard 110VAC to 240VAC by adding 1W6 to the part number. New part number becomes K41DA00-KS6-KV11W6

VAL-171
Valves

KIP Isolation Valves

Ideal for control of corrosive and aggressive

media
Elastomer diaphragm provides protection
from aggressive, corrosive, and gritty media
Isolation valves can be equipped with a low
wattage coil (as low as 0.65 watts in the KIP
Jr. series)
Valves can also be integrated into standard
manifolds or intricate custom manifold
assemblies
Isolation valves are available in a 2-way
normally closed configuration
Two valves can be combined on a common
base for 3-way operation
Series 1, 2 & 6 Options selector
G 2 7 9 6 1 2 - 0 2 6 1 - 12VDC

Prefixes Voltage
G = Isolated 12VDC
24VDC
Series 24/60
1 = Series 1 120/60
2 = Series 2 110/50
6 = Series 6 220/50
240/60
Port
4 = 1/8" NPT
Coil options
Selection criteria for isolation 5 = 1/4" NPT (Series 6* only)
Number Housing Series Type
7 = #10-32 UNF
style valves 01 Grommet 1, 2, 3, 6 Standard
8 = 1/4-28 UNF
Feature Series 1 Series 2 Series 6 01 Conduit 1, 2, 3, 6 Standard
Size - (Diameter) 1" 1" 1-5/8" Housing 41 Slotted 1 Free standing
MOPD (psi) 95 120 130 1 = Grommet 61 Slotted 2, 3 Free standing
Vacuum Service ¤ ¤ ¤ 2 = Conduit 61 Yoke 2, 3 Free standing
Max. Cv - Body 0.250 0.250 0.545 3 = Yoke 41 Conduit 1, 2, 3 Potted with leads
Power Rating (watts) 6 watts 7 watts 10 watts 9 = Slotted 31 Slotted 2, 3 3/16" Vertical spade
Lead Wire Gauge (AWG) 20/18 20/18 18 51 Slotted 2, 3 1/4" Vertical spade
Optional Low Watt Coils ¤ ¤ Body Material 51 Yoke 2, 3 1/4" Top spade***
1/8" NPTF Ports ¤ ¤ ¤ 3 = Operator 41 Grommet 6 Free standing
#10 - 32 UNF Ports ¤ ¤ ¤ 4 = Delrin 41 Conduit 6 Free standing
1/4 - 28 UNF ¤ ¤ ¤ 5 = PVC 51 Slotted 6 1/4" Vertical spade
Grommet Style Housing ¤ ¤ ¤ 6 = Kynar Note: All coils listed above are Class B** (130°C or 266°F)
Conduit Style Housing ¤ ¤ ¤ * For Class F coils (155°C or 311°F) change the second
Function digit to a 2. Consult KIP for minimum order quantities.
Spade Coil ¤ ¤ ¤
** For Class H 180° C or 356° Fcoils change the second
Manifolds - ¤ ¤ ¤ 1 = 2WNC
digit to a 3. Consult KIP for minimum order quantities.
® Teflon and Neoprene are registered trademarks of E.I. Dupont *** FWR option, full wave rectification - see website.
De Nemours Co.
® Chemraz is a registered trademark of Green, Tweed & Co., Seal
Series Series Series Inc. 02 = Fluorocarbon
Seals 1 2 6 *Available in Series 1, 2 & 3 for 2-Way Normally Closed, 3-Way 13 = EPR* (Series 1, 2)
CHEMRAZ Yes Yes No Normally Closed and 3-Way Multi-Purpose functions.
16 = Chemraz (Series 1, 2)
EPR Yes Yes No
FLUOROCARBON Yes Yes Yes
Orifice
0 = 1/32"
Flow Body Orifice 1 = 3/64"
Rates (Cv) Materials Size Porting 2 = 1/16"
Series 1 0.250 Delrin, PVC, 1/32"-5/32" 1/8" NPT 3 = 5/64"
Kynar® 4 = 3/32"
Series 2 0.250 Delrin, PVC, 1/32"-5/32" 1/8" NPT 5 = 1/8"
Kynar 6 = 5/32"
Series 6 0.545 Delrin, PVC, 1/32"-1/4" 1/8" NPT 7 = 3/16" (Series 6* only)
Kynar 8 = 1/4" (Series 6* only)

VAL-222 www.norgren.com/usa
KIP Isolation Valves
Isolation valve manifolds

Isolation valves can be combined on a

manifold block to simplify your pneumatic or
liquid circuit
Complete line of standard manifold designs
and materials
KIP offers custom designed manifolds
complete with fittings, tubing and other
accessories

Orifice Standard Valve Body

Diameter Cv Factor MOPD Kynar Delrin PVC
Series 1 1/32" 0.025 95 G141610 G141410 G141510
3/64" 0.045 75 G141611 G141411 G141511
1/16" 0.075 55 G141612 G141412 G141512
5/64" 0.115 35 G141613 G141413 G141513
3/32" 0.155 25 G141614 G141414 G141514
1/8" 0.210 15 G141615 G141415 G141515
5/32" 0.250 10 G141616 G141416 G141516
Series 2 1/32" 0.025 120 G241610 G241410 G241510
3/64" 0.045 100 G241611 G241411 G241511
1/16" 0.075 75 G241612 G241412 G241512
5/64" 0.115 55 G241613 G241413 G241513
3/32" 0.155 45 G241614 G241414 G241514
1/8" 0.210 30 G241615 G241415 G241515
5/32" 0.250 20 G241616 G241416 G241516
Series 6 1/32" 0.031 130 G641610 G641410 G641510
3/64" 0.058 110 G641611 G641411 G641511
1/16" 0.078 95 G641612 G641412 G641512
5/64" 0.117 70 G641613 G641413 G641513
3/32" 0.167 60 G641614 G641414 G641514
1/8" 0.241 50 G641615 G641415 G641515
5/32" 0.316 40 G641616 G641416 G641516
3/16" 0.398 30 G641617 G641417 G641517
1/4" 0.545 20 G641618 G641418 G141518

Isolation Valve Back Pressure De-rating Curves

Diaphragm Isolation Valves have a large difference in pressure area between open and closed, creating a sensitivity to back pressure. Excessive back
pressure can hinder the closing of the valve. Please use the back pressure charts below to determine the maximum operating pressure of the valve based on
the maximum potential back pressure in the application. Choose the orifice size which meets a worst case condition. Unless a preference for diaphragm body
shape is specifically requested, valves may be shipped with either square or round bodies, at KIP’s discretion, and depending on availability or size of order.

Series 1 Isolation Valves Series 2 Isolation Valves Series 6 Isolation Valves

100 110 130
90 100 120
1/32 1/32
1/32 110
90
Pressure Rating - PSI
Pressure Rating - PSI

Pressure Rating - PSI

80 100
80 3/64 3/64
70 90
3/64 70 80 1/16
60 1/16
60 70
50 1/16 5/64
50 60
5/64
40 50 3/32
40 3/32 1/8
5/64 40
30 30 5/32
3/32 1/8 30
20 20 3/16
1/8 5/32 20
1/4
10 5/32 10 10
0 0 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Back Pressure - PSI Back Pressure - PSI Back Pressure - PSI

VAL-223
Valves

Q2 Valve
Q2 Quick-Connect Plastic Body Valve

Durable, lightweight plastic body

Quick push-to-connect fittings
NSF and cURus (UL and CSA) Certified
Minimal Pressure drop

Specifications
Power Rating
10 Watt
Voltage
12, 24, 110 Volt DC, 24/50-60,
120/50-60, 240/50-60 Volt AC*
Housing
Yoke
Coil
Orifice
1/4" Top Spade Standard Valve Diameter Seal Porting OD Cv Factor MOPD
Temperature Rating Part Number Body Material Tube Fitting Body (PSI)
Q212315-1351B-VOLTAGE 1/8" Food-Grade EPR* 1/4" 0.228 120
Ambient and Media: -10°F to Q212315-0151B-VOLTAGE 1/8" Buna 1/4" 0.228 120
100°F Q212316-1351B-VOLTAGE 5/32" Food-Grade EPR* 1/4" 0.314 80
*All AC valves are full wave rectified Q212316-0151B-VOLTAGE 5/32" Buna 1/4" 0.314 80
Q212317-1351B-VOLTAGE 3/16" Food-Grade EPR* 1/4" 0.367 40
Q212317-0151B-VOLTAGE 3/16" Buna 1/4" 0.367 40
Q213318-1351B-VOLTAGE 1/4" Food-Grade EPR* 3/8" 0.500 15
Q213318-0151B-VOLTAGE 1/4" Buna 3/8" 0.500 15
Q213319-1351B-VOLTAGE 5/16" Food-Grade EPR* 3/8" 1.000 5
Q213319-0151B-VOLTAGE 5/16" Buna 3/8" 1.000 5
* Food-Grade EPR seals are NSF approved

IN OUT IN OUT

Port Identification: IN - 2 OUT - 1

VAL-224 www.norgren.com/usa
 Q2 Valve
Q2 Quick-Connect Plastic Body Valve
Dimensions in inches (mm)

.60 (15)

1.80 PORT 1 PORT 2

(46)

2 X .61 (15)

0.72

.032
(0.8)

2.91 2.58
(74) (66)

1/4" OR 3/8"
FITTING
1.45
(37)

2 x .70 (18)

2.03 (52) (1/4")

2.35 (60) (3/8")

2 x .31 (7.9)

.62 1.00 Coil Orientation Options

(16) (25)
A = Terminals over 2
B = 90° Counterclockwise from 2 (Standard – Figure 1)
C = 90° Clockwise from 2
2X SELF TAP HOLES FOR D = Terminals over 1
#10-14 SELF TAP SCREWS
15-18 IN*LB MAX TORQUE

VAL-225
Valves

Manifolds
Simplify solenoid valve installation with KIP manifold assemblies. KIP manifolds provide an economical and effective means of gang mounting
solenoid valves
Solenoid valve manifolds simplify the purchasing, installation, testing, and repair/replacement of solenoid valve components while enhancing
system integrity. Integrating a group of solenoid valves, pressure switches, check valves, regulators or gauges into one assembly makes a
complete package, eliminating tubing, fittings and potential leak points. Additionally, wire harness requirements are simplified.
Modular valves and other components can be replaced or maintained without disturbing plumbing thus reducing maintenance costs and downtime.

Operator Mounting Type Manifolds

Series 1 and Series 2 operators are available for gang mounting on
aluminum, brass or plastic sub-plates.
Manifolds can be selected with 1/8" NPTF or 1/4" NPTF ports.
Orifice sizes up to 3/16" with precision machined-in seats are standard.
Both 2-Way and 3-Way operators may be combined on the same manifold.
Manifolds with up to 16 stations are available as standard.
An upper manifold plate can be ordered for common porting on 2-Way
Normally Open and all 3-Way valves.

Isolation Style Manifold

Provides a dry isolated valve operator for the control of corrosive and
aggressive media.
The diaphragm seal (Fluorocarbon, Chemraz or EPR), isolates all metal
parts from the media.
The manifold material is available in PVC, Delrin, Kynar, and acrylic.
Operators are available as a 2-way normally closed valve only however,
two valves can be combined for 3-way operation.

Manifold Mount Valve Type Manifolds

Series 1, 2, and 6 valves are available for gang mounting on aluminum,

brass or plastic sub-plates.
Manifolds can be selected with #10-32 UNF, 1/8" NPTF or
1/4" NPTF ports.
Orifice sizes up to 1/8" in Series 1, 2, and orifice sizes up to 1/4" in Series
6 models are available.
Pressure ratings are the same as those listed for the individual valves in
this catalog except that the maximum operating pressure is limited to 400
PSI for UL recognition.
2-Way and 3-Way valves may be combined on the same manifold up to 16
stations are available on Series 1 and 2 valves, and up to 6 stations are
standard on Series 6 valves.
An upper manifold plate can be ordered for common porting on 2-Way
Normally Open and all 3-Way valves.

VAL-226 www.norgren.com/usa
 Manifolds

Acrylic Subplates
A great answer for simplified design and easy installation of complex
media flow requirements. Use of an acrylic base permits the flow of
various media through a single base using multiple inlets and outlets.
Flow paths can also be varied and directed to meet design requirements.
KIP application engineers can help you select the most effective design
for easy installation, access, and the best product aesthetics. Acrylic
subplates are supplied for OEM applications only.

Additional OEM Manifold Design Capabilities

KIP manifolds offer many additional options such as:

Metering of valves for flow control.

Sub-plates of many materials including brass, Delrin, 430 SS, aluminum,
acrylic and Kynar .
Unique configurations to accommodate pressure regulators, pressure
gauges, transducers, and/or switches as well as flow paths to meet your
specific requirements.
Other port sizes and locations.
Internal check valves.
Teflon taped fittings.
Test ports.
Multi-media manifolds.
Flow or no-flow monitoring.

Consult KIP for application engineering assistance.

® Kynar is a registered trademark of Elf Atochein North America, Inc.

® Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. Dupont De Nemours Co.

VAL-227
Valves

Manifold Assemblies
with Cartridge Fittings Installed

No fittings to install, Teflon tape or lubricant,

and no leaks
Compatible with both air and liquids
Available in Series 1, 2 or 6 manifold mount
style valves with base materials of Delrin,
PVC, brass or aluminum
As always, KIP is ready to manufacture a
“special” to meet your exact OEM
specifications

Minimize your labor and material cost by ordering this unique package from KIP. With
cartridge fittings installed into the manifold base, you simply push in the proper size
tube and you are done.

Select the valve or manifold assembly desired. See the part identification numbering
system, or the standard manifold ordering information. Specify on your request to have
cartridge fittings installed. Be sure to indicate the outside diameter (O.D.) of the tubing
you will be using. The following standard sizes are available by Series:

Tubing Outside Diameter

Series 1 1/4" 3/8" –
Series 2 1/4" 3/8" –
Series 6 1/4" 3/8" 1/2"

Please note: All manifolds with the cartridge fittings installed have a maximum pressure rating of 150 PSI, even though
the actual valve you select may have a higher pressure rating.

® Teflon and Delrin are registered trademarks of E.I. Dupont De Nemours Co.

VAL-228 www.norgren.com/usa
 Standard Manifold Ordering Information
It’s easy to order your own standard KIP Manifold assembly using the simple selection chart below. First, select the
manifold mount valve or valve operator from the part numbering charts, or create the part number from the part
number identification system. Provide the numbers for the desired seal and coil construction options if applicable.
This will give you the valve portion of the manifold. Now, select the base to complete your assembly.

2 4 9 3 1 5 - 0 2 5 1 M 0 6 A B - B
porting voltage
std. manifold mount or optional number of
operator valve number stations material

Number of Stations
Fill in the number of valve stations you need after the “M”. This can be up to 16 stations for series 1, 2, and 6 stations for series 6. For
operator style manifolds where the cavity is machined into the base, 16 stations is the maximum for series 1 and 2, and 6 stations for
series 6.
Porting
Select the porting configuration and port size to fit your application. Choose from the offerings below and enter the
appropriate letter after the number of stations.
Base Material
Next, select the base material which offers the best media compatibility for your application. Place the appropriate
letter in the last position of the part number sequence.
A) Aluminum - Best suited for non-critical air, vacuum or inert gases.
B) Brass - Commonly used for non-potable water applications or other low pressure fluids or oils.
D) Delrin - FDA grade material is used for potable water applications, critical gas sampling or high purity systems.
Voltage
After selecting your standard manifold part number, remember to include the operating voltage. Select the
appropriate letter from the following standard voltages and add it at the end of your manifold part number:

Series
Voltage Designation 1, 2, 6
5VDC A Special
12VDC B Standard
15VDC C Special
24VDC D Standard
24/60 E Standard
110/50 F Standard
120/60 G Standard
220/50 H Standard
240/60 I Standard

Porting Valve Valve Common Common Outlet Outlet

Designation Series Type Port Size Marking Port Size Marking Comments
A S1, S2, S6 2WNC 1/8"NPT IN-2 1/8"NPT OUT-1
B S1, S2, S6 2WNC 1/4"NPT IN-2 1/4"NPT OUT-1
C S1, S2, S6 3WNO 1/8"NPT EXH-1 1/8"NPT CYL-2 Inlet Port is through Valve Adapter
D S1, S2, S6 3WNO 1/4"NPT EXH-1 1/4"NPT CYL-2 Inlet Port is through Valve Adapter
C S1, S2, S6 3WNC 1/8"NPT IN-1 1/8"NPT CYL-2 Exhaust Port is through Valve Adapter
D S1, S2, S6 3WNC 1/4"NPT IN-1 1/4"NPT CYL-2 Exhaust Port is through Valve Adapter
C S1, S2, S6 3WMP 1/8"NPT NC-1 1/8"NPT COM-2 N.O. Port is through Valve Adapter
D S1, S2, S6 3WMP 1/4"NPT NC-1 1/4"NPT COM-2 N.O. Port is through Valve Adapter
Note: For 3-way directional control manifolds, use the 3-way multi-purpose manifold which most closely fits your need. For the 2-way normally open manifolds, consult KIP.

VAL-229
Valves

KIP Valve ordering information

Finding the Right Valve
To help you find the right valve for your application, the types of valves are arranged in two-page spreads (2-Way
Normally Open, 2-Way Normally Closed, 3-Way Normally Closed Line Connect,
3-Way Multi-Purpose, 3-Way Normally Open, 3-Way Directional Control). For each valve type, the first boxes are
arranged by KIP Series designation (Series 1, 2, 3 and 6). The second, smaller subset of rows designate the various
orifice diameters for the Series. Series 1 valves offer the smallest package size and typically have lower flows and
pressures for the same orifice size as those of our largest, Series 6, valves. As you move from left to right across the
columns on the spread, you will find the Cv factor (flow coefficient) and Maximum Operating Pressure Differential
(MOPD) for the corresponding orifice diameter. Part numbers for KIP’s valve body, operator (valve without body),
manifold mount and 1/8" NPT male bottom port follow. All part numbers are shown with grommet housing designated
by numeral 1 in the third position. Part numbers can be modified by selecting your choice of housing, seal material
or molded coil and placing the appropriate numbers into the designated position in the part number sequence.

2-Way Normally Open

OUT OUT

IN IN

Port Identification: IN-2 OUT-3

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body Manifold Mount

Diameter Factor MOPD Grommet
Stop Stop (psi) Stainless Steel Brass Stainless Steel Brass
Series 1 1/32 0.035 300 141020 141120 161020 161120
3/64 0.050 200 141021 141121 161021 161121
1/16* 0.095 150 141022 141122 161022 161122
Series 2 1/32 0.035 400 241020 241120 261020 261120
3/64 0.050 300 241021 241121 261021 261121
1/16 0.095 180 241022 241122 261022 261122
5/64* 0.135 140 241023 241123 261023 261123

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body

Diameter Factor MOPD Grommet
Stop Stop (psi) Stainless Steel Brass
Series 3 1/32 0.035 400 351020 351120
3/64 0.050 300 351021 351121
1/16 0.095 180 351022 351122
5/64* 0.140 140 351023 351123

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body - Grommet Manifold Mount

Diameter Factor MOPD Stainless Steel Brass
Stop Stop (psi) 1/8" NPTF 1/4"NPTF 1/8" NPTF 1/4"NPTF Stainless Steel Brass
Series 6 1/32 0.035 1000 641020 651020 641120 651120 661020 661120
3/64 0.050 600 641021 651021 641121 651121 661021 661121
1/16 0.095 350 641022 651022 641122 651122 661022 661122
5/64 0.140 250 641023 651023 641123 651123 661023 661123
3/32 0.200 175 641024 651024 641124 651124 661024 661124
1/8 0.295 100 641025 651025 641125 651125 661025 661125
* Larger stop orifice available with reduced pressure ratings; consult KIP.

VAL-230 www.norgren.com/usa
 KIP Valve ordering information

2-Way Normally Closed

Two-Way Normally Closed (2WNC) -
Valve with two ports, inlet and outlet.
Valve is closed in a de-energized
state, and opens when energized.
Valve has one orifice which is located
in the body.

IN OUT IN OUT

Port Identification: IN - 2 OUT - 1

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body Manifold Mount* LOW WATT Specifications

Diameter Factor MOPD Grommet Valve Body-Grommet Cv Factor 1.5 Watt 2.0 Watt 2.5 Watt 3.0 Watt
Body Body (psi) SS Brass SS Brass Body A B C D
Series 1 1/32 0.035 800 141010 141110 161010 161110 0.030 125.000 300 500 775
3/64 0.050 500 141011 141111 161011 161111 0.050 30.000 100 175 300
1/16 0.095 300 141012 141112 161012 161112 0.085 - 30 65 95
5/64 0.135 200 141013 141113 161013 161113 0.125 - 15 40 65
3/32 0.175 175 141014 141114 161014 161114 0.170 - 10 25 40
1/8 0.245 100 141015 141115 161015 161115 0.225 - - - 4
5/32 0.290 50 141016 141116 161016 161116 0.280 - - - -
Series 2 1/32 0.035 1000 241010 241110 261010 261110 0.030 300 540 780 1000
3/64 0.050 600 241011 241111 261011 261111 0.050 50 125 240 340
1/16 0.095 400 241012 241112 261012 261112 0.085 15 60 100 160
5/64 0.135 300 241013 241113 261013 261113 0.125 5 30 55 95
3/32 0.175 250 241014 241114 261014 261114 0.170 3 20 40 55
1/8 0.245 150 241015 241115 261015 261115 0.225 - 12 25 35
5/32 0.290 100 241016 241116 N/A N/A 0.280 - 7 14 20

Orifice Cv Standard Valve LOW WATT Specifications

Diameter Factor MOPD Body - Grommet Cv Factor 1.5 Watt 2.0 Watt 2.5 Watt 3.0 Watt
Body Body (psi) SS Brass Body A B C D
Series 3 1/32 0.035 1000 351010 351110 0.030 300 540 780 1000
3/64 0.050 600 351011 351111 0.050 50 125 240 340
1/16 0.095 400 351012 351112 0.085 15 60 100 160
5/64 0.140 300 351013 351113 0.125 5 30 55 95
3/32 0.185 250 351014 351114 0.180 3 20 40 55
1/8 0.265 150 351015 351115 0.225 - 12 25 35
5/32 0.330 100 351016 351116 0.280 - 7 14 20
3/16 0.385 40 351017 351117 - - - - -
1/4 0.450 15 351018 351118 - - - - -

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body (Grommet) Manifold Mount

Diameter Factor MOPD Stainless Steel Brass
Body Body (psi) 1/8" NPTF 1/4"NPTF 1/8" NPTF 1/4"NPTF Stainless Steel Brass
Series 6 1/32 0.035 1200 641010 651010 641110 351110 661010 661110
3/64 0.050 1000 641011 651011 641111 351111 661011 661111
1/16 0.095 500 641012 651012 641112 351112 661012 661112
5/64 0.140 300 641013 651013 641113 351113 661013 661113
3/32 0.200 200 641014 651014 641114 351114 661014 661114
1/8 0.295 150 641015 651015 641115 351115 661015 661115
5/32 0.370 110 641016 651016 641116 351116 661016 661116
3/16 0.435 60 641017 651017 641117 351117 661017 661117
1/4 0.610 30 641018 651018 641118 351118 661018 661118
3/8 0.900 5 — 681019*** — 681119*** — —
* Manifold Mount valve has maximum 400 MOPD rating for UL recognition.
† These valves are supplied with 3/8" NPTF ports.

VAL-231
Valves

KIP Valve ordering information

3-Way Normally Closed
Line Connect: For Free Vent, change fifth digit
from 4 to 3

Three-Way Normally Closed

(3WNCFV or 3WNCLC) Valve with
three ports, and two orifices. One
orifice is located in the body and the
other in the end stop. The three ports EXH EXH
are the “IN”, “EXHAUST” and
“CYLINDER”. When the valve is de-
energized, the inlet closed and the IN CYL IN CYL
exhaust is open. When the valve is
energized, the inlet is open allowing Port Identification: IN - 1 CYL - 2 EXH - 3
flow to the cylinder port and the
exhaust orifice is blocked. Three-Way
Normally Closed Valves are available
in Line Connect style (with piping
adapter), and Free Vent style.

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Manifold Mount Low Watt Specifications

Diameter Factor MOPD Body - Grommet Valve Body-Grommet Cv Factor 1.5 Watt 2.0 Watt 2.5 Watt 3.0 Watt
Body Stop Body Stop (psi) SS Brass SS Brass Body Stop A B C D
Series 1 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 200 141040 141140 161040 161140 0.030 0.025 100.000 - 150 -
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 150 141041 141141 161041 161141 0.050 0.060 - 80 120 -
1/16 1/16* 0.085 0.115 100 141042 141142 161042 161142 0.085 0.105 - 45 650 -
5/64 1/16* 0.125 0.115 80 141043 141143 161043 161143 0.120 0.105 - 25 - 50
3/32 1/16* 0.165 0.115 60 141044 141144 161044 161144 0.150 0.105 - - 20 35
1/8 1/16* 0.240 0.115 40 141045 141145 161045 161145 0.225 0.105 - - 10 20
5/32 1/16* 0.285 0.115 10 141046 141146 161046 161146 0.270 0.105 - 7 - 10
Series 2 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 250 241040 241140 261040 261140 0.030 0.025 150 185 210 -
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 175 241041 241141 261041 261141 0.050 0.060 80 120 140 170
1/16 1/16 0.085 0.115 125 241042 241142 261042 261142 0.085 0.105 45 60 - 95
5/64 5/64* 0.125 0.140 100 241043 241143 261043 261143 0.120 0.105 25 - 50 65
3/32 5/64* 0.165 0.140 75 241044 241144 261044 261144 0.150 0.105 20 - 35 55
1/8 5/64* 0.240 0.140 45 241045 241145 261045 261145 0.225 0.105 - 10 20 30
5/32 5/64* 0.285 0.140 20 241046 241146 N/A N/A 0.270 0.105 - 7 10 20

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Low Watt Specifications

Diameter Factor MOPD Body - Grommet Cv Factor 1.5 Watt 2.0 Watt 2.5 Watt 3.0 Watt
Body Stop Body Stop (psi) SS Brass Body Stop A B C D
Series 3 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 250 351040 351140 0.030 0.025 150 185 210 -
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 175 351041 351141 0.050 0.060 80 120 140 170
1/16 1/16 0.085 0.115 125 351042 351142 0.085 0.105 45 60 - 95
5/64 5/64* 0.125 0.145 100 351043 351143 0.120 0.125 25 - 50 65
3/32 5/64* 0.165 0.145 75 351044 351144 0.150 0.125 20 - 35 55
1/8 5/64* 0.240 0.145 45 351045 351145 0.225 0.125 - 10 12 30
5/32 5/64* 0.290 0.145 20 351046 351146 0.270 0.125 - 7 10 20
3/16 5/64* 0.345 0.145 10 351047 351147 - - - - - -
1/4 5/64* 0.415 0.145 5 351048 351148 - - - - - -
Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body - Grommet Manifold Mount
Diameter Factor MOPD Stainless Steel Brass Valve Body – Grommet
Body Stop Body Stop (psi) 1/8" NPTF 1/4" NPTF 1/8" NPTF 1/4" NPTF SS Brass
Series 6 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 300 641040 651040 641140 651140 661040 661140
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 250 641041 651041 641141 651141 661041 661141
1/16 1/16 0.090 0.115 200 641042 651042 641142 651142 661042 661142
5/64 5/64 0.135 0.180 175 641043 651043 641143 651143 661044 661144
3/32 3/32 0.180 0.210 125 641044 651044 641144 651144 661045 661145
1/8 1/8 0.275 0.240 85 641045 651045 641145 651145 661046 661146
5/32 1/8 0.370 0.240 50 641046 651046 641146 651146 661047 661147
3/16 1/8 0.455 0.240 30 641047 651047 641147 651147 661048 661148
1/4 1/8 0.650 0.240 15 641048 651048 641148 651148 - -
* Larger stop orifice available with reduced pressure ratings; consult KIP.
Note: Series 6 manifold mount 3-Way valves have a 1/4" NPTF adapter as standard. 1/8" NPTF available upon request.

VAL-232 www.norgren.com/usa
 KIP Valve ordering information
3-Way Multi-Purpose
Three-Way Multi-Purpose (3WMP) - Valve with three
ports, and two orifices. One orifice is located in the body
and the other in the end stop. The three ports are the
“NORMALLY OPEN”, “NORMALLY CLOSED” and
“COMMON”. When the valve is de-energized, the
common port is open to the normally open port. When
the valve is energized, the normally closed port is open
allowing flow from the common port and the normally
open orifice is blocked. Three-Way Multi-Purpose
Valves can be used as a 3WNC, 3WNO, or a 3WDC
valve. Additionally, this valve can be used to pipe the
alternate flow of two different media to one port.

N.O. N.O.

N.C. COM N.C. COM

Port Identification: NC - 1 COM - 2 NO - 3
Orifice Cv Standard Valve Manifold Mount Low Watt Specifications
Diameter Factor MOPD Body - Grommet Valve Body-Grommet Cv Factor 1.5 Watt 2.0 Watt 2.5 Watt 3.0 Watt
Body Stop Body Stop (psi) SS Brass SS Brass Body Stop A B C D
Series 1 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 150 141060 141160 161060 161160 0.030 0.025 - 80 - 95
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 100 141061 141161 161061 161161 0.050 0.060 - 25 40 60
1/16 1/16* 0.085 0.115 80 141062 141162 161062 161162 0.085 0.105 - - - 20
5/64 1/16* 0.125 0.115 60 141063 141163 161063 161163 0.120 0.105 - - - 8
3/32 1/16* 0.165 0.115 35 141064 141164 161064 161164 0.150 0.105 - - - -
1/8 1/16* 0.240 0.115 20 141065 141165 161065 161165 0.225 0.105 - - - -
5/32 1/16* 0.285 0.115 10 141066 141166 161066 161166 0.270 0.105 - - - -
Series 2 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 175 241060 241160 261060 261160 0.030 0.025 - - 95 130
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 125 241061 241161 261061 261161 0.050 0.060 - - 50 75
1/16 1/16 0.085 0.115 100 241062 241162 261062 261162 0.085 0.105 - - 10 20
5/64 5/64* 0.125 0.140 75 241063 241163 261063 261163 0.120 0.125 - - - 15
3/32 5/64* 0.165 0.140 50 241064 241164 261064 261164 0.150 0.125 - - - -
1/8 5/64* 0.240 0.140 25 241065 241165 261065 261165 0.225 0.125 - - - -
5/32 5/64* 0.285 0.140 15 241066 241166 N/A N/A 0.270 0.125 - - - -

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Low Watt Specifications

Diameter Factor MOPD Body - Grommet Cv Factor 1.5 Watt 2.0 Watt 2.5 Watt 3.0 Watt
Body Stop Body Stop (psi) SS Brass Body Stop A B C D
Series 3 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 175 351060 351160 0.030 0.025 - - 95 130
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 125 351061 351161 0.050 0.060 - - 50 75
1/16 1/16 0.085 0.115 100 351062 351162 0.085 0.105 - - 10 20
5/64 5/64* 0.125 0.145 75 351063 351163 0.120 0.125 - - - 15
3/32 5/64* 0.165 0.145 50 351064 351164 0.150 0.125 - - - -
1/8 5/64* 0.240 0.145 25 351065 351165 0.225 0.125 - - - -
5/32 5/64* 0.290 0.145 15 351066 351166 0.270 0.125 - - - -
3/16 5/64* 0.345 0.145 10 351067 351167 - - - - - -
1/4 5/64* 0.415 0.145 5 351068 351168 - - - - - -

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body - Grommet Manifold Mount

Diameter Factor MOPD Stainless Steel Brass Valve Body – Grommet
Body Stop Body Stop (psi) 1/8" NPTF 1/4" NPTF 1/8" NPTF 1/4" NPTF SS Brass
Series 6 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 275 641060 651060 641160 651160 661060 661160
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 200 641061 651061 641161 651161 661061 661161
1/16 1/16 0.090 0.115 175 641062 651062 641162 651162 661062 661162
5/64 5/64 0.135 0.180 125 641063 651063 641163 651163 661063 661163
3/32 3/32 0.180 0.210 100 641064 651064 641164 651164 661064 661164
1/8 1/8 0.750 0.240 60 641065 651065 641165 651165 661065 661165
5/32 1/8 0.370 0.240 40 641066 651066 641166 651166 661066 661166
3/16 1/8 0.455 0.240 25 641067 651067 641167 651167 661067 661167
1/4 1/8 0.650 0.240 15 641068 651068 641168 651168 661068 661168
* Larger stop orifice available with reduced pressure ratings; consult KIP.
Note: Series 6 manifold mount 3-Way valves have a 1/4" NPTF adapter as standard. 1/8" NPTF available upon request.

VAL-233
Valves

KIP Valve ordering information

3-Way Normally Open
Three-Way Normally Open (3WNO) -
Valve with three ports, and two
orifices. One orifice is located in the
body and the other in the end stop.
The three ports are the “IN”, IN IN
“EXHAUST” and “CYLINDER”. When
the valve is de-energized, the inlet is
open and the exhaust is closed. EXH CYL EXH CYL
When the valve is energized, the
exhaust is open allowing flow from Port Identification: EXH - 1 CYL - 2 IN-3
the cylinder port and the inlet orifice is
blocked.

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body MANIFOLD MOUNT Valve Body

Diameter Factor MOPD Grommet
Body Stop Body Stop (psi) Stainless Steel Brass Stainless Steel Brass
Series 1 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 160 141050 141150 161050 161150
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 125 141051 141151 161051 161151
1/16 1/16* 0.085 0.115 100 141052 141152 161052 161152
5/64 1/16* 0.125 0.115 80 141053 141153 161053 161153
3/32 1/16* 0.165 0.115 60 141054 141154 161054 161154
1/8 1/16* 0.240 0.115 40 141055 141155 161055 161155
5/32 1/16* 0.285 0.115 10 141056 141156 N/A N/A
Series 2 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 200 241050 241150 261050 261150
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 150 241051 241151 261051 261151
1/16 1/16 0.085 0.115 125 241052 241152 261052 261152
5/64 5/64* 0.125 0.140 100 241053 241153 261053 261153
3/32 5/64* 0.165 0.140 75 241054 241154 261054 261154
1/8 5/64* 0.240 0.140 60 241055 241155 261055 261155
5/32 5/64* 0.285 0.140 25 241056 241156 N/A N/A

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body

Diameter Factor MOPD Grommet
Body Stop Body Stop (psi) Stainless Steel Brass
Series 3 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 200 351050 351150
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 150 351051 351151
1/16 1/16 0.085 0.115 125 351052 351152
5/64 5/64* 0.125 0.145 100 351053 351153
3/32 5/64* 0.165 0.145 75 351054 351154
1/8 5/64* 0.240 0.145 60 351055 351155
5/32 5/64* 0.290 0.145 45 351056 351156
3/16 5/64* 0.345 0.145 10 351057 351157
1/4 5/64* 0.415 0.145 5 351058 351158

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body - Grommet Manifold Mount

Diameter Factor MOPD Stainless Steel Brass Valve Body – Grommet
Body Stop Body Stop (psi) 1/8" NPTF 1/4" NPTF 1/8" NPTF 1/4" NPTF SS Brass
Series 6 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 400 641050 651050 641150 651150 661050 661150
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 250 641051 651051 641151 651151 661051 661151
1/16 1/16 0.090 0.115 200 641052 651052 641152 651152 661052 661152
5/64 5/64 0.135 0.180 175 641053 651053 641153 651153 661053 661153
3/32 3/32 0.180 0.210 125 641054 651054 641154 651154 661054 661154
1/8 1/8 0.275 0.240 85 641055 651055 641155 651155 661055 661155
5/32 1/8 0.370 0.240 50 641056 651056 641156 651156 661056 661156
3/16 1/8 0.455 0.240 35 641057 651057 641157 651157 661057 661157
1/4 1/8 0.650 0.240 15 641058 651058 641158 651158 661058 661158
* Larger stop orifice available with reduced pressure ratings; consult KIP.
NOTE: Series 6 manifold mount 3-Way valves have a 1/4" NPTF adapter as standard. 1/8" NPTF available upon request.

VAL-234 www.norgren.com/usa
 KIP Valve ordering information

3-Way Directional Control

Three-Way Directional Control

(3WDC) - Valve with three ports, and
two orifices. One orifice is located in
the body and the other in the end
stop. The three ports are the
“NORMALLY OPEN”, “NORMALLY
CLOSED” and “IN”. When the valve
is de-energized, the inlet is open to
the normally open port. When the
valve is energized, the normally
closed port is open allowing flow from
the inlet port and the normally open
orifice is blocked. Three-Way
Directional Control valve can be used
to divert flow from one port to
another.

N.O. N.O.

N.C. IN N.C. IN

Port Identification: NC - 1 IN - 2 NO - 3

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body MANIFOLD MOUNT Valve Body

Diameter Factor MOPD Grommet
Body Stop Body Stop (psi) Stainless Steel Brass Stainless Steel Brass
Series 1 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 230 141070 141170 161070 161170
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 160 141071 141171 161071 161171
1/16 1/16* 0.085 0.115 120 141072 141172 161072 161172
5/64 1/16* 0.125 0.115 80 141073 141173 161073 161173
3/32 1/16* 0.165 0.115 60 141074 141174 161074 161174
1/8 1/16* 0.240 0.115 35 141075 141175 161075 161175
5/32 1/16* 0.285 0.115 20 141076 141176 N/A 161176
Series 2 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 275 241070 241170 261070 261170
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 200 241071 241171 261071 261171
1/16 1/16 0.085 0.115 150 241072 241172 261072 261172
5/64 5/64* 0.125 0.140 100 241073 241173 261073 261173
3/32 5/64* 0.165 0.140 75 241074 241174 261074 261174
1/8 5/64* 0.240 0.140 50 241075 241175 261075 261175
5/32 5/64* 0.285 0.140 25 241076 241176 N/A N/A

Orifice Cv Standard Valve Body

Diameter Factor MOPD Grommet
Body Stop Body Stop (psi) Stainless Steel Brass
Series 3 1/32 1/32 0.035 0.025 275 351070 351170
3/64 3/64 0.050 0.065 200 351071 351171
1/16 1/16 0.085 0.115 150 351072 351172
5/64 5/64* 0.125 0.145 100 351073 351173
3/32 5/64* 0.165 0.145 75 351074 351174
1/8 5/64* 0.240 0.145 50 351075 351175
5/32 5/64* 0.290 0.145 25 351076 351176
3/16 5/64* 0.345 0.145 10 351077 351177
1/4 5/64* 0.415 0.145 5 351078 351178
* Larger stop orifice available with reduced pressure ratings; consult KIP.

VAL-235
Valves

Value-Added Valve Options

Take KIP Service Another Step... or Two

Take the opportunity to reduce Features:

multiple parts and multiple processes • Reduce your inventory requirements
to one complete valve assembly • Plan for one part rather than multiple components
purchase. Have all your fittings Teflon • Shift quality responsibility for complete assembly to KIP
taped, installed and leadwire trimmed
to the proper length and the Whether you are considering design changes of an existing product or a
connector of your choice attached. new product development, contact KIP early in the development stage.
KIP can bring a high level of application expertise and technical support to
KIP Incorporated offers a wide array your design project.
of fittings and electrical terminations
for a complete manifold or solenoid We can evaluate the entire system, including pressure controls, fittings, transducers, gauges and overall packaging
valve assembly. We offer pre-taped requirements, to provide you with a cost-effective system rather than a jigsaw puzzle of components.
(Teflon) fittings, factory installed and
leak checked, and shipped to you We provide support from design through installation. When product
under one part number. design is completed, tested and approved, KIP will talk to your
manufacturing personnel concerning packaging and handling
Let KIP show you the benefits of part requirements.
number consolidation, from overall
part cost to internal cost and time Don’t wait any longer to contact KIP with your requirements!
reduction.
® Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. Dupont De Nemours Co.

VAL-236 www.norgren.com/usa
 KIP Valves
Dimensions in inches (mm)

A B C D E F G H K M N R
Series .99 .28 1.33 2.12 2.47 1.12 .64 32-1/2° .73 1/8-27 #8-32 1/8-27
Standard Valve R F
1 (25) (7) (33) (54) (63) (29) (16) (19) NPTF UNC x NPTF
G 1/4 MFT
Series .99 .28 1.51 2.32 2.66 1.12 .64 32-1/2° .73 1/8-27 #8-32 1/8-27
2 (25) (7) (38) (59) (68) (29) (16) (19) NPTF UNC x NPTF
N 1/4 MFT
Series 1.18 .355 1.65 2.46 2.80 1.19 .78 .91 1/8-27 #10-32 1/8-27
3 (30) (9) (42) (62) (71) (30) (20) 41° (23) NPTF UNF x NPTF
E

1/4 MFT
D

H
1/4-18 #8-32 or

C
K M
0° NPTF UNC x 1/4-18
1/4 MFT NPTF
B

Series 1.62 .344 G-2.04 2.86 3.54 1.58 1.03 1.24 1/8-27 1/8-27
A 6 (41) (9) (52) (73) (90) (40) (26) 45° (31) NPTF #10-32 NPTF
or UNF x or
C-1.87 1/4-18 5/16 1/4-18
(48) NPTF MFT NPTF
Operator Standard
H F
A B C D E F G H
E Series 1.02 .52 1.32 1.67 .64 1.12 3/4-32 UNEF 1/8-27 NPTF
1 (26) (13) (34) (42) (16) (29)
Series 1.02 .71 1.52 1.86 .64 1.12 3/4-32 UNEF 1/8-27NPTF
2 (26) (18) (39) (47) (16) (29)
Series 1.16 .71 1.52 1.86 .78 1.19 3/4-32 UNEF 1/8-27 NPTF
D

3 (30) (18) (39) (47) (20) (30) or

C

1/4-18 NPTF
Series 1.64 G- 1.79 2.48 1.03 1.58 1-32 UN 1/8-27 NPTF
B

6 (42) .97 (25) (46) (63) (26) (40) or

C- 1/4-18NPTF
G .80 (20)
A

Hex Male Valve Standard

R F

A B C D E F H M N P R
Series .94 .27 2.12 2.47 .64 1.12 1.32 1/8-27 NPTF 1/8-27 NPTF .44 (11) 1/8-27 NPTF
1 (24) Hex (7) (54) (63) (16) (29) (33) 1/4-18 NPTF .56 (14)
D

Series .94 .27 2.32 2.66 .64 1.12 1.51 1/8-27 NPTF 1/8-27 NPTF .44 (11) 1/8-27 NPTF
C

2 (24) Hex (7) (59) (68) (16) (29) (38) 1/4-18 NPTF .56 (14)
H

M
B

N A

Mounting Brackets
B

A B C D E F
Series 1 2.13 (54) 1.33 (34) .20 (5) 2.63 (67) 1.45 (37) 1.93 (49)
A

Series 6 2.13 (54) 1.97 (50) .20 (5) 2.63 (67) 2.15 (55) 2.68 (68)

E
C
F

VAL-237
Valves

KIP Valves
Dimensions in inches (mm)

R F
Manifold Mount Valve
E
A B C D E F m n r
Series .99 1.07 1.87 2.22 .64 1.12 5/16 24UNF .25 1/8-27 NPTF
1 (25) (27) (48) (56) (16) (29) (6)
Series .99 1.26 2.07 2.41 .64 1.12 5/16 24UNF .25 1/8-27 NPTF
2 (25) (32) (53) (61) (16) (29) (6)

D
Series 1.62 G- 2.55 3.23 1.03 1.58 1/2 20UNF .31 1/8-27 NPTF

C
6 (41) 1.73 (44) (65) (82) (26) (40) (8) or
C- 1/4-18 NPTF

B
1.56 (40)

N
A M

Manifold Mount Interface R

A B R
Series 5/16 - 20 UNF-2B .09 .31 A B Max
1&2 x .26 MFT (2) (8)
Series 1/2 - 20 UNF-2B .27 .51
6 x .32 MFT (7) (13) 40
NOTE: A is underseat connection**
B is overseat connection***

Standard Bracketed Yoke

.15 (3.8)

2 x .58 ± .005
(2 x 14.7 ± .13)
2 x .29 2 x .60
(2 x 7.1) (2 x 15.3)
.61 (15.5)

1.10 (27.9)

Y Y

1.56 (39.6)
(2 x 10.8)
2 x .43

2.21 (56.1)

3.12 ± .005 (79.1 ± 1.4)

(2 x 12.7)
.85 ± .005 (21.6 ± .13)

2 x .5

2 x 32°
2.22 (56.4)

2 x .95 (2 x 24)

X X
2 x 1.27 (2 x 32.3)
1.40 (35.6)

"IN"
2 x .2 ± .015
(2 x 5.0 ± .38)

Ø .99 (25.1)
"OUT"

6 x R .06
(6 x R 1.4)
4 x R .130
2 x .29 (4 x R 3.3)
(2 x 7.1)

VAL-238 www.norgren.com/usa
Manifold Dimensions
KIP Valves
Dimensions in inches (mm)
Manifold Mount Valve Type Manifolds A B

D
D
R
H

F
S

D
D
P
N

T
W
M

Y
L Z

K
Z
A B D F H K L M N P R S T W Y Z
Series .28 1/8-27
1 .75 1.06 .14 .52 .15 1.25 .52 (7) 2.62 2.97 1.12 .64 1.82 .75 .41 NPTF
(19) (27) (4) (13) (4) (32) (13) .34 (67) (75) (29) (16) (46) (19) (10) 1/4-18
(9) NPTF
Series .28 1/8-27
2 .75 1.06 .14 .52 .15 1.25 .52 (7) 2.82 3.16 1.12 .64 2.01 .75 .41 NPTF
(19) (27) (4) (13) (4) (32) (13) .34 (72) (80) (29) (16) (51) (19) (10) 1/4-18
(9) NPTF
Series .38 2.73* 1/8-27
6 .94 1.69 .19 .84 .20 1.75 .84 (10) 3.55 4.23 1.58 1.03 (69) 1.00 .56 NPTF
(24) (43) (5) (21) (5) (45) (21) .44 (90) (108) (40) (26) 2.56** (25) (14) 1/4-18
(11) (65) NPTF
* = Grommet ** = Conduit

Operating Mounting Type Manifolds A B

F

D
P
N

T
W

C
M

C
L
Z Z
K
J
J

J J

A B C D F J K L M N P R S T U W Y Z
Series .78 1.06 .16 .19 .52 .16 1.00 .50 .42 2.33 2.67 1.12 .64 1.52 #8-32 UNC 1.00 .58 1/8-27
1 (20) (27) (4) (5) (13) (4) (25) (13) (10) (59) (68) (29) (16) (39) x 1/4 MFT (25) (15) NPTF
Series .78 1.06 .16 .19 .52 .16 1.00 .50 .42 2.52 2.87 1.12 .64 1.72 #8-32 UNC 1.00 .58 1/8-27
2 (20) (27) (4) (5) (13) (4) (25) (13) (10) (64) (73) (29) (16) (44) x 1/4 MFT (25) (15) NPTF

VAL-239
Valves

KIP Valves
Dimensions in inches (mm)

Manifold Dimensions with Cartridge Inserts

C

D
F
H

D
C
A
R
B
S
P
N

W
Y
M

Z
L Z K

A B C D F H K L M N P R S T W Y Z
Series .92 1.06 .30 .14 .52 .15 1.50 .52 .33 2.87 3.53 1.12 .64 2.07 1.00 .60 1/4
1 (23) (27) (8) (4) (13) (4) (38) (13) (8) (73) (90) (28) (16) (53) (25) (15)
1.10 1.06 .30 .14 .60 .15 1.75 .60 .38 2.87 3.69 1.12 .64 2.07 1.00 .62 3/8
(28) (27) (8) (4) (15) (4) (45) (15) (10) (73) (94) (28) (16) (53) (25) (16)
Series .92 1.06 .30 .14 .52 .15 1.50 .52 .33 3.07 3.71 1.12 .64 2.26 1.00 .60 1/4
2 (23) (27) (8) (4) (13) (4) (38) (13) (8) (78) (94) (28) (16) (57) (25) (15)
1.10 1.06 .30 .14 .60 .15 1.75 .60 .38 3.07 3.88 1.12 .64 2.26 1.00 .62 3/8
(28) (27) (8) (4) (15) (4) (45) (15) (10) (78) (99) (28) (16) (57) (25) (16)
Series 2.73*
6 1.17 1.69 .19 .19 .84 .20 2.00 .84 1.17 3.55 4.23 1.58 1.03 (69) 1.00 .55 1/4
(30) (43) (5) (5) (21) (5) (51) (21) (30) (90) (107) (40) (26) 2.56** (25) (14)
(65)
2.98*
1.41 1.69 .19 .19 .84 .20 2.25 .84 1.41 3.80 4.65 1.58 1.03 (76) 1.25 .78 3/8
(36) (43) (5) (5) (21) (5) (57) (21) (36) (97) (118) (40) (26) 2.81** (32) (20)
(71)
2.98*
1.41 1.69 .19 .19 .84 .20 2.25 .84 1.41 3.80 4.65 1.58 1.03 (76) 1.25 .78 1/2
(36) (43) (5) (5) (21) (5) (57) (21) (36) (97) (118) (40) (26) 2.81** (32) (20)
(71)

VAL-240 www.norgren.com/usa
NEN Series NFPA Aluminum Cylinders
1-1/2" to 4" bore sizes

Competitively priced
Same day shipment for stock
stroke cylinders*
Magnetic piston standard
Adjustable cushion standard
Sleeve nut construction standard

Technical data
Medium:
Filtered compressed air
Operating temperature:
-25°F to 140°F (-5°C to 60°C)
with Viton Seals -23˚F to 300˚F
(-5°C to 150°C) 1 Piston Rod: Hard chrome plated carbon 8 Cylinder Tube: Hard anodized aluminum
Operating Pressure: steel, ground and polished. alloy, with corrosion and score resistant
Minimum 7 psi (.5 bar) surface finish.
Maximum 140 psi (9.7 bar) 2 Head Bearing Housing: Die cast
Bore Sizes: 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2", aluminum head/bearing housing. 9 Piston Rod Wiper/Seal: Abrasion resistant
3-1/4", 4"
nitrile.
Rod Diameter: 5/8" diameter
3 Cap: Die cast aluminum.
piston rod in 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2"
10 Piston Seal: Single Nitrile bi-directional
bore
4 Tie-Rods: Nickel plated steel piston seal.
1" diameter piston rod in 3-1/4"
and 4" bore
5 Piston: Machined die cast aluminum . 11 Cushion Seal: Nitrile cushion seal is
Lubrication: None required
Norgren Air Cylinders are rated for
captured within a precision machined
“no lube added” service. 6 Captive Cushion Needle Adjustment: groove allowing for linear and radial float
Materials Provides safe and precise cushion eliminating misalignment.
Head and End Caps: adjustment.
Die cast aluminum painted for 7 Wear Ring: Teflon® material provides 12 Rod Bearing: A composite of Teflon and
corrosion protection
supreme wear and excellent bearing polyphenylene sulfide and bronze molded
Tube: Aluminum alloy, hard coat
anodized support. to a steel backing provides low friction
Piston: machined high-strength and excellent linear features.
aluminum
casting.
Rod Bearing: clean metal teflon 3 6
composite
Seals: nitrile rod seal/wiper, nitrile 5
4
piston seals, nitrile tube end seals 2
Tie Rods: high-tensile strength steel
* Orders must be received by 10:00 AM EDT.

7 10
8
9 12 11

Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 5/07

N/US 1.5.507.1 We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
www.norgren.com
 NEN Series NFPA Aluminum Cylinders

Cylinder Order Information

NEN 1 C x 4 E – MP1 – V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Series
NEN Additional Options
Viton® Seals V
Rod Extension RX
Piston Rod Threads
Non-standard piston rod thread T
Small Male (Solid) (std) 1
Piston Rod thread extension TX
Intermediate Thread Male (Solid) 2
Stainless steel piston rod S
Female 3
Stainless steel tie rods SS

Single rod Bore

C 1-1/2" Mounting Options*
D 2.0" MS4 (standard) blank
E 2-1/2" Head Rectangular Flange MF1
F 3-1/4" Cap Rectangular Flange MF2
G 4.0" Detachable Cap Clevis MP2
Cap Fixed Clevis MP1
* For factory installed mounts specify mounting option in
Bore Stock Stroke lengths
position 6. If no mount required leave position 6 blank.
1-1/2" (1" to 20") Contact factory for mounting kits, or visit www.norgren.com
2.0 (1" to 24")
2-1/2" (1" to 24")
3-1/4" (1" to 24")
4.0 (1" to 24")

Fraction of Stroke length

0 Blank
0.125" C
0.250 E
0.375 G
0.500 J A B
0.625 M Cylinder theoretical force
0.750 P
0.875 S Bore 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3-1/4 4
Rod Diameter 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 1" 1"
Area A 1.947 3.043 4.831 7.791 12.173
B 1.641 2.737 4.525 7.006 11.388
Pressure PSI Theoretical Force Output (LBF)
14.5 A 28.232 44.124 70.050 112.970 176.509
B 23.795 39.687 65.613 101.587 165.126
29 A 56.463 88.247 140.099 225.939 353.017
B 47.589 79.373 131.225 203.174 330.252
Operating Pressure

43.5 A 84.695 132.371 210.149 338.909 529.526

B 71.384 119.060 196.838 304.761 495.378
58 A 112.926 176.494 280.198 451.878 706.034
B 95.178 158.746 262.450 406.348 660.504
72.5 A 141.158 220.618 350.248 564.848 882.543
B 118.973 198.433 328.063 507.935 825.630
Cylinder force calculation 87 A 169.389 264.741 420.297 677.817 1059.051
F=PxA B 142.767 238.119 393.675 609.522 990.756
101.5 A 197.621 308.865 490.347 790.787 1235.560
F = Cylinder force in pounds
B 166.562 277.806 459.288 711.109 1155.882
P = Air pressure in psi 116 A 225.852 352.988 560.396 903.756 1412.068
A = Piston area in inches2 B 190.356 317.492 524.900 812.696 1321.008
130.5 A 254.084 397.112 630.446 1016.726 1588.577
B 214.151 357.179 590.513 914.283 1486.134
140 A 272.580 426.020 676.340 1090.740 1704.220
B 229.740 383.180 633.500 980.840 1594.320

N/US 1.5.507.2 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 5/07
We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
www.norgren.com
NEN Series NFPA Aluminum Cylinders
All Dimensions in Inches (mm)

NFPA (MS4) side tap mount standard

Y P + Stroke
EE NPT (2) WF
øB Bushing
øMM
AA
KK
DD Thds. Thds
4 Places
Both Ends

C
A

G J
D NT Tap
(Flats) ND Depth VF
LB + Stroke
TN XT SN + Stroke
R ZJ + Stroke
E Sq.

øB øB øB
KK F CC F KK F
Thds. Thds. Thds.
A Deep
øMM øMM øMM

D A A
Across C C C
Flats V V V

Type 1 Solid Type 2 Solid Type 3 Female

(Small Male) (Intermediate Thread (Optional)
Male Optional)

Bore 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 4"

ø Rod 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 1" 1"
A 0.750 (19.05) 0.750 (19.05) 0.750 (19.05) 1.125 (28.58) 1.125 (28.58)
AA 2.020 (51.31) 2.600 (66.04) 3.100 (78.74) 3.900 (99.06) 4.700 (119.38)
B 1.124 (28.55) 1.124 (28.55) 1.124 (28.55) 1.500 (38.07) 1.499 (38.07)
BA 1.125 (28.58) 1.125 (28.58) 1.125 (28.58) 1.250 (28.58) 1.250 (28.58)
C 0.375 (9.53) 0.375 (9.53) 0.375 (9.53) 0.500 (12.70) 0.500 (12.70)
CC 1/2-20 1/2-20 1/2-20 7/8-14 7/8-14
D 0.562 (14.27) 0.562 (14.27) 0.562 (14.27) 0.875 (22.23) 0.875 (22.23)
DD 1/4-28 5/16-24 5/16-24 3/8-24 3/8-24
E 2.000 (50.80) 2.500 (63.50) 3.000 (76.20) 3.750 (95.25) 4.500 (114.30)
EE 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2
G 1.260 (32.00) 1.260 (32.00) 1.300 (33.02) 1.570 (39.88) 1.570 (39.88)
J 1.010 (25.65) 1.060 (26.92) 1.060 (26.92) 1.180 (29.97) 1.180 (29.97)
KK 7/16-20 7/16-20 7/16-20 3/4-16 3/4-16
LB 3.625 (92.08) 3.625 (92.08) 3.750 (95.25) 4.250 (107.95) 4.250 (107.95)
MM 0.625 (15.88) 0.625 (15.88) 0.625 (15.88) 1.000 (25.40) 1.000 (25.40)
NT 1/4-20 5/16-18 3/8-16 1/2-13 1/2-13
ND 0.281 (7.14) 0.438 (11.13) 0.593 (15.06) 0.625 (15.88) 0.625 (15.88)
P 2.360 (59.94) 2.400 (60.96) 2.480 (62.99) 2.720 (69.09) 2.720 (69.09)
R 1.430 (36.32) 1.840 (46.74) 2.190 (55.63) 2.760 (70.10) 3.320 (84.33)
SN 2.250 (57.15) 2.250 (57.15) 2.375 (60.33) 2.625 (66.68) 2.625 (66.68)
TN 0.625 (15.88) 0.875 (22.23) 1.250 (31.75) 1.500 (38.10) 2.063 (52.40)
VF 0.625 (15.88) 0.625 (15.88) 0.625 (15.88) 0.875 (22.23) 0.875 (22.23)
WF 1.000 (25.40) 1.000 (25.40) 1.000 (25.40) 1.375 (34.93) 1.375 (34.93)
XT 1.938 (49.23) 1.938 (49.23) 1.938 (49.23) 2.438 (61.93) 2.438 (61.93)
Y 1.710 (43.43) 1.710 (43.43) 1.750 (44.45) 2.340 (59.44) 2.340 (59.44)
ZJ 4.750 (120.65) 4.750 (120.65) 4.870 (123.95) 5.820 (147.83) 5.820 (147.83)

5/07 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/US 1.5.507.3
We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
www.norgren.com
 NEN Series NFPA Aluminum Cylinders
All Dimensions in Inches (mm)

NFPA (MF1) 03 Head Rectangular Flange Mount NFPA (MF2) 04 Cap Rectangular Flange Mount
FB Holes (4)
FB Holes (4)

E R E R

TF W F TF
F
ZF + Stroke UF
UF

Bore 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 4" Bore 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 4"
E 2.000 2.500 3.000 3.750 4.500 E 2.000 2.500 3.000 3.750 4.500
F .375 .375 .375 .625 .625 F .375 .375 .375 .625 .625
FB .313 .375 .375 .438 .438 FB .313 .375 .375 .438 .438
R 1.428 1.838 2.192 2.758 3.323 R 1.428 1.838 2.192 2.758 3.323
TF 2.750 3.375 3.875 4.688 5.438 TF 2.750 3.375 3.875 4.687 5.438
UF 3.375 4.125 4.625 5.500 6.250 UF 3.375 4.125 4.625 5.500 6.250
W .625 .625 .625 .750 .750 ZF 5.000 5.000 5.125 6.250 6.250
All dimensions ± .015 unless otherwise noted. All dimensions ± .015 unless otherwise noted.

MP1 Mount

LR
Supplied with
øCD
Standard Pin

MR

LB + Stroke L
CB
CW CW
XC + Stroke

Bore 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 4"

CB .750 .750 .750 1.250 1.250
CD .500 .500 .500 .750 .750
CW .500 .500 .500 .625 .625
L .750 .750 .750 1.250 1.250
LB 3.625 3.625 3.750 4.250 4.250
LR .625 .625 .625 .875 .875
MR .625 .625 .625 .875 .875
XC 5.375 5.375 5.500 6.875 6.875

MP2 Mount

LR
Supplied with
øCD
Standard Pin

MR

L
CB
FL M CW CW
XD + Stroke

Bore 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3-1/4" 4"

CB .750 .750 .750 1.250 1.250
CD .500 .500 .500 .750 .750
CW .500 .500 .500 .625 .625
FL 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.875 1.875
L .750 .750 .750 1.250 1.250
LR .750 .750 .750 1.250 1.250
M .500 .500 .500 .875 .750
MR .625 .625 .625 .875 .875
XD 5.750 5.750 5.875 7.500 7.500

N/US 1.5.507.4 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 5/07
We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
www.norgren.com
NEN Series NFPA Aluminum Cylinders
All Dimensions in Inches (mm)

NEN Series Cylinder Mounting Kits

NFPA MF1 / MF2 Mounting Kit - MK-NEN-MF1 EB (eye bracket) øDD

4 Places
LR Radius
F

øCD
FB Holes (4)
E BA

M Radius

E R CB
F
BA
FL E

TF NFPA Eye Bracket NENC-EB NENF-EB

UF BA 1.625 2.563
CB .750 1.250
CD .500 .750
Kit UF TF FB E R F
number DD .406 .531
MK-NENC-MF1 3-3/8 2-3/4 5/16 2 1.43 3/8 E 2.500 3.500
MK-NEND-MF1 4-1/8 3-3/8 3/8 2-1/2 1.84 3/8 F .375 .625
MK-NENE-MF1 4-5/8 3-7/8 3/8 3 2.1/9 3/8 FL 1.125 1.875
MK-NENF-MF1 5-1/2 4-11/16 7/16 3-3/4 2.76 5/8 LR .750 1.250
MK-NENG-MF1 6-1/4 5-7/16 7/16 4-1/2 3.32 5/8 M .500 .750

All dimensions ± .015 unless otherwise noted.

MP1 Mount kit - MK-NEN-MP1 MP2 Mount kit - MK - NEN - MP2

D D
G G
DD DD
LR LR
øCD øCD

MR ER

F F
CB FL CB
FL CW CW CW CW

Kit CD FL F B CW D MR G LR DD Kit CD FL F B CW D ER G DD
number number
MK-NENC-MP1 .502 .75 .38 .76 .50 2.00 .62 1.43 .62 .28 MK-NENC-MP2 .502 1.13 .38 .76 .50 2.00 .62 1.43 .28
MK-NEND-MP1 .502 .75 .38 .76 .50 2.50 .62 1.84 .62 .34 MK-NEND-MP2 .502 1.13 .38 .76 .50 2.50 .62 1.84 .34
MK-NENE-MP1 .502 .75 .38 .76 .50 3.00 .62 2.19 .62 .34 MK-NENE-MP2 .502 1.13 .38 .76 .50 3.00 .62 2.19 .34
MK-NENF-MP1 .752 1.25 .63 1.26 .62 3.75 .87 2.77 .87 .41 MK-NENF-MP2 .752 1.88 .63 1.26 .62 3.75 .87 2.77 .41
MK-NENG-MP1 .752 1.25 .63 1.26 .62 4.50 .87 3.32 .87 .41 MK-NENG-MP2 .752 1.88 .63 1.26 .62 4.50 .87 3.32 .41
MP1 and MP2 kits come complete with mounting hardware, pivot pin and retaining clips.

P (pin)
E

øCD

LP
LH

NFPA Pin NEN-5 NEN-7

CD .500 .750
E .109 .125
LH 2.094 2.875
LP 1.875 2.625

5/07 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. N/US 1.5.507.5
We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
www.norgren.com
 NEN Series NFPA Aluminum Cylinders
All Dimensions in Inches (mm)

NEN Cylinder Accessories

RC (rod clevis) RE (rod eye)

ER Radius CB CD CD
CW CW CB
ER Radius

øCD CD
L øCD
CE

CE

A
KK Thds.
CH Across
Hex Flats KK Thds.

Kit KK CB CD CE CH CW ER L Kit KK A CB CD CE ER
number number
NENC-RC 7/16-20 .750 .500 1.500 1.000 .500 .500 .750 NENC-RC 7/16-20 .750 .750 .500 1.500 .563
NENF-RC 3/4-16 1.250 .750 2.375 1.250 .625 .750 1.250 NENF-RC 3/4-16 1.125 1.250 .750 2.063 .875
RC and RE rod accessories come complete with pivot pin and retaining clips.

WARNING
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air systems only. Do not use these The system designer is warned to consider the failure mode of all component parts used in fluid
products where pressures and temperatures can exceed those listed under Technical Data. power systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or damage to
equipment in the event of such failure.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified for non-industrial System designers must provide a warning to end users in the system instructional
applications, life-support systems, or other applications not within published specifications, manual if protection against a failure mode cannot be adequately provided.
consult Norgren. System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific warnings found in instruction
sheets packed and shipped with these products.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power systems can fail in
various modes.

N/US 1.5.507.6 Our policy is one of continuous research and development. 5/07
We reserve the right to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document.
www.norgren.com
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Lintra Rodless Cylinders

Non-magnetic and Magnetic Piston
Double Acting
∅ 16 to 80 mm

● New lightweight design extrusion with integral slots

for switch mounting

● Capable of withstanding large bending moments and

lateral forces

● Left hand end cover incorporates alternative ports

to allow both air connections to be made at one end

● Built-in guidance with internal and adjustable external

options

Technical Data
Medium:
Compressed air, filtered, lubricated or non-lubricated
Operation:
M/46000, M/46100, M/46200
Double acting with adjustable cushioning
M/46000/M, M/46100/M, M/46200/M
Double acting with adjustable cushioning and magnetic piston Ordering Information
Models: To order an internally guided cylinder 40 mm bore
M/46000 with internal guide with a 6000 mm stroke quote: M/46040/6000
M/46100 with external adjustable guide To order an externally guided cylinder 50 mm bore
M/46200 with roller guided carriage with a 7000 mm stroke quote: M/46150/7000
Operating Pressure: To order mountings refer to appropriate tables.
1 to 10 bar (1,5 - 10 bar for ∅ 16 mm) Order magnetically operated switches separately.
Operating Temperature:
-30°C* to +80°C max. Accessories See page
* Consult our Technical Service for use below + 2°C Switches QM/45/RAP, QM/45/LAP
Cylinder Diameters: QM/45/LSU N 4.3.045.01
16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 mm Switch QM/45/EAP N 4.3.047.01
Standard Strokes: Switches QM/33, QM/34 N 4.3.051.01
Made to order Switches QM/134, QM/134/N N 4.3.055.01
Shock absorbers for ∅ 25 to 63 mm N 1.11.011.01
Maximum Strokes:
Shock absorbers for ∅ 80 mm N 1.11.031.01
∅ 16 to 40 mm 8500 mm
∅ 50 and 63 mm 7000 mm
∅ 80 mm 5500 mm
Materials:
∅ 16 mm moulded plastic end covers and yoke
∅ 20 mm anodised aluminium end covers, moulded plastic yoke
∅ 25 to 80 mm anodised aluminium end covers and yoke
∅ 16 to 80 mm anodised aluminium carriage, special anodised Non-magnetic piston Magnetic piston
extruded aluminium alloy cylinder barrel, polyurethane sealing
strip and piston seals, polyamide cover strip, nitrile rubber seals
Alternative Cylinders:
See page N 1.6.002.02
Heavy duty cylinders N 1.6.015.01

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
10/98 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. N 1.6.002.01
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Alternative Cylinders
Symbol Model (non-magnetic piston) Symbol Model (magnetic piston) Description
M/46000/IC M/46000/MC Lintra rodless cylinders (∅ 25 to 63 mm) with alternative ports
M/46100/IC M/46100/MC Dimensions see page N 1.6.002.06
M/46200/IC M/46200/MC

M/46000/ID M/46000/MD Lintra rodless cylinders with double carriges

M/46100/ID M/46100/MD Dimensions see page N 1.6.002.07
M/46200/ID M/46200/MD

M/46000/L1 M/46000/L3 Active holding brake for ∅ 25 to 63 mm. Applying pressure activates the brake.
The brake lining is pushed against a stainless steel strip.
To release, depressurize. Operating Pressure: 2 to 10 bar
Dimensions see page N 1.6.002.07
M/46000/L2 M/46000/L4 Passive holding brake for ∅ 25 to 63 mm. Applying pressure releases the brake.
When the pressure is released the brake lining is pushed against the stainless
steel strip by a spring loaded plate. Operating Pressure: 5 to 10 bar
Dimensions see page N 1.6.002.07
EQM/46000 EQM/46000/M Lintra rodless cylinders (∅ 25 to 63 mm) with valve adaptors.
EQM/46100 EQM/46100/M Dimensions see page N 1.6.002.13
EQM/46200 EQM/46200/M

Theoretical Forces ● Cushion lengths ● Holding Forces

Theoretical forces (N) at 6 bar Air consumption (l/cm) Cushion length (mm) Holding forces (N) of the brake (on dry braking surface)
∅ mm per stroke at 6 bar ACTIVE (L1 + L3) at 6 bar PASSIVE (L2 + L4)
16 120 0,014 12 - -
20 188 0,022 26 - -
25 294 0,035 26 500 220
32 482 0,056 35 900 375
40 754 0,088 50 1500 630
50 1178 0,137 60 2500 1000
63 1870 0,218 70 4000 1650
80 3016 0,350 75 - -

Weights of Cylinders and Right Angle Adaptors (kg)

Model M/46000 M/46100 M/46200 M/46100/ID M/46000/L1, M/46000/L2,
M/46000/L3 M/46000/L4 Right angle Right angle
Weight Weight Weight Weight Weight Weight Weight adaptor Weight adaptor Weight
Ø mm at 0 mm at 0 mm at 0 mm at 0 mm at 0 mm at 0 mm per 100 mm Ø/Ø (kg) Ø/Ø (kg)
16 0,16 0,18 - 0,2 - - 0,10 25/25 1,1 40/25 1,4
20 0,5 0,6 - 0,8 - - 0,15 32/32 1,5 50/32 1,8
25 0,8 0,9 1,7 1,2 1,6 1,9 0,2 40/40 2,7 63/40 3,8
32 1,6 1,7 3,1 2,2 2,7 3,1 0,35 50/50 3,6 40/25 2,5
40 2,7 2,9 5,0 3,6 4,5 5,2 0,5 25/20 1,0 63/40 4,0
50 4,8 4,9 9,1 6,0 7,3 8,9 0,75 32/25 1,3
63 7,2 7,7 13,9 9,6 11,5 12,4 1,0
80 13,2 13,4 - 15,9 - - 1,5

Weights of Mountings and Accessories (kg)

Assembly kit Assembly kit for Bracket for Cover

Ø mm Style ‘C’ Style ‘S’ Style ‘UV’ Style ‘V’ Style ‘W’ Style ‘UW’ for valves shock absorbers switches kg/m
16 0,010 0,020 0,100 0,010 0,040 - - - 0,008 0,150
20 0,030 0,100 0,200 0,030 0,190 0,250 - - 0,008 0,150
25 0,010 0,200 0,300 0,040 0,270 0,330 0,560 0,110 0,008 0,150
32 0,100 0,300 0,400 0,070 0,500 0,500 0,800 0,140 0,050 0,150
40 0,200 0,300 0,800 0,200 0,650 1,080 1,150 0,350 (0,300)* 0,050 0,150
50 0,300 0,500 1,200 0,200 1,100 1,850 1,600 0,490 (0,400)* 0,050 0,150
63 0,400 0,500 2,000 0,300 1,900 3,460 2,100 0,580 (0,600)* 0,050 0,150
80 0,400 0,500 2,900 0,400 2,500 - - 0,990 0,050 0,150

* ( )= for plate see N 1.6.002.012 item 2

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
N 1.6.002.02 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. 10/98
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Fz
Loading values for Lintra cylinders
The values given in the table below show the single forces in the directions Fy and Fz
and the maximum moments Mx, My and Mz. All values are applicable only for speeds of
max. 0,2 m/s. A requirement for using these values is a constant movement (no jerking)
Mx
of the mass over the whole stroke length of the cylinder. The reference point from
which the moments for all cylinders should be calculated is the centreline of the piston.
My Fy For speeds up to 2 m/s please use our calculation programme PNEUCALC.It is
available upon request. PNEUCALC is suitable for all PC’s having MS-DOS 3.1 and
higher.
Mz Total loads
When a Lintra cylinder has to take several loads and moments, an additional calculation
is necessary using this formula:

Mx My + Mz Fy Fz ≤
Fz max 1
+ + +
Mx max My max Mz max Fy max

Internal guide, M/46000 External guide, M/46100 Roller guide, M/46200

Fy Fz Mx My Mz Fy, Fz Mx My, Mz Fy Fz Mx My, Mz
∅ mm (N) (N) (Nm) (Nm) (Nm) (N) (Nm) (Nm) (N) (N) (Nm) (Nm)
16 40 120 0,3 3,8 1,1 200 2 5,5 - - - -
20 90 280 0,9 12 3,6 470 6 18 - - - -
25 110 350 1,3 19 5,6 590 9 28 590 1180 13 42
32 150 460 2,5 30 8,6 780 17 43 780 1560 25 64
40 300 900 5,8 77 22 1500 39 110 1500 3000 58 160
50 400 1200 9,8 110 32 2000 65 160 2000 4000 97 240
63 640 1900 18 240 70 3200 120 350 3200 6400 180 520
80 780 2300 27 360 100 3900 180 520 - - - -
Loading values applicable to a speed of ≤ 0,2 m/s. Maximum working life is normally reached below a speed of 1 m/s.

Loading values for Lintra cylinders with externally

Fz
guided secondary carriage
The values given in the table below show the single forces in the directions Fy and Fz
Mx
and the maximum moments Mx, My and Mz. All values are applicable only for speeds of
max. 0,2 m/s. A requirement for using these values is a constant movement (no jerking)
of the mass over the whole stroke length of the cylinder. The reference point from
E which the moments for all cylinders should be calculated is the centreline of the pistons.
My X
For speeds up to 2 m/s please use our calculation programme PNEUCALC.It is
available upon request. PNEUCALC is suitable for all PC’s having MS-DOS 3.1 and
higher.
E
Total loads
Fy When a Lintra cylinder has to take several loads and moments, an additional calculation
is necessary using this formula:
Mz Mx My + Mz Fy Fz ≤
Fz max 1
+ + +
Mx max My max Mz max Fy max

External guide, M/46100/ID and M/46100/MD

Fy ,Fz Mx My ,Mz (Nm)
∅ mm (N) (Nm) x min.= E x= 100 mm x= 150 mm x= 200 mm x= 250 mm x= 300 mm x= 350 mm x= 400 mm x= 450 mm x= 500 mm
16 400 4 14 17 23 29 35 41 48 54 60 66
20 940 12 64 - 80 99 119 139 158 178 197 217
25 1180 18 96 - 106 131 155 180 205 230 255 279
32 1560 34 155 - - 181 213 246 278 310 343 375
40 3000 78 393 - - - 435 496 557 618 679 740
50 4000 130 457 - - - 457 518 579 639 700 761
63 6400 240 1280 - - - - - 1360 1500 1630 1770
80 7800 360 1910 - - - - - - 1940 2110 2270
Loading values applicable to a speed of ≤ 0,2 m/s. Maximum working life is normally reached below a speed of 1 m/s.

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
10/98 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. N 1.6.002.03
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

(kg)
Cushioning Performance 1000
800
600
400

200
The dynamic energy of a Lintra cylinder is caused by direct or partial
external loads which must be absorbed by pneumatic cushioning. 80
The cushioning ability depends to a large extent on the pneumatic 60
circuit (e. g. counter pressure, pre-exhaust). The values given in the dia- 40
ø 80
gram were tested with an operation pressure of 6 bar using a 5/2 control
20 ø 63
valve. When installed horizontally, depending upon the speed, dynamic ø 50
energy can be absorbed by the cylinder. Whenever 10 ø 40
the values given in the diagram are exceeded, the transported mass 8
ø 32
must be cushioned by additional shock absorbers. These have to be 6
located at the center of gravity of the mass. 4 ø 25

2 ø 20
ø 16 V
1 (m / s)
0,4 0,8 1,2 1,6 2,0

Cylinder Deflection
F (N) Deflection due to external forces. Deflection due to cylinder weight.

10000
f1= 1 mm f (mm)

ø63
ø16
ø20
ø25
ø32
ø40
ø50

ø80
2
5000
2
1 0,9

1000 0,4
ø80
Supported length
500
0,1 (mm)
ø63
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000

ø50
Example:
100
ø40 Cylinder ∅ 40 mm, external force 180 N, distance between
supports 3000 mm
Required: Total deflection
ø32
1. Deflection due to external force:
See diagram ➔ (1mm/100 N) · 180 N 1,8 mm
ø25
2. Deflection due to cylinder weight: See diagramme ➔+ 0,9 mm
10 Total deflection: 2,7 mm
ø20
Maximum permitted deflection (f1 + f2) < 1 mm per
1000 mm stroke
ø16
A deflection of more than 3 mm is not permitted.
1
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
1830 Supported length (mm)
Example:
Cylinder ∅ 32 mm, stroke length 3500 mm, external load 200 N
Maximum distance between supports = 1830 mm (see diagramme).
Therefore an additional support is required.

Maximum load right Externally guided Roller guided

angle mounting system Weight (kg) Weight (kg)

28 14
6
26 13
5
24 12
22 11
4
20 10
QM/46263/40/35
18 9
16 8

Y 14
12
10
3
7
6
5
8 4
2
6 3
1 QM/46240/25/35
4 2
2 1
Stroke Stroke
y-axis y-axis
200 400 600 800 1000 (mm) 200 400 600 800 1000 (mm)

1 QM/46125/20/33 4 QM/46140/40/33 · QM/46163/40/33

2 QM/46125/25/33 · QM/46132/25/33 · QM/46140/25/33 5 QM/46150/50/33 Loading values applicable to a speed of ≤ 0,2 m/s.
3 QM/46132/32/33 · QM/46140/32/33 · QM/46150/32/33 6 QM/46163/63/33

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
N 1.6.002.04 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. 10/98
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Basic Dimensions M/46000, Cylinders with Internal Guide

E
F
AB Cushion screw R
B G M
C 120 *
A AG Section A-B
D U K N

J
X

P1
Y
AC

P
R1
AE

O
S
W
Z

A stroke T O1
B

S1
2 x A + stroke S

* for cylinder ø 80 mm
View X
P1
K

For cylinders
M/46025 to M/46063 K

Dimensions M/46100, Cylinders with External Guide

L

R2
AO
AE

Model 46016 46116 46020 46120 46025 46125 46032 46132 46040 46140 46050 46150 46063 46163 46080 46180
∅ 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80
A 62,5 85 100 120 150 180 215 260
AB - - 60 - 70 - 90 - 120 - 160 - 190 240
AC 8,5 - 14 - 12 - 16 - 15 - 20 - 20 - 24 -
AE 38 54 59 60 67,5 76 82 90 97,5 110 117 125 137 154 165
AG 8 18 20 25 25 25 25 25
AO - 7,5 - 6,5 - 9,5 - 15,5 - 16,5 - 24 - 25,5 - 38
B 17,5 23 23 27 30 35 40 45
C 8 8 14,5 10,5 11,5 14 17 17
D M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G1/2 G1/2
E 80 110 130 160 215 250 320 390
F 60 80 90 120 160 190 240 300
G - 40 45 60 80 95 120 150
J 2,5 - 3,5 7,5 - 5 - 5 - 5 - 6,5 - 7,5 9 10
K ∅ 3 G7 - ∅ 4,2 H 9 ∅ 5,5 ❑ 4,5 ∅ 5,5 ❑6 ∅ 5,5 ❑6 ∅ 6,6 ❑8 ∅9 ❑8 ∅9 ∅ 12 G7
L - 31 - 42 - 52 - 64 - 79 - 92 - 110 - 130
M 18 27 32 45 45 50 50 50
N M3 M5 M5 M5 M6 M8 M8 M 10
O 25 32 40 52 65 80 95 120
O1 26 32 40 52 65 80 95 120
P 12 - 18,5 - 16 - 20 - 20 - 25 - 25 - 29 -
P1 - - 7,5 - 10 - 10 - 13 - 14 - -
R 27 40 48 60 75 90 105 130
R1 31 40 48 60 75 90 105 130
R2 - 18,5 - 24 - 34 - 42,5 - 49,5 - 58,5 - 68 - 81
S 16 32 37 47 58 70 84 100
S1 5,5 4 5,5 6,5 8,5 10 10,5 15
T M 3-5 deep M 5-12 deep M 5-13 deep M 6-15 deep M 8-20 deep M 8-25 deep M 10-25 deep M 12-25 deep
∅U - - 5,5 - 5,5 - 5,5 - 6,6 - 9 - 9 11
W - - 33 40 50 60 70 90
Y 4 5 12 7 12 8 12 8 12 11 17 11 20 15 25
Z 16,5 21,5 17 20 25 30 35 40
Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
10/98 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. N 1.6.002.05
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Dimensions M/46200, Cylinders with Roller Guided Carriage

E CH
CB CG
CA CC

CD
CE
CF
A stroke
2 x A + stroke

For full dimensions see page N 1.6.002.05

Model 46225 46232 46240 46250 46263
∅ 25 32 40 50 63
A 100 120 150 180 215
CA 45 60 80 90 120
CB 90 120 150 180 240
CC M 6 - 14 deep M 8 - 16 deep M 8 - 16 deep M 10 - 20 deep M 10 - 20 deep
CD 36 38 42 44 47
CE 42 50 57,5 67 74,5
CF 66 80 95 112 127
CG 60 75 92 100 110
CH 85 98 118 132 140
E 130 160 215 250 320

To order a cylinder with roller guided carriage, Ø 32 mm and 800 mm stroke

Quote: M/46232/800
Dimensions M/46000/IC, .../MC; M/46100/IC, .../MC; M/46200/IC, .../MC; Cylinders with Alternative Ports
For cylinders M/46000, ..../M (with internal guide), M/46100, ..../M (with external guide) and M/46200, .../M (with roller guided carriage)

B
C
D

* *
W

X
Z

A stroke Cushion screw

* * *
2 x A + stroke

* Alternative ports with inserted plugs.

For full dimensions see page N 1.6.002.05

Model 46025, 46125, 46225 46032, 46132, 46232 46040, 46140, 46240 46050, 46150, 46250 46063, 46163, 46263
∅ 25 32 40 50 63
A 100 120 150 180 215
B 23 27 30 35 40
C 14,5 10,5 11,5 14 17
D G 1/8 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 3/8 G 1/2
W 33 40 50 60 70
X 33 34,5 43,5 53,5 61,5
Z 17 20 25 30 35

To order a external guided cylinder with alternative ports, Ø 25 mm and 300 mm stroke
Quote: M/46125/IC/300

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
N 1.6.002.06 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. 10/98
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Dimensions M/46100/ID and M/46100/MD, Cylinders with Double Carriages

X
E

A
2 x A + X + stroke

For full dimensions see page N 1.6.002.05

Model 46116 46120 46125 46132 46140 46150 46163 46180
∅ 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80
A 62,5 85 100 120 150 180 215 260
E 80 110 130 160 215 250 320 390
X min. 80 110 130 160 215 250 320 390
X max. 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500

To order an externally guided cylinder with double carriages, Ø 50 mm and 500 mm stroke, dimension ‘X’ = 200 mm
Quote: M/46150/ID/500/200

Dimensions EQM/46000, .../M; EQM/46100, .../M; EQM/46200/, .../M; Cylinders with Valve Adaptors
(order the Excel valves, Model V05X486M-B63*A page N 5.4.042.01, separately)
For cylinders M/46000, ..../M (with internal guide), M/46100, ..../M (with external guide) and M/46200, .../M (with roller guided carriage)

Pg 9 67
5
D1

B
W1

S1
16 T
32 S
A1 stroke 9 50 R
2 x A1 + stroke M 4 x 7 deep
View B
24 +- 0,1
7

ø 3,2
For full dimensions see pages N 1.6.002.05 and N 1.6.002.06
24 +- 0,1

Model 46025, 46125, 46225 46032, 46132, 46232 46040, 46140, 46240 46050, 46150, 46250 46063, 46163, 46263
Assembly kit valve adaptors QM/46025/76 QM/46032/76 QM/46040/76 QM/46050/76 QM/46063/76
∅ 25 32 40 50 63
A1 132 152 182 212 247
D1 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8
❏R 48 60 75 90 105
S 37 47 58 70 84
S1 5,5 6,5 8,5 10 10,5
T M 5 x 13 deep M 6 x 15 deep M 8 x 20 deep M 8 x 25 deep M 10 x 25 deep
W1 33 34,5 43,5 53,5 61,5

To order an internally guided cylinder with valve adaptors, Ø 63 mm and 1000 mm stroke
Quote: EQM/46063/1000

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
10/98 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. N 1.6.002.07
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Dimensions M/46000/L1 and M/46000/L3, Cylinders with Active Holding Brake

AP

AN
AU
AO

AR
AK
AM
AY
øU G G 1/8 AL

CO
AZ AF
F AG
E

Dimensions M/46000/L2 and M/46000/L4, Cylinders with Passive Holding Brake

AP

AN
AU

AR
AM
AY
CO

AO

AK
G 1/8 G øU AL
AZ AF
F AG
E

For full dimensions see page N 1.6.002.05

46025/L1 46025/L2 46032/L1 46032/L2 46040/L1 46040/L2 46050/L1 46050/L2 46063/L1 46063/L2
Model 46025/L3 46025/L4 46032/L3 46032/L4 46040/L3 46040/L4 46050/L3 46050/L4 46063/L3 46063/L4
∅ 25 32 40 50 63
AF 62 78 94 112 132
AG 75 92 112 132 150
AK 12 22 12 24 12 24 12 30 12 30
AL 52 64 81 94 112
AM 28,5 38,5 29 41 34,5 46,5 35,5 53,5 42,5 60,5
AN 73,5 83,5 90 102 103,5 115,5 124,5 142,5 140,5 158,5
AO 13,5 23,5 14 26 13,5 25,5 14,5 32,5 15,5 33,5
AP 45 55 65 75 90
AR 37,5 47,5 44 56 51 63 59,5 77,5 68 86
AU 73 83 89,5 101,5 103 115 124 142 140 158
AY 16,5 26,5 17,5 29,5 18 30 18,5 36,5 20,5 38,5
AZ 30 32,5 52,5 65 115
CO 6 16 6 18 6 18 6 24 6 24
E 130 160 215 250 320
F 90 120 160 190 240
G 45 60 80 95 120
∅U 6,6 9 9 11 13

To order a cylinder with active holding brake and magnetic piston, Ø 50 mm and 1000 mm stroke
Quote: M/46050/L3/1000
To order a cylinder with passive holding brake, Ø 40 mm and 2000 mm stroke
Quote: M/46040/L2/2000

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
N 1.6.002.08 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. 10/98
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Dimensions QM/46100/33 and QM/46200/35, Right Angle Mounting System

LC

LD
A2 + stroke
A1 + stroke LA
LB

For full dimensions see page N 1.6.002.05

Load values: For QM/46000/*/33 see basic cylinders M/46100, for QM/46200/*/35 see basic cylinders M/46200

Right Angle Mounting System Externally Guided

Same Size Cylinder System Style ‘X’
∅ Model (non-magnetic piston) Model (magnetic piston) Right angle adaptor A1+stroke A2+stroke LA LB LC LD
25 QM/46025/*/33 QM/46025/M/*/33 QM/46125/25/33 100 100 69 117 130 130
25 QM/46025/*/33 QM/46025/M/*/33
32 QM/46032/*/33 QM/46032/M/*/33 QM/46132/32/33 120 120 84 144 160 160
32 QM/46032/*/33 QM/46032/M/*/33
40 QM/46040/*/33 QM/46040/M/*/33 QM/46140/40/33 150 150 97 172 215 215
40 QM/46040/*/33 QM/46040/M/*/33
50 QM/46050/*/33 QM/46050/M/*/33
QM/46150/50/33 180 180 116 206 250 250
50 QM/46050/*/33 QM/46050/M/*/33
* Insert stroke length. To order Right Angle Mounting System for same size cylinders, Style ‘X’, order two cylinders of the same bore size together with one Right Angle Adaptor, e.g. 2 off QM/46040/*/33
and 1 off QM/46140/40/33.

1st Reduction System Style ‘X1’

∅ Model (non-magnetic piston) Model (magnetic piston) Right angle adaptor A1+stroke A2+stroke LA LB LC LD
25 QM/46025/*/33 QM/46025/M/*/33 QM/46125/20/33 100 85 62 105,5 130 110
20 QM/46020/*/33 QM/46020/M/*/33
32 QM/46032/*/33 QM/46032/M/*/33 QM/46132/25/33 120 100 76,5 130,5 160 130
25 QM/46025/*/33 QM/46025/M/*/33
* Insert stroke length. To order a 1st Reduction Right Angle Mounting System for cylinders of the next bore size smaller, Style ‘X1’, order two cylinders of successive bore sizes together with one
Right Angle Adaptor, e.g. 1 off QM/46025/*/33, 1 off QM/46020/*/33 and 1 off QM/46125/20/33

2nd Reduction System Style ‘X2’

∅ Model (non-magnetic piston) Model (magnetic piston) Right angle adaptor A1+stroke A2+stroke LA LB LC LD
40 QM/46040/*/33 QM/46040/M/*/33 QM/46140/25/33 150 100 77 138,5 215 130
25 QM/46025/*/33 QM/46025/M/*/33
50 QM/46050/*/33 QM/46050/M/*/33 QM/46150/32/33 180 120 94 169 250 160
32 QM/46032/*/33 QM/46032/M/*/33
63 QM/46063/*/33 QM/46063/M/*/33 QM/46163/40/33 215 150 108 198 320 215
40 QM/46040/*/33 QM/46040/M/*/33
* Insert stroke length. To order a 2nd Reduction Right Angle Mounting System for cylinders two bore sizes smaller, Style ‘X2’, order two cylinders of successive bore sizes together with one
Right Angle Adaptor, e.g. 1 off QM/46040/*/33, 1 off QM/46025/*/33 and 1 off QM/46140/25/33

Right Angle Mounting System Roller Guided

2nd Reduction System Style ‘X2’
∅ Models, non-magnetic piston Models, magnetic piston Right angle adaptor A1+stroke A2+stroke LA LB LC LD
40 QM/46240/*/35 QM/46240/M/*/35 QM/46240/25/35 150 100 80 141,5 215 130
25 QM/46225/*/35 QM/46225/M/*/35
63 QM/46263/*/35 QM/46263/M/*/35 QM/46263/40/35 215 150 108 198 320 215
40 QM/46240/*/35 QM/46240/M/*/35
* Insert stroke length. To order a 2nd Reduction Right Angle Mounting System for cylinders two bore sizes smaller, Style ‘X2’, order two cylinders of successive bore sizes together with one
Right Angle Adaptor, e.g. 1 off QM/46240/*/35, 1 off QM/46225/*/35 and 1 off QM/46240/25/35

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
10/98 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. N 1.6.002.09
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Foot Mounting Style ‘C’

TOP TOP

AE
AD
øU AA
Attention: Foot mounts for cylinders Ø 25 to 80 mm can be attached to give AB R
different distances AE. When used together with a centre support mounting
AC
the word ‘TOP’ should be visible on the top face of the mount.

Centre Support Mounting Style ‘V’

AK
AE

AM
AH øU1
AJ AF
AG
Carriage Mounting Plate Style ‘UV’
AP AN
AE
AM 1
AK 1

G øU1 AL
F AF
E AG

Model ‘C’ QM/46016/21 QM/46020/21 QM/46025/21 QM/46032/21 QM/46040/21 QM/46050/21 QM/46063/21 QM/46080/21
Model ‘UV’ QM/46016/34 QM/46020/34 QM/46025/34 QM/46032/34 QM/46040/34 QM/46050/34 QM/46063/34 QM/46080/34
Model ‘V’ QM/46016/32 QM/46020/32 QM/46025/32 QM/46032/32 QM/46040/32 QM/46050/32 QM/46063/32 QM/46080/32
∅ 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80
AA 16 17 18 26 30 42 48 64
AB 10 5 7 11 11 12 13 12,5
AC 15 10 15 22 22 25 25 25
AD 3 10 13,5 16,5 19,5 24 27,5 35
AE 16 21,5 24 (26,5) 30,5 (33) 37,5 (40,5) 45 (49) 54 (57,5) 70
AF 40 52 60 76 (78) 92 (94) 110 (112) 132 155
AG 50 62 72 (75) 92 108 (112) 128 (132) 154 (150) 180
AH 20 45 60 70 90 110 120 140
AJ 30 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
AK 3,5 4,5 5,5 6,5 7,5 7,5 9 12
AK 1 3,5 5,5 5,5 6,5 7,5 8 10 10
AL 31 42 52 64 81 94 112 132
AM 9 12 13 13,5 18,5 18,5 25 28,5
AM 1 8,5 14,5 17,5 18 24 25 32 32
AN 40,5 56 62,5 79 93 114 130 159
AP 30 36 45 55 65 75 90 100
E 80 110 130 160 215 250 320 390
F 60 80 90 120 160 190 240 300
G - 40 45 60 80 95 120 150
R 27 40 48 60 75 90 105 130
∅U 5,5 5,5 7 9 9 11 13 14
∅U1 5,5 5,5 6,6 9 9 11 13 14
( ): Figures in brackets apply for carriage mounting plate Style ‘UV’.

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
N 1.6.002.010 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. 10/98
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Swinging Bridge Mounting

Style ‘S’
AQ

4 (ø 16) to 5 mm
AV AS
AR Fx AU
+ 8° AW AT
-

AX
IE
Model ‘S’ QM/46016/37 QM/46020/37 QM/46025/37 QM/46032/37 QM/46032/37 QM/46050/37 QM/46050/37 QM/46080/37
∅ 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80
AQ 40 50 60 80 80 100 100 100
AR - 35 40 50 50 60 60 60
AS 26 38 44 59 59 65 65 65
AT - DIN 74 - Bm 5 DIN 74 - Bm 5 DIN 74 - Bm 6 DIN 74 - Bm 6 DIN 74 - Bm 8 DIN 74 - Bm 8 DIN 74 - Bm 8
AU 12 20 20 30 30 40 40 40
AV 30 40 45 60 60 80 80 80
AW M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8
AX 4 5 5 5,5 5,5 6,5 6,5 6,5
IE 48 + 4 65,5 + 5 70 + 5 88,5 + 5 102,5 +5 124 + 5 139 + 5 168,5 + 5
Fx (N) 100 150 250 410 640 1000 1500 2400

Secondary Carriage (Carriage Free) Style ‘W’

Side Mounting Plate Style ‘UW’
BJ
E BK
F L
BG G M
HC
AE

BM
HA
HB

BL

Style "W" Style "UW"

Model ‘W` QM/46116/35 QM/46120/35 QM/46125/35 QM/46132/35 QM/46140/35 QM/46150/35 QM/46163/35 QM/46180/35
Model ‘UW` QM/46120/36 QM/46125/36 QM/46132/36 QM/46140/36 QM/46150/36 QM/46163/36
∅ 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80
AE 38 59 67,5 82 97,5 117 137 165
BG M 5 x 10 deep M 5 x 10 deep M 5 x 12 deep M 6 x 12 deep M 6 x 15 deep M 8 x 20 deep
BJ 54 63 77 98 117,5 139,5
BK 33 37 45 58,5 71,5 84,5
BL 78 86 103 119 143 168
BM 55 65 80 90 120 140
E 80 110 130 160 215 250 320 390
F 80 90 120 160 190 240
G 40 45 60 80 95 120
HA 64 77 94 110 131 153
HB 49 79 87 104 120 144 169 200
HC 64 77 94 110 131 154
L 42 52 64 79 92 110
M 18 27 32 45 45 50 50 50
Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
10/98 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. N 1.6.002.011
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Assembly Kit Shock Absorber (order plate and shock absorbers separately)
For cylinders M/46100, M/46100/M

SB max. 3 R
SD 0,5 to 1 mm SW
SU

1
SN
SM

For cylinder M/46200, M/46200/M

R
SB max.
SW
SD 0,5 to 1 mm 2

5
SC
SU

3 1
SN
SM

Assembly kit shock absorber Plate ** Shock absorber **

Cylinder ∅ Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 R SB SD SC SM SN SU SW
M/46125 25 QM/46125/67 M/59614/AX, ../BX, ../CX 48 45,5 12 19 49 69,5 17
M/46132 32 QM/46132/67 M/59614/AX, ../BX, ../CX 60 40,5 12 24 61 81,5 17
M/46140 40 QM/46140/67 M/59625/AX, ../BX, ../CX 75 81,5 15 29 74 109,5 30
M/46150 50 QM/46150/67 M/59625/AX, ../BX, ../CX 90 69 15 33 91 127,5 30
M/46163 63 QM/46163/67 M/59625/AX, ../BX, ../CX 105 69 15 41 105,5 141,5 30
M/46180 80 QM/46180/67 M/59833/.. 130 85 20 53 130,5 173,5 ∅ 40
M/46225 25 QM/46125/67 M/59614/AX, ../BX, ../CX 48 45,5 12 19 49 69,5 17
M/46232 32 QM/46132/67 M/59614/AX, ../BX, ../CX 60 40,5 12 24 61 81,5 17
M/46240 40 QM/46140/67 M/P41434 M/59625/AX, ../BX, ../CX 75 81,5 15 31 29 74 109,5 30
M/46250 50 QM/46150/67 M/P41435 M/59625/AX, ../BX, ../CX 105 69 15 36 33 91 127,5 30
M/46263 63 QM/46163/67 M/P41436 M/59625/AX, ../BX, ../CX 130 69 15 35 41 105,5 141,5 30
Note: Formulae and calculations see page N 1.11.003.01, ** Order plate and shock absorbers separately.
Attention: When using M/46200 cylinders (∅ 40 to 63 mm) an extra top plate must be mounted onto the carriage as the centre line of the shock absorbers has to be within the surface of the carriage.

Lintra Rodless Cylinders M/46000 without top cover

On M/46000 models ∅ 25 to 80 mm bore the top cover can be removed and the load connected directly to the yoke to provide a useful space saving
feature.

AN AK
AH AJ AL
AM

For full dimensions see page N 1.6.002.05

Model 46025 46032 46040 46050 46063 46080

AH 25 40 55 75 90 60
AJ M 5 - 5 deep M 6 - 6 deep M 6 - 6 deep M 6 - 8 deep M 6 - 8 deep M 6 - 8 deep
AK 27 36 36 41 41 41
AL 20 27 27 32 32 32
AM 4,5 6 5 7 6 7
AN - - - - - 180

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
N 1.6.002.012 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. 10/98
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Switch Mounting Brackets for Rodless Cylinders ∅ 16 to 25 mm

Magnetically operated switches QM/45

Switch mounting Order cover

bracket, see note separately

12,5
5
Magnetically operated switch
B
Switch mounting bracket
C

Model (bracket) QM/45/716/22 QM/45/716/22 QM/45/716/22

Model (cover) M/P41443/1/** M/P41443/1/** M/P41443/1/**
ø mm 16 20 25
B 8 4,5 5
C 9,5 6 6,5
Note: When using a cover for stroke > 500 mm additional bracket mountings have to be ordered for every extra 250 mm. **Insert stroke length (mm).

Switch Mounting Brackets for Rodless Cylinders ∅ 32 to 80 mm

Magnetically operated switches QM/33, QM/34 and QM/134

Order cover
separately

20
Magnetically operated switch B
Switch mounting bracket C

Model (bracket) QM/33/732/22 QM/33/732/22 QM/33/732/22 QM/33/732/22 QM/33/732/22

Model (cover) M/P34899/1/** M/P34899/1/** M/P34899/1/** M/P34899/2/** M/P34899/2/**
ø mm 32 40 50 63 80
B 10 9 9 9 9
C 14,5 13,5 13,5 13,5 13,5
Note: When using a cover for stroke > 500 mm additional bracket mountings have to be ordered for every extra 250 mm. **Insert stroke length (mm).

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
10/98 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. N 1.6.002.013
 M/46000, M/46100, M/46200

Spares 14 19 10 9 8

13 15 12 5 16

Model Spares kit Comprising Seal strip Cover strip Barrel Guide rail
Item Description Quantity Item 8 Item 9 Item 5 Item 10
M/46016,.../M QM/46016/*/88 8+9 Seal/cover strip 1 M/P 40270/* M/P 41101/* M/P 41097/* -
M/46020,.../M QM/46020/*/88 12 Seal 2 M/P 40262/* M/P 19567/2/* M/P 41067/* -
13, 14, 16 O-Ring 2
M/46025,.../M QM/46025/*/88 M/P 40262/* M/P 19567/2/* M/P 41066/* -
15 Seal 2
M/46032,.../M QM/46032/*/88 19 Closer assy. 2 M/P 40344/* M/P 19587/2/* M/P 41018/* -
M/46040,.../M QM/46040/*/88 Grease 1 M/P 40263/* M/P 19606/2/* M/P 41017/* -
M/46050,.../M QM/46050/*/88 M/P 40626/* M/P 19644/2/* M/P 41064/* -
M/46063,.../M QM/46063/*/88 M/P 40626/* M/P 19644/2/* M/P 41065/* -
M/46080,.../M QM/46080/*/88 M/P 40715/* M/P 41076/* M/P 41071/* -
M/46116,.../M QM/46116/*/88 8+9 Seal/cover strip 1 M/P 40270/* M/P 41101/* M/P 41097/* M/P 41102
M/46120,.../M QM/46120/*/88 10 Guide rail 2 M/P 40262/* M/P 19567/2/* M/P 41067/* M/P 41232
12 Seal 2
M/46125,.../M QM/46125/*/88 M/P 40262/* M/P 19567/2/* M/P 41066/* M/P 41149
13, 14, 16 O-Ring 2
M/46132,.../M QM/46132/*/88 15 Seal 2 M/P 40344/* M/P 19587/2/* M/P 41018/* M/P 41048
M/46140,.../M QM/46140/*/88 19 Closer assy. 2 M/P 40263/* M/P 19606/2/* M/P 41017/* M/P 41043
M/46150,.../M QM/46150/*/88 Grease 1 M/P 40626/* M/P 19644/2/* M/P 41064/* M/P 41269
M/46163,.../M QM/46163/*/88 M/P 40626/* M/P 19644/2/* M/P 41065/* M/P 41197
M/46180,.../M QM/46180/*/88 M/P 40715/* M/P 41076/* M/P 41071/* M/P 41077
* Insert stroke length

Model Spares kit Comprising Seal strip Cover strip Barrel Bearing **
Item Description Quantity Item 8 Item 9 Item 5
M/46225,../M QM/46025/*/88 8+9 Seal/cover strip 1 M/P 40262/* M/P 19567/2/* M/P 41066/* QM/46225/12
M/46232,../M QM/46032/*/88 12 Seal 2 M/P 40344/* M/P 19587/2/* M/P 41018/* QM/46225/12
13, 14, 16 O-Ring 2
M/46240,../M QM/46040/*/88 M/P 40263/* M/P 19606/2/* M/P 41017/* M/P 34558
15 Seal 2
M/46250,../M QM/46050/*/88 19 Closer assy. 2 M/P 40626/* M/P 19644/2/* M/P 41064/* M/P 34558
M/46263,../M QM/46063/*/88 Grease 1 M/P 40626/* M/P 19644/2/* M/P 41065/* M/P 34558
* Insert stroke length
** Bearing with pin and locking washer for ∅ 25 and 32 mm
Note: Please quote the cylinder type number when ordering spare parts

Yoke assembly
Model Yoke Model Yoke Model Yoke Model Yoke
M/46016 QM/46016/04 M/46116 QM/46116/04 M/46016/M QM/46016/M/04 M/46116/M QM/46116/M/04
M/46020 QM/46020/04 M/46120 QM/46120/04 M/46020/M QM/46020/M/04 M/46120/M QM/46120/M/04
M/46025 QM/46025/04 M/46125 QM/46125/04 M/46025/M QM/46025/M/04 M/46125/M QM/46125/M/04
M/46032 QM/46032/04 M/46132 QM/46132/04 M/46032/M QM/46032/M/04 M/46132/M QM/46132/M/04
M/46040 QM/46040/04 M/46140 QM/46140/04 M/46040/M QM/46040/M/04 M/46140/M QM/46140/M/04
M/46050 QM/46050/04 M/46150 QM/46150/04 M/46050/M QM/46050/M/04 M/46150/M QM/46150/M/04
M/46063 QM/46063/04 M/46163 QM/46163/04 M/46063/M QM/46063/M/04 M/46163/M QM/46163/M/04
M/46080 QM/46080/04 M/46180 QM/46180/04 M/46080/M QM/46080/M/04 M/46180/M QM/46180/M/04

Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air The system designer is warned to consider the failure modes of
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and all component parts used in fluid power systems and to provide
temperatures can exceed those listed under ‘Technical Data’. adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or damage to
equipment in the event of such failure.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
for non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
applications not within published specifications, consult NORGREN. cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with
fluid power systems can fail in various modes. these products.

Our policy is one of continued research and development. We therefore reserve the right
N 1.6.002.014 to amend, without notice, the specifications given in this document. 10/98
Racordaje

Racores Pneufit Serie C

Pulgadas
Ø Â" a Á" O/D tubo

Racores unión tubos, con orificio

de fijación incorporado en el
cuerpo
Ligeros
Pulsador de desconexión en rojo
para indicar los modelos para
tubo métrico; en color gris para
indicar los modelos para tubo en
pulgadas
Juntas exentas de silicona
Las juntas tóricas en las roscas
cilíndricas son reutilizables
Las roscas cónicas están
recubiertas con película sellante
Fácil inserción del tubo para un Dimensiones Medidas del tubo
montaje rápido y simple de 1/8", 5/32", 1/4", 5/16", 3/8" O/D
circuitos neumáticos
Advertencia: El diseño del Pneufit C no es
Conexiones rectas con hexágono adecuado para utilizar con los frenos o
interno que permiten el montaje sistemas auxiliares neumáticos de los
en espacios muy reducidos vehículos. Para información sobre racores
Seguro y resistente a la adecuados en estas aplicaciones consultar con
corrosión nuestro Servicio Técnico.

Datos técnicos ØA ØS# ØT* V Clases de tubo

Tubo O/D Parada tubo Tuberías en nylon 11 o 12, poliuretano* y otras
Fluido: 1/8" 2,3 15,3 10,7 plastificadas o no que cumplen las tolerancias
5/32" 2,8 15,3 10,7
Aire comprimido especificadas en las normas DIN 73378, NFE
1/4" 4,4 17,1 12,9
5/16" 6,0 19,2 14,5
49-101, ISO / WD 16026, ISO / WD 16627
Presión de trabajo:
3/8" 7,7 20,25 17,6 Cobre
Vacío - 18 bar a menos que se * Indicado para 85D
* estas dimensiones y las de la tabla individual hacen referencia al
indique otra presión interior del pulsador de des conexión
(dependiendo de las # estas dimensiones (diámetro mínimo) son comunes para todos los
tamaños de los conectores, codos y 'T' a menos que se indique otro
Par de apriete
especificaciones del tubo) tamaño La rosca tiene una película sellante a todo su
Temperatura ambiente: alrededor. El par de apriete recomendado para
-20° a +80° C los diseños con película sellante se indica en
la tabla adjunta:
Materiales
Cuerpo: plástico - PBT, excepto Cuerpo Rosca Par de apriete
en la conexión recta y el NPTF (Nm)
Pulsador de 1/8" 6,86 ... 8,82
adaptador tubo liso desconexión 1/4" 11,76 ... 13,72
Conexión recta: latón niquelado 3/8" 21,56 ... 25,32
Adaptador tubo liso: plástico - 1/2" 27,44 ... 29,40
acetal
Roscas: latón niquelado Clips-C
Pinza de sujeción: acero Estos clips permiten, además de una
inoxidable - BS 1440 Pt 2, grado señalización óptima de los circuitos, que el
301.S21 Pinza de racor sea antimanipulación.
sujección 3mm ... 4mm 6mm 8mm 10mm
Juntas tóricas: nitrilo libre de
Junta 1/8" ... 5/32" 1/4" 5/16" 3/8"
silicona
tórica ROJO 48A35501 48B35501 48C35501 48D35501
Película sellante: ecológica, libre AMARILLO 48A35502 48B35502 48C35502 48D35502
de PTFE Junta NARANJA 48A35503 48B35503 48C35503 48D35503
tórica VERDE 48A35504 48B35504 48C35504 48D35504
Modelos Rosca
NEGRO 48A35505 48B35505 48C35505 48D35505
MARRÓN 48A35506 48B35506 48C35506 48D35506
alternativos VIOLETA 48A35507 48B35507 48C35507 48D35507
Racores enchufables Pneufit, ver AZUL 8A35508 48B35508 48C35508 48D35508
página 510 Aplicada BLANCO 48A35509 48B35509 48C35509 48D35509
anteriormente PLATA 48A35510 48B35510 48C35510 48D35510
una película sellante Cajas de 30 unidades
(roscas cónicas)

498 www.norgren.com/info/es498
 Racores Pneufit Serie C
Pulgadas
Ø Â" a Á" O/D tubo

øD
øB

C
D

Conexión recta hembra

Tubo Rosca
Unión tubo-tubo O/D NPTF A D
Tubo 1/8" 1/8" 28,2 15,8 9/16" C24260118
O/D A B C D 1/8" 1/4" 35,2 17,0 5/8" C24260128
1/8" 33,5 10,7 5,0 13,6 C20200100 5/32" 1/8" 28,2 15,8 9/16" C24260218
5/32" 33,5 10,7 5,0 13,6 C20200200 5/32" 1/4" 35,2 17,0 5/8" C24260228
1/4" 39,0 12,9 6,0 15,7 C20200400 1/4" 1/8" 31,6 15,8 9/16" C24260418
5/16" 43,5 14,5 7,0 17,5 C20200500 1/4" 1/4" 38,1 17,0 5/8" C24260428
3/8" 48,0 17,4 8,1 20,1 C20200600 5/16" 1/8" 33,0 17,0 5/8" C24260518
5/16" 1/4" 40,5 17,0 5/8" C24260528
3/8" 1/4" 41,1 21,0 3/4" C24260628
3/8" 3/8" 42,1 24,0 7/8" C24260638

A
øB
C

A
D

øE
øB

Conexión recta macho

Tubo Rosca Adaptador de reducción
O/D NPTF A B C
1/8" 1/16" 21,7 10,7 1/16" 7/16" C24250116 Tubo Espiga
1/8" 1/8" 20,2 10,7 1/8" 7/16" C24250118 O/D O/D A B D E
1/8" 1/4" 25,7 10,7 1/4" 9/16" C24250128 1/8" 5/32" 33,5 10,7 17 4,0 C20230201
5/32" 1/8" 21,2 10,7 1/8" 7/16" C24250218 1/8" 1/4" 35,5 10,7 19 6,25 C20230401
5/32" 1/4" 25,7 10,7 1/4" 9/16" C24250228 5/32" 1/4" 35,5 10,7 19 6,25 C20230402
1/4" 1/8" 26,1 12,9 1/8" 1/2" C24250418 5/32" 5/16" 35,5 10,7 21 8,0 C20230502
1/4" 1/4" 27,6 12,9 1/4" 1/2" C24250428 5/32" 3/8" 37,0 10,7 24 10,0 C20230602
1/4" 3/8" 27,6 12,9 3/8" 11/16" C24250438 1/4" 1/8" 35,5 13,0 17 3,15 C20230104
5/16" 1/8" 29,5 14,5 1/8" 5/8" C24250518 1/4" 5/32" 35,5 13,0 17 4,0 C20230204
5/16" 1/4" 29,5 14,5 1/4" 5/8" C24250528 1/4" 5/16" 40,0 13,0 21 8,0 C20230504
5/16" 3/8" 27,5 14,5 3/8" 11/16" C24250538 1/4" 3/8" 41,0 13,0 24 10,0 C20230604
3/8" 1/8" 31,1 17,6 1/8" 11/16" C24250618 1/4" 1/2" 41,0 13,0 27,5 12,65 C20230704
3/8" 1/4" 34,6 17,6 1/4" 11/16" C24250628 5/16" 3/8" 45,5 14,5 24 10,0 C20230605
3/8" 3/8" 30,1 17,6 3/8" 11/16" C24250638 5/16" 1/2" 49,5 14,5 27,5 12,65 C20230705
3/8" 1/2" 35,6 17,6 1/2" 7/8" C24250648 3/8" 1/2" 51,0 17,5 27,5 12,65 C20230706

A
A
C H
øE
øC

øB

øG
B

Conexión recta macho

Adaptador tubo liso
Tubo Rosca Espiga Rosca
O/D UNF A B C O/D BSP cón.A B C E G H
1/8" 10-32 21,2 10,7 10,6 C24250110 1/4" 1/8" 34,5 1/8" 8,6 6,3 11,0 19,0 10,0 C21150418
5/32" 10-32 21,2 10,7 10,6 C24250210 1/4" 1/4" 37,0 1/4" 11,1 6,3 15,0 19,0 14,0 C21150428
1/4" 10-32 24,1 12,9 12,6 C24250410 1/2" 3/8" 50,0 3/8" 12,7 12,65 20,0 27,5 19,0 C21150738
1/2" 1/2" 52,5 1/2" 15,9 12,65 23,0 27,5 22,0 C21150748

SE SUMINISTRAN EN CAJAS DE 10 UNIDADES

499
Racordaje

Racores Pneufit Serie C

Pulgadas
Ø Â" a Á" O/D tubo
A
C H A

øE

øB
øG
B

C
B
Adaptador tubo liso Codo 90° orientable
Espiga Rosca Tubo Rosca
O/D NPTF A B C E G H O/D UNF A B C
5/32" 10-32 30,5 10-32 4,3 4,0 11,0 17,0 10,0 C24150210 1/8" 10-32 18,0 10,7 17,5 10,0 C24470110
5/32" 1/8" 33,0 1/8" 9,5 4,0 12,3 17,0 7/16" C24150218 5/32" 10-32 18,0 10,7 17,5 10,0 C24470210
5/32" 1/4" 39,0 1/4" 14,25 4,0 15,75 17,0 9/16" C24150228 1/4" 10-32 21,0 12,9 18,5 10,0 C24470410
1/4" 1/8" 35,5 1/8" 9,5 6,25 12,3 19,0 7/16" C24150418
1/4" 1/4" 41,0 1/4" 14,25 6,25 15,75 19,0 9/16" C24150428
5/16" 1/4" 42,0 1/4" 14,25 8,0 15,75 20,0 9/16" C24150528
3/8" 1/4" 46,0 1/4" 14,25 10,0 15,75 24,0 9/16" C24150628
3/8" 3/8" 47,0 3/8" 14,25 10,0 18,5 24,0 11/16" C24150638
1/2" 3/8" 51,0 3/8" 14,25 12,65 21,0 27,5 3/4" C24150738
1/2" 1/2" 57,5 1/2" 19,05 12,65 24,35 27,5 7/8" C24150748

A
E
A
øB
C

øB
A

C
øB

Codo tubo-tubo Codo tubo - espiga lisa

Tubo Tubo Espiga
O/D A B C O/D O/D A B C E
1/8" 18,0 10,7 6,5 C20400100 1/4" 1/4" 21,0 12,9 24,5 26,0 C20430400
5/32" 18,0 10,7 6,5 C20400200
1/4" 21,0 12,9 7,7 C20400400
5/16" 25,0 14,5 7,25 C20400500
3/8" 27,5 17,4 8,35 C20400600

A A
A C C
øB

øB

M
C

B øB

Codo 90° orientable 'T' unión tubos

Tubo Rosca Tubo
O/D NPTF A B C O/D A B C E
1/8" 1/8" 18,0 10,7 20,0 7/16" C24470118 1/8" 18,0 10,7 6,5 23,5 C20600100
1/8" 1/4" 18,0 10,7 26,0 9/16" C24470128 5/32" 18,0 10,7 6,5 23,5 C20600200
5/32" 1/8" 18,0 10,7 20,0 7/16" C24470218 1/4" 21,0 12,9 7,7 27,5 C20600400
5/32" 1/4" 18,0 10,7 26,0 9/16" C24470228 5/16" 25,0 14,5 7,25 32,5 C20600500
1/4" 1/8" 21,0 12,9 21,0 7/16" C24470418 3/8" 27,5 17,4 8,35 36,5 C20600600
1/4" 1/4" 21,0 12,9 26,5 9/16" C24470428
1/4" 3/8" 21,0 12,9 28,0 3/4" C24470438
5/16" 1/8" 24,5 14,5 32,2 5/8" C24470518
5/16" 1/4" 25,0 14,5 27,0 9/16" C24470528
3/8" 1/4" 27,5 17,4 29,0 9/16" C24470628
3/8" 3/8" 27,5 17,4 31,0 3/4" C24470638
3/8" 1/2" 27,5 17,4 36,5 7/8" C24470648
SE SUMINISTRAN EN CAJAS DE 10 UNIDADES

500
 Racores Pneufit Serie C
Pulgadas
Ø Â" a Á" O/D tubo

F
A
E
øB

D
N
A
'T' orientable macho central
Tubo Rosca
O/D NPTF A B
øB
1/8" 1/8" 36,0 10,7 7/16" C24670118
5/32" 1/8" 36,0 10,7 7/16" C24670218 'Y' tubo-rosca macho cónica
5/32" 1/4" 36,0 10,7 9/16" C24670228 Tubo Rosca
1/4" 1/8" 42,0 12,9 7/16" C24670418 O/D NPTF A B D E F N
1/4" 1/4" 42,0 12,9 9/16" C24670428 5/32" 1/8" 49,0 11,0 3,2 11,0 22,0 13,0 7/16" C24880218
1/4" 3/8" 42,0 12,9 3/4" C24670438 5/32" 1/4" 55,0 11,0 3,2 11,0 22,0 13,0 9/16" C24880228
5/16" 1/4" 50,0 14,5 9/16" C24670528 1/4" 1/8" 52,5 14,0 3,2 14,0 28,0 14,25 7/16" C24880418
3/8" 1/8" 55,0 17,4 5/8" C24670618 1/4" 1/4" 58,0 14,0 3,2 14,0 28,0 14,25 9/16" C24880428
3/8" 1/4" 55,0 17,4 9/16" C24670628 3/8" 1/4" 72,5 20,0 4,2 20,6 42,0 14,90 3/4" C24880628
3/8" 3/8" 55,0 17,4 3/4" C24670638 3/8" 3/8" 72,5 20,0 4,2 20,6 42,0 14,90 3/4" C24880638
3/8" 1/2" 77,0 20,0 4,2 20,6 42,0 14,90 7/8" C24880648

N
E
A øB

D
N
A
øB

A
C

'T' orientable macho lateral

G

Tubo Rosca øF
O/D NPTF A B C øB
1/8" 1/8" 18,0 10,7 20,0 7/16" C24680118
5/32 1/8" 18,0 10,7 20,0 7/16" C24680218 'Y' unión tubos
5/32" 1/4" 18,0 10,7 26,0 9/16" C24680228
Tubo Espiga
1/4" 1/8" 21,0 12,9 21,0 7/16" C24680418
O/D O/D A B D E F N G
1/4" 1/4" 21,0 12,9 26,5 9/16" C24680428
5/32" 5/32" 58,0 11,5 2,95 11,0 4,0 13,0 17,0 C20840202
5/16" 1/4" 25,0 14,5 27,0 9/16" C24680528
5/32" 1/4" 60,0 11,5 2,95 11,0 6,25 13,0 19,0 C20840402
3/8" 1/4" 27,5 17,4 29,0 9/16" C24680628
1/4" 1/4" 63,0 14,0 3,2 14,0 6,25 14,25 19,2 C20840404
3/8" 3/8" 27,5 17,4 31,0 3/4" C24680638
5/16" 5/16" 68,0 16,0 3,2 16,0 8,0 14.90 21,3 C20840505

F
B
øE
D
N
A

øE

'Y' unión tubos

Tubo Tubo Tubo
O/D O/D O/D A B D E F N
5/32" 5/32" 5/32" 41,0 11,0 3,2 11,0 22,0 13,0 C20820200
1/4" 1/4" 1/4" 43,8 14,0 3,2 14,0 28,0 14.25 C20820400
5/16" 5/16" 5/16" 46,7 15,0 3,2 16,0 31,0 14,90 C20820500
1/4" 5/32" 5/32" 44,3 14,0 3,2 14,0 28,0 14,50 C20820604

SE SUMINISTRAN EN CAJAS DE 10 UNIDADES

501
Racordaje

Racores Pneufit Serie C

Métrico
Ø 3 a 10 mm O/D tubo
Racores unión tubos, con
orificio de fijación incorporado
en el cuerpo
Ligeros
Pulsador de desconexión en
rojo para indicar los modelos
para tubo métrico; en color
gris para indicar los modelos
para tubo en pulgadas
Juntas exentas de silicona
Las juntas tóricas en las
roscas cilíndricas son
reutilizables
Las roscas cónicas están
recubiertas con película
sellante Dimensiones Medidas del tubo
Fácil inserción del tubo para
un montaje rápido y simple de 3, 4, 6, 8, 10mm O/D
circuitos neumáticos Advertencia: El diseño del Pneufit C no es
adecuado para utilizar con los frenos o
Conexiones rectas con
sistemas auxiliares neumáticos de los
hexágono interno que
vehículos. Para información sobre racores
permiten el montaje en
adecuados en estas aplicaciones consultar con
espacios muy reducidos
nuestro Servicio Técnico.
Seguro y resistente a la
corrosión Clases de tubo
ØA ØS# ØT* V
Tubo O/D Parada tubo
Tuberías en nylon 11 o 12, poliuretano* y otras
Datos técnicos 3 mm 2,3 15,3 10,7 plastificadas o no que cumplen las tolerancias
4 mm 2,8 15,3 10,7 especificadas en las normas DIN 73378, NFE
Fluido: 6 mm 4,4 17,1 12,9 49-101, ISO / WD 16026, ISO / WD 16627
Aire comprimido 8 mm 6,0 19,2 14,5 Cobre
10 mm 7,7 20,25 17,6 * Indicado para 85D
Presión de trabajo: * estas dimensiones y las de la tabla individual hacen
referencia al interior del pulsador de desconexión
Par de apriete
Vacío - 18 bar a menos que se # estas dimensiones (diámetro mínimo) son estándares para La rosca tiene una película sellante a todo su
indique otra presión el tamaño del tubo de todos los conectores, codos y 'T' a
alrededor. El par de apriete recomendado para
(dependiendo de las menos que se especifiquen otras medidas
los diseños con película sellante se indica en la
especificaciones del tubo)
tabla adjunta.
Temperatura ambiente:
Referencia estándar: C01470628
-20° a +80° C
para codo tubo 90°
Rosca BSP Par de apriete
Materiales Cuerpo cónica (Nm)
1/8 6,86 ... 8,82
Cuerpo: plástico - PBT, excepto 1/4 11,76 ... 13,72
Pulsador de
en la conexión recta y el desconexión 3/8 21,56 ... 25,32
adaptador tubo liso 1/2 27,44 ... 29,40
Conexión recta: latón niquelado
Adaptador tubo liso: plástico -
acetal
Clips-C
Roscas: latón niquelado Estos clips permiten, además de una
señalización óptima de los circuitos, que el
Pinza de sujeción: acero racor sea antimanipulación.
inoxidable - BS 1440 Pt 2, grado Pinza de
301.S21 sujección 3mm ... 4mm 6mm 8mm 10mm
Juntas tóricas: nitrilo libre de Junta 1/8" ... 5/32" 1/4" 5/16" 3/8"
tórica ROJO 48A35501 48B35501 48C35501 48D35501
silicona
AMARILLO 48A35502 48B35502 48C35502 48D35502
Película sellante: ecológica, libre Junta NARANJ 48A35503 48B35503 48C35503 48D35503
de PTFE tórica VERDE 48A35504 48B35504 48C35504 48D35504
NEGRO 48A35505 48B35505 48C35505 48D35505
Rosca
Modelos MARRÓN 48A35506 48B35506 48C35506 48D35506
VIOLETA 48A35507 48B35507 48C35507 48D35507
alternativos AZUL 8A35508 48B35508 48C35508 48D35508
Modelos alternativos Aplicada anteriormente BLANCO 48A35509 48B35509 48C35509 48D35509
Racores enchufables Pneufit, ver una película sellante PLATA 48A35510 48B35510 48C35510 48D35510
(roscas cónicas) Cajas de 30 unidades
página 502

492 www.norgren.com/info/es492
 Racores Pneufit Serie C
Métrico
Ø 3 a 10mm O/D tubo

C
C

øA
øD

øK
B
øK
øA

H
G
O

Unión tubo-tubo Conexión recta hembra

Tubo Tubo Hembra
O/D ØA C ØD H ØK O O/D BSP cil. ØA B C G ØK
3 3 33,5 4,2 5,0 10,5 11,0 C00200300 4 M5 4 M5 22,5 11,0 7,0 10,5 C02260405
4 4 33,5 4,2 5,0 10,5 11,0 C00200400 4 G1/8" 4 G1/8" 25,0 13,0 7,5 10,5 C02260418
6 6 39,0 4,2 6,0 13,0 13,5 C00200600 4 G1/4" 4 G1/4" 29,5 17,0 11,0 10,5 C02260428
8 8 43,5 4,2 7,0 14,5 15,0 C00200800 6 G1/8" 6 G1/8" 27,0 13,0 7,5 13,0 C02260618
10 10 48,0 4,2 8,0 17,5 18,0 C00201000 6 G1/4" 6 G1/4" 31,5 17,0 11,0 13,0 C02260628
8 G1/8" 8 G1/8" 29,0 15,0 7,5 14,5 C02260818
8 G1/4" 8 G1/4" 34,0 17,0 11,0 14,5 C02260828
8 G1/4" 8 G1/4" 29,5 19,0 11,0 17,5 C02261028
8 G3/8" 8 G3/8" 29,5 19,0 11,5 17,5 C02261038
C
G

C
B

Conexión recta macho

Tubo R. BSP
O/D cónica ØA B C G ØK
4 R1/8" 4 1/8" 19,5 11,0 8,5 12,0 C01250418
4 R1/4" 4 1/4" 23,0 14,0 11,0 15,0 C01250428 Adaptador de reducción
6 R1/8" 6 1/8" 25,0 13,0 8,5 14,0 C01250618
Tubo Espiga
6 R1/4" 6 1/4" 23,0 14,0 11,0 15,0 C01250628 O/D O/D ØA ØA1 C F ØK
8 R1/8" 8 1/8" 28,5 15,0 8,5 16,0 C01250818 4 5 4 5,0 34,5 18,0 10,5 C00230504
8 R1/4" 8 1/4" 26,0 15,0 11,0 16,0 C01250828 4 6 4 6,0 35,5 19,0 10,5 C00230604
8 R3/8" 8 3/8" 26,0 17,0 12,5 18,5 C01250838 4 8 4 8,0 35,0 21,0 10,5 C00230804
8 R1/2" 8 1/2" 31,5 22,0 16,0 24,0 C01250848 4 10 4 10,0 37,0 24,0 11,0 C00231004
10 R1/8" 10 1/8" 30.0 19,0 8,5 21,0 C01251018 6 4 6 4,0 36,0 17,0 13,0 C00230406
10 R1/4" 10 1/4" 32,0 19,0 11,0 21,0 C01251028 6 8 6 8,0 39,5 21,0 13,0 C00230806
10 R3/8" 10 3/8" 29,5 19,0 12,5 21,0 C01251038 6 10 6 24,0 40,5 10,0 13,0 C00231006
10 R1/2" 10 1/2" 33,0 22,0 16,0 24,0 C01251048 8 6 8 6,0 40,5 19,0 14,5 C00230608
8 10 8 24,0 45,5 10,0 14,5 C00231008

C C
G G F
øA

B
B

Conexión recta macho Adaptador tubo liso

Tubo Rosca Espiga Rosca
O/D BSP cil. ØA B C G ØJ ØK O/D BSP cón. ØA1 B C F G
4 M3 4 M3 19,0 - 3,5 10,5 10,5 C02250403 4 R1/8" 4,0 R1/8" 32,5 10,0 17,0 8,5 C01150418
4 M5 4 M5 21,0 - 4,5 10,5 10,5 C02250405 4 R1/4" 4,0 R1/4" 35,0 14,0 17,0 11,0 C01150428
4 G1/8" 4 G1/8" 18,5 11,0 5,5 14,0 12,0 C02250418 5 R1/8" 5,0 R1/8" 33,5 10,0 18,0 8,5 C01150518
4 G1/4" 4 G1/4" 21,5 11,0 8,0 18,0 12,0 C02250428 5 R1/4" 5,0 R1/4" 36,0 14,0 18,0 11,0 C01150528
6 M5 6 M5 24,5 - 4,5 12,5 13,0 C02250605 6 R1/8" 6,0 R1/8" 34,5 10,0 19,0 8,5 C01150618
6 G1/8" 6 G1/8" 24,0 13,0 5,5 14,0 14,0 C02250618 6 R1/4" 6,0 R1/4" 37,0 14,0 19,0 11,0 C01150628
6 G1/4" 6 G1/4" 23,0 13,0 8,0 18,0 14,0 C02250628 8 R1/8" 8,0 R1/8" 36,0 12,0 20,0 8,5 C01150818
8 G1/8" 8 G1/8" 27,0 15,0 5,5 14,0 16,0 C02250818 8 R1/4" 8,0 R1/4" 38,0 14,0 20,0 11,0 C01150828
8 G1/4" 8 G1/4" 25,0 15,0 8,0 18,0 16,0 C02250828 8 R3/8" 8,0 R3/8" 42,0 19,0 20,0 12,5 C01150838
8 G3/8" 8 G3/8" 25,0 15,0 9,0 21,5 16,0 C02250838 10 R1/4" 10,0 R1/4" 43,0 14,0 24,0 11,0 C01151028
8 G1/2" 8 G1/2" 27,5 15,0 11,0 25,5 16,0 C02250848 10 R3/8" 10,0 R3/8" 45,5 19,0 24,0 12,5 C01151038
10 G1/8" 10 G1/8" 28,0 19,0 5,5 14,0 21,0 C02251018 10 R1/2" 10,0 R1/2" 49,0 22,0 24,0 16,0 C01151048
10 G1/4" 10 G1/4" 31,0 19,0 8,0 18,0 21,0 C02251028 12 R3/8" 12,0 R3/8" 49,5 19,0 27,5 12,5 C01151238
10 G3/8" 10 G3/8" 28,0 19,0 9,0 21,5 21,0 C02251038 12 R1/2" 12,0 R1/2" 52,5 22,0 27,5 16,0 C01151248
10 G1/2" 10 G1/2" 30,0 19,0 11,0 25,5 21,0 C02251048 14 R1/2" 14,0 R1/2" 53,0 27,0 28,0 16,0 C01151448

493
Racordaje

Racores Pneufit Serie C

Métrico
Ø 3 a 10 mm O/D tubo
C E
G F

ø A1

M
B

G
B

Adaptador tubo liso Codo 90° orientable

Espiga Rosca Tubo Rosca
O/D BSP cil. ØA1 B C F G ØJ O/D BSP cil. ØA B E G ØK M
4 G1/8" 4,0 G1/8" 30,5 10,0 17,0 5,5 14,0 C02150418 3 G1/8" 3 G1/8" 18,0 11,0 5,5 10,5 20,0 C02470318
4 G1/4" 4,0 G1/4" 35,5 10,0 17,0 8,0 18,0 C02150428 4 M5" 4 M5 18,0 10,0 4,5 10,5 17,5 C02470405
5 G1/8" 5,0 G1/8" 31,5 10,0 18,0 5,5 14,5 C02150518 4 G1/8" 4 G1/8" 18,0 11,0 5,5 10,5 20,0 C02470418
5 G1/4"4 5,0 G1/4" 36,5 10,0 18,0 8,0 18,0 C02150528 4 G1/4" 4 G1/4" 18,0 11,0 8,0 10,5 23,0 C02470428
6 G1/8" 6,0 G1/8" 32,5 10,0 19,0 5,5 14,0 C02150618 6 M5" 6 M5 21,0 10,0 4,5 13,0 18,5 C02470605
6 G1/4" 6,0 G1/4" 37,5 10,0 19,0 8,0 18,0 C02150628 6 G1/8" 6 G1/8" 21,0 11,0 5,5 13,0 20,5 C02470618
8 G1/8" 8,0 G1/8" 34,0 12,0 20,0 5,5 14,0 C02150818 6 G1/4" 6 G1/4" 21,0 11,0 5,5 13,0 23,5 C02470628
8 G1/4" 8,0 G1/4" 38,5 12,0 20,0 8,0 18,0 C02150828 8 G1/4" 8 G1/4" 25,0 17,0 8,0 14,5 25,5 C02470828
8 G3/8" 8,0 G3/8" 41,5 17,0 20,0 9,0 22,0 C02150838 8 G3/8" 8 G3/8" 25,0 17,0 9,0 14,5 26,5 C02470838
10 G1/4" 10,0 G1/4" 42,5 17,0 24,0 8,0 18,0 C02151028 10 G3/8" 10 G3/8" 27,5 17,0 9,0 17,5 28,5 C02471038
10 G3/8" 10,0 G3/8" 45,5 17,0 24,0 9,0 22,0 C02151038
10 G1/2" 10,0 G1/2" 50,0 18,0 24,0 11,0 26,0 C02151048

E E
øA

øD

øK
øA
øK

H
E

F
O

øK
ø A1
Codo tubo-tubo Codo tubo - espiga lisa
Tubo
Tubo Espiga
O/D ØA ØD E H ØK O
O/D O/D A ØA1 E F ØK
3 3 4,2 18,0 11,0 10,5 11,0 C00400300
4 4 4 4 18,0 15,0 10,5 C00430400
4 4 4,2 18,0 11,0 10,5 11,0 C00400400
6 6 6 6 21,0 17,0 13,0 C00430600
6 6 4,2 21,0 13,5 13,0 13,5 C00400600
8 8 8 8 25,0 19,0 14,5 C00430800
8 8 4,2 25,0 15,0 14,5 15,0 C00400800
10 10 4,2 27,5 18,0 17,5 18,0 C00401000

C C
øD
H
E

O
G

Codo 90° orientable 'T' unión tubos

Tubo Rosca Tubo
O/D BSP cón. ØA B C E G ØK O/D ØA C ØD E H ØK O
3 R1/8" 3 R1/8" 18,0 10,0 19,5 8,5 10,5 C01470318 3 3 36,0 4.3 18,0 7,0 10,5 11,0 C00600300
4 R1/8" 4 R1/8" 18,0 10,0 19,5 8,5 10,5 C01470418 4 4 36,0 4.3 18,0 7,0 10,5 11,0 C00600400
4 R1/4" 4 R1/4" 18,0 14,0 20,5 11,0 10,5 C01470428 6 6 42,0 4.3 21,0 8,0 13,0 13,5 C00600600
6 R1/8" 6 R1/8" 21,0 10,0 21,0 8,5 13,0 C01470618 8 8 50,0 4.3 25,0 8,5 14,5 15,0 C00600800
6 R1/4" 6 R1/4" 21,0 14,0 24,0 11,0 13,0 C01470628 10 10 55,0 4.3 27,5 8,5 17,5 18,0 C00601000
6 R3/8" 6 R3/8" 21,0 17,0 26,0 12,5 13,0 C01470638
8 R1/4" 8 R1/4" 25,0 14,0 25,0 11,0 14,5 C01470828
8 R3/8" 8 R3/8" 25,0 17,0 26,5 12,5 14,5 C01470838
10 R3/8" 10 R3/8" 27,5 17,0 28,5 12,5 17,5 C01471038

494
 Racores Pneufit Serie C
Métrico
Ø 3 a 10 mm O/D tubo

E
C

E
M
G

M
B

G
B
'T' orientable macho central 'T' orientable macho lateral
Tubo Rosca Tubo Rosca
O/D BSP cón. ØA B C G ØK M O/D BSP cil. ØA B E G ØK M
4 R1/8" 4 R1/8" 36,0 10,0 8,5 10,5 19,5 C01670418 3 M3 3 M3 18,0 8,0 3,5 10,5 15,0 C02680303
4 R1/4" 4 R1/4" 26,0 14,0 11,0 10,5 20,5 C01670428 4 G1/8" 4 G1/8" 18,0 11,0 5,5 10,5 20,0 C02680418
6 R1/8" 6 R1/8" 42,0 10,0 8,5 13,0 21,5 C01670618 6 G1/8" 6 G1/8" 21,0 11,0 5,5 13,0 20,5 C02680618
6 R1/4" 6 R1/4" 42,0 14,0 11,0 13,0 24,0 C01670628 6 G1/4" 6 G1/4" 21,0 11,0 8,0 13,0 23,5 C02680628
6 R3/8" 6 R3/8" 42,0 17,0 12,5 13,0 26,0 C01670638 8 G1/4" 8 G1/4" 25,0 17,0 8,0 14,5 25,5 C02680828
8 R1/4" 8 R1/4" 50,0 14,0 11,0 14,5 25,0 C01670828 8 G3/8" 8 G3/8" 25,0 17,0 9,0 14,5 26,5 C02680838
8 R3/8" 8 R3/8" 50,0 17,0 12,5 14,5 26,5 C01670838 10 G3/8" 10 G3/8" 27,5 17,0 9,0 17,5 28,5 C02681038
10 R3/8" 10 R3/8" 55,0 17,0 12,5 17,5 28,5 C01671038

N
L
øK
øA
C
O

øD
H
C
M
G

øK
'T' orientable macho central 'Y' unión tubos
Tubo Rosca Tubo Tubo Tubo
O/D BSP cilí. ØA B C G ØK M O/D O/D O/D ØA C ØD H ØK L N O
4 G1/8" 4 G1/8" 36,0 11,0 5,5 10,5 20,0 C02670418 4 4 4 4 41,0 3,2 13,0 11,0 11,0 22,0 10,0 C00820400
6 G1/8" 6 G1/8" 42,0 11,0 5,5 13,0 20,5 C02670618 6 6 6 6 44,0 3,2 14,0 14,0 14,0 28,0 12,5 C00820600
6 G1/4" 6 G1/4" 42,0 11,0 8,0 13,0 23,5 C02670628 6 4 6 4 44,5 3,2 14,5 14,0 14,0 28,0 12,5 C00820604
8 G1/4" 8 G1/4" 50,0 17,0 8,0 14,5 25,5 C02670828 8 8 8 8 46,5 3,2 15,0 15,0 16,0 31,0 13,5 C00820800
8 G3/8" 8 G3/8" 50,0 17,0 8,0 14,5 26,5 C02670838 8 6 8 6 46,0 3,2 14,5 15,0 16,0 31,0 13,5 C00820806
10 G3/8" 10 G3/8" 55,0 17,0 9,0 17,5 28,5 C02671038 10 10 10 10 57,5 4,2 15,0 20,0 20,5 42,0 15,0 C00821000
10 8 10 8 57,0 4,2 18,0 20,0 20,5 42,0 15,0 C00821008

F
E
øK
øA
C O
øD
H
C

C
E

G
G

B B
'T' orientable macho lateral 'Y' tubo - rosca macho cónica
Tubo Rosca Tubo Rosca
O/D BSP cón. ØA B C E G ØK O/D BSP cón. ØA B C ØD E F G H ØK O
4 R1/8" 4 R1/8" 18,0 10,0 19,5 8,5 10,5 C01680418 4 R1/8" 4 R1/8" 48,0 10,0 3,2 11,0 22,0 8,5 13,0 10,5 10,0 C01880418
4 R1/4" 4 R1/4" 18,0 14,0 20,5 11,0 10,5 C01680428 6 R1/8" 6 R1/8" 52,0 11,0 3,2 14,0 28,0 8,5 14,0 13.0 12,5 C01880618
6 R1/8" 6 R1/8" 21,0 10,0 21,0 8,5 13,0 C01680618 6 R1/4" 6 R1/4" 55,0 14,0 3,2 14,0 28,0 11,0 14,0 13,0 12,5 C01880628
6 R1/4" 6 R1/4" 21,0 14,0 24,0 11,0 13,0 C01680628 8 R1/8" 8 R1/8" 55,0 14,0 3,2 16,0 31,0 8,5 15,0 14,5 13,5 C01880818
6 R3/8" 6 R3/8" 21,0 17,0 26,0 12,5 13,0 C01680638 8 R1/4" 8 R1/4" 57,5 14,0 3,2 16,0 31,0 11,0 15,0 14,5 13,5 C01880828
8 R1/4" 8 R1/4" 25,0 14,0 25,0 11,0 14,5 C01680828 10 R3/8" 10 R3/8" 70,5 19,0 4,2 20,5 42,0 12,5 15,0 17,5 15,0 C01881038
8 R3/8" 8 R3/8" 25,0 17,0 26,5 12,5 14,5 C01680838 10 R1/2" 10 R1/2" 74,0 22,0 4,2 20,5 42,0 16,0 15,0 17,5 15,0 C01881048
10 R3/8" 10 R3/8" 27,5 17,0 28,5 12,5 17,5 C01681038

495
Racordaje

Racores Pneufit Serie C

Métrico
Ø 3 a 10 mm O/D tubo

N
L
øK
øA
O

øD
H
C
G

B
øJ

'Y' tubo -rosca macho cilíndrica

Tubo Rosca
O/D ØA ØB C ØD G H ØJ ØK L N O
4 M5 4 M5 46,5 10,0 3,2 4,5 13,0 8,0 11,0 11,0 22,0 10,0 C02880405
6 M5 6 M5 50,0 11,0 3,2 4,5 14,0 10,0 14,0 14,0 28,0 12,5 C02880605

N
L
øK
øA
O
øD
H
C
F

ø A1
øK

'Y' unión tubos - espiga lisa

Tubo Espiga
O/D O/D ØA ØA1 C ØD F H ØK L N O
4 4 4 4 58,0 2,95 17,0 13,0 11,5 11,0 22,5 10,0 C00840404
4 6 4 6 60,0 2,95 19,0 13,0 11,5 11,0 22,5 10,0 C00840604
6 6 6 6 63,0 3,2 19,0 14,0 14,0 14,0 28,0 12,4 C00840606
8 8 8 8 68,0 3,2 21,5 15,0 16,0 16,0 32,0 13,5 C00840808

496
Racordaje

RACORES ENCHUFABLES PNEUFIT (LATÓN NIQUELADO)

Métrico
Tubo Ø 4 a 14 mm

Unidades muy compactas

caracterizadas por su sistema
de conexión.
Juntas exentas de silicona.
Todas las roscas cónicas
están recubiertas con
película sellante.
Excelente sujeción del tubo.
Conexiones rectas con
hexágono interno que
permiten el montaje en
espacios muy reducidos.
Para un montaje rápido y
simple de circuitos
neumáticos.
Gran variedad de tipos
disponibles.
Seguro y resistente a la
corrosión.

DATOS TÉCNICOS MATERIALES

Fluido: Cuerpo: Latón niquelado o
Aire comprimido nylon reforzado con fibra de
vidrio
Presión de trabajo: Pulsador de desconexión: latón
Vacío – 18 bar a menos que se niquelado
especifique lo contrario (según Junta tórica: en nitrilo exenta
especificaciones del tubo) de silicona
Temperatura ambiente: Junta plana de estanqueidad
-20°C a +80°C (roscas cilíndricas): en nitrilo
Consultar a nuestro Servicio Técnico para Película sellante: sin PTFE
temperaturas inferiores a +2°C

Medidas del tubo:

4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 mm O/D
Advertencia: Los racores
enchufables de esta sección no
deben ser utilizados en sistemas
de freno para vehículos ni
sistemas auxiliares. Tope tubo
Para racores enchufables
adecuados a estas aplicaciones Junta tórica
rogamos consulten con nuestro
Servicio Técnico.
Tubo:
Poliamida 11 ó 12, poliuretano* y Pulsador de
otros tubos plastificados o no desconexión
conforme a las tolerancias
especificadas en BS5409/1: 1976,
calidad ligera y normal, DIN Hexágono interno Cuerpo
73378, DIN 74234, NFE 49-100.
* Dureza de 92 a 98 shore A.
Película sellante

152 www.norgren.com/info/nec/es152
Conexión recta Adaptador tubo liso
Tubo Métrico y Espiga Rosca
O/D BSP cilíndrica O/D BSP cónica
4 M3 102250403 4 R1/8 101150418
4 M5 102250405 4 R1/4 101150428
4 G1/8 102250418 5 R1/8 101150518
4 G1/4 102250428 5 R1/4 101150528
5 M5 102250505 6 R1/8 101150618
5 G1/8 102250518 6 R1/4 101150628
5 G1/4 102250528 8 R1/8 101150818
6 M5 102250605 8 R1/4 101150828
6 G1/8 102250618 8 R3/8 101150838
6 G1/4 102250628 10 R1/4 101151028
8 G1/8 102250818 10 R3/8 101151038
8 G1/4 102250828 10 R1/2 101151048
8 G3/8 102250838 12 R3/8 101151238
8 G1/2 102250848 12 R1/2 101151248
10 G1/8 102251018
10 G1/4 102251028
10 G3/8 102251038
10 G1/2 102251048 Adaptador tubo liso
12 G1/4 102251228 Espiga Rosca BSP
12 G3/8 102251238 O/D cilíndrica
12 G1/2 102251248
4 G1/8 102150418
14 G3/8 102251438
4 G1/4 102150428
14 G1/2 102251448
5 G1/8 102150518
6 G1/8 102150618
Conexión recta 6 G1/4 102150628
8 G1/8 102150818
Tubo Rosca
O/D BSP cónica 8 G1/4 102150828
8 G3/8 102150838
4 R1/8 101250418
10 G1/4 102151028
4 R1/4 101250428
10 G3/8 102151038
5 R1/8 101250518
12 G3/8 102151238
5 R1/4 101250528
12 G1/2 102151248
6 R1/8 101250618
14 G3/8 102151438
6 R1/4 101250628
8 R1/8 101250818
8 R1/4 101250828
8 R3/8 101250838
8 R1/2 101250848
Unión recta
10 R1/8 101251018 Tubo
10 R1/4 101251028 O/D
10 R3/8 101251038 4 100200400
10 R1/2 101251048 5 100200500
12 R1/4 101251228 6 100200600
12 R3/8 101251238 8 100200800
12 R1/2 101251248 10 100201000
14 R3/8 101251438 12 100201200
14 R1/2 101251448 14 100201400

Conexión recta Conector pasatabiques

Tubo Métrico y BSP
Tubo
O/D cilíndrica hembra
O/D
4 M5 102260405
4 100290400
4 G1/8 102260418
5 100290500
4 G1/4 102260428
6 100290600
5 G1/8 102260518
8 100290800
5 G1/4 102260528
10 100291000
6 G1/8 102260618
12 100291200
6 G1/4 102260628
14 100291400
8 G1/8 102260818
8 G1/4 102260828
10 G1/4 102261028
10 G3/8 102261038
12 G3/8 102261238
12 G1/2 102261248

153
Racordaje

RACORES ENCHUFABLES PNEUFIT (LATÓN NIQUELADO)

Métrico
Tubo Ø 4 a 14 mm

Unión recta pasatabiques mixta

Enchufable/tuerca interior y Adaptador espiga acanalada
bicono Espiga Diámetro del tubo
O/D mm
Tubo O/D tubo
O/D compresión 5 5 100190505
4 4 100310404 6 5 100190605
6 6 100310606 6 6,3 100190606
8 8 100310808 8 6,3 100190806
10 10 100311010 8 8 100190808
12 12 100311212 10 10 100191010
Se suministra completo con tuerca interior y bicono.
12 10 100191210
12 12,5 100191212

Adaptador tubo liso desigual Silenciadores

Reductor O/D Tubo Espiga
tubo liso O/D O/D
5 4 100230504 4 100110400
6 4 100230604 6 100110600
6 5 100230605 8 100110800
8 4 100230804 10 100111000
8 5 100230805 12 100111200
8 6 100230806
10 4 100231004
10 6 100231006
10 8 100231008
12 4 100231204
12 5 100231205
12 6 100231206
12 8 100231208
12 10 100231210
14 6 100231406
14 8 100231408
14 10 100231410
14 12 100231412

Ampliador
4 6 100230406
6 8 100230608

Conexión tubo liso – latón

Espiga
O/D
4 100220400
5 100220500
6 100220600
8 100220800
10 100221000
12 100221200
14 100221400

154
Codo macho Codo orientable 90°
O/D Rosca O/D Métrico y
tubo BSP cónica tubo BSP cilíndrica
4 R1/8 101450418 4 M3 102470403
4 R1/4 101450428 4 M5 102470405
5 R1/8 101450518 4 G1/8 102470418
5 R1/4 101450528 4 G1/4 102470428
6 R1/8 101450618 5 M5 102470505
6 R1/4 101450628 5 G1/8 102470518
8 R1/8 101450818 5 G1/4 102470528
8 R1/4 101450828 6 M5 102470605
8 R3/8 101450838 6 G1/8 102470618
8 R1/2 101450848 6 G1/4 102470628
10 R1/8 101451018 8 G1/8 102470818
10 R1/4 101451028 8 G1/4 102470828
10 R3/8 101451038 8 G3/8 102470838
10 R1/2 101451048 8 G1/2 102470848
12 R1/4 101451228 10 G1/8 102471018
12 R3/8 101451238 10 G1/4 102471028
12 R1/2 101451248 10 G3/8 102471038
10 G1/2 102471048
12 G1/4 102471228
12 G3/8 102471238
12 G1/2 102471248
14 G3/8 102471438
14 G1/2 102471448
Codo orientable 90°
O/D Rosca
tubo BSP cónica
4 R1/8 101470418 Codo prolongado orientable
4 R1/4 101470428
5 R1/8 101470518 O/D Rosca
5 R1/4 101470528 tubo BSP cónica
6 R1/8 101470618 4 R1/8 101540418
6 R1/4 101470628 4 R1/4 101540428
6 R3/8 101470638 6 R1/8 101540618
8 R1/8 101470818 6 R1/4 101540628
8 R1/4 101470828 8 R1/8 101540818
8 R3/8 101470838 8 R1/4 101540828
8 R1/2 101470848 8 R3/8 101540838
10 R1/8 101471018 10 R3/8 101541038
10 R1/4 101471028
10 R3/8 101471038
10 R1/2 101471048
12 R1/4 101471228
12 R3/8 101471238 Codo orientable 45˚
12 R1/2 101471248
O/D Rosca BSP
14 R3/8 101471438
tubo cilíndrica
14 R1/2 101471448
6 G1/8 102570618
6 G1/4 102570628
8 G1/8 102570818
8 G1/4 102570828

155
Racordaje

RACORES ENCHUFABLES PNEUFIT (LATÓN NIQUELADO)

Métrico
Tubo Ø 4 a 14 mm

Codo tubo-tubo T orientable macho central

O/D O/D Métrico y
tubo tubo BSP cilíndrica
4 100400400 4 M5 102670405
5 100400500 4 G1/8 102670418
6 100400600 5 M5 102670505
8 100400800 5 G1/8 102670518
10 100401000 5 G1/4 102670528
12 100401200 6 M5 102670605
14 100401400 6 G1/8 102670618
6 G1/4 102670628
8 G1/8 102670818
8 G1/4 102670828
8 G3/8 102670838
10 G1/4 102671028
10 G3/8 102671038
Codo tubo espiga lisa
12 G1/4 102671228
Igual Espiga 12 G3/8 102671238
O/D O/D
14 G3/8 102671438
tubo
14 G1/2 102671448
4 4 100430400
6 6 100430600
8 8 100430800

Prolongado Espiga T orientable macho central

O/D tubo O/D
O/D Rosca
6 6 100440600 tubo BSP cónica
4 R1/8 101670418
4 R1/4 101670428
5 R1/8 101670518
6 R1/8 101670618
6 R1/4 101670628
8 R1/8 101670818
8 R1/4 101670828
8 R3/8 101670838
10 R1/4 101671028
10 R3/8 101671038
Codo pasatabiques tubo-tubo 10 R1/2 101671048
O/D 12 R1/4 101671228
tubo 12 R3/8 101671238
4 100490400 12 R1/2 101671248
6 100490600 14 R3/8 101671438
8 100490800 14 R1/2 101671448
10 100491000
12 100491200
14 100491400

T unión tubos
O/D
T macho central tubo

O/D Rosca 4 100600400

tubo BSP cónica 5 100600500
6 100600600
4 R1/8 101650418
8 100600800
5 R1/8 101650518
10 100601000
6 R1/8 101650618
12 100601200
6 R1/4 101650628
14 100601400
8 R1/8 101650818
8 R1/4 101650828
10 R1/4 101651028
12 R1/4 101651228

156
T macho lateral Cruz unión tubos
O/D Rosca O/D
tubo BSP cónica tubo
6 R1/8 101750618 4 100900400
8 R1/8 101750818 6 100900600
8 R1/4 101750828 8 100900800
10 100901000

T orientable-rosca macho Y unión tubos

cilíndrica lateral Igual Tubo
O/D O/D
O/D Métrico y tubo
tubo BSP cilíndrica
4 4 100820400
4 M5 102680405
6 6 100820600
4 G1/8 102680418
8 8 100820800
6 G1/8 102680618
10 10 100821000
6 G1/4 102680628
Desigual O/D Tubo
8 G1/8 102680818 tubo O/D
8 G1/4 102680828
6 4 100820604
8 G3/8 102680838
8 6 100820806
10 G1/4 102681028
10 8 100821008
10 G3/8 102681038
12 G1/4 102681228
12 G3/8 102681238
14 G3/8 102681438
14 G1/2 102681448

T orientable-rosca macho
cónica lateral Y tubo – rosca macho cónica
O/D Rosca O/D Rosca
tubo BSP cónica tubo BSP cónica
4 R1/8 101680418 4 R1/8 101880418
4 R1/4 101680428 6 R1/8 101880618
5 R1/8 101680518 6 R1/4 101880628
6 R1/8 101680618 8 R1/8 101880818
6 R1/4 101680628 8 R1/4 101880828
8 R1/8 101680818 10 R3/8 101881038
8 R1/4 101680828 10 R1/2 101881048
8 R3/8 101680838
10 R1/4 101681028
10 R3/8 101681038
12 R1/4 101681228
12 R3/8 101681238
12 R1/2 101681248
14 R3/8 101681438
14 R1/2 101681448

157
Racordaje

RACORES ENCHUFABLES PNEUFIT (LATÓN NIQUELADO)

Métrico
Tubo Ø 4 a 14 mm

Manifold tubo-tubo
Entrada Salida Banjo T
O/D tubo O/D
Tubo Métrico y
tubo
O/D BSP cilíndrica
8 4 100D60804 4 M5 10A710405
8 6 100D60806 4 G1/8 10A710418
10 6 100D61006 6 G1/8 10A710618
10 8 100D61008 6 G1/4 10A710628
2 entradas; 6 salidas. 8 G1/8 10A710818
8 G1/4 10A710828

Manifold tubo-tubo rosca

Entrada O/D Rosca
O/D Salida BSP
tubo tubo (x6) cónica
8 6 R1/4 101D60628
8 6 R3/8 101D60638 Banjo regulador
10 8 R1/2 101D60848
Tubo Rosca
O/D BSP cónica
4 R1/8 10TA00418
6 R1/8 10TA00618
6 R1/4 10TA00628
8 R1/4 10TA00828
8 R3/8 10TA00838
Banjo 10 R1/4 10TA01028
Tubo Métrico y 10 R3/8 10TA01038
O/D BSP cilíndrica 12 R1/2 10TA01248
4 M5 10A510405 Gama de presión para este producto 10 bar.
4 G1/8A 10A510418
5 M5 10A510505
6 M5 10A510605
6 G1/8A 10A510618
6 G1/4A 10A510628
8 G1/8A 10A510818
8 G1/4A 10A510828 Banjo regulador
8 G3/8A 10A510838
10 G1/4A 10A511028 Tubo Rosca
O/D BSP cónica
10 G3/8A 10A511038
6 R1/8 10T000618
Gama de presión para este producto 10 bar.

Banjo regulador
Regulación en la salida,
dirección rosca tubo
Tubo Métrico y
O/D BSP cilíndrica
4 M5 10K510405 Cuerpo de banjo (codo)
4 G1/8 10K510418 Tubo Para tornillo
5 M5 10K510505 O/D rosca
5 G1/8 10K510518 4 M5 100510405
6 M5 10K510605 4 R1/8 100510418
6 G1/8 10K510618 5 M5 100510505
6 G1/4 10K510628 6 M5 100510605
8 G1/8 10K510818 6 R1/8 100510618
8 G1/4 10K510828 6 R1/4 100510628
8 G3/8 10K510838 8 R1/8 100510818
10 G1/4 10K511028 8 R1/4 100510828
10 G3/8 10K511038 8 R3/8 100510838
12 G3/8 10K511238 10 R1/4 100511028
12 G1/2 10K511248 10 R3/8 100511038
Gama de presión para este producto 10 bar. 12 R3/8 100511238
12 R1/2 100511248

158
Cuerpo de banjo en 'T' Tornillo banjo
Tubo Para tornillo doble
O/D rosca
Métrico y
4 M5 100710405 BSP cilíndrica
4 R1/8 100710418 M5 20B000005
6 M5 100710605 G1/8 20B000018
6 R1/8 100710618 G1/4 20B000028
6 R1/4 100710628 G3/8 20B000038
8 R1/8 100710818 G1/2 20B000048
8 R1/4 100710828

Tornillo banjo triple

Tornillo banjo simple
Rosca BSP
Métrico y cilíndrica
BSP cilíndrica G1/8A 20C000018
M5 20A000005 G1/4A 20C000028
G1/8 20A000018 G3/8A 20C000038
G1/4 20A000028
G3/8 20A000038
G1/2 20A000048

Tornillo banjo regulador

Regulación en la salida Válvulas antirretorno
(Ajustable mediante Tubo Factor caudal
destornillador) O/D Cv*/C**

Caudal Métrico y 4 0,09/0,38 T50P0004

BSP cilíndrica 6 0,38/1,57 T50P0006
reg salida G1/8A 20K000018 8 0,78/3,2 T50P0008
G1/4A 20K000028 10 1,103/4,5 T50P0010
M5 20L000005 12 1,64/6,7 T50P0012
reg G1/8A 20L000018 *Cv: galones americanos/min
entrada G1/4A 20L000028 **C: dm‹/(s.bar).
G3/8A 20L000038
bi direc G1/8A 20M000018
G1/4A 20M000028
Ratio de presión para este producto 10 bar.

Tornillo banjo conexión

simple con rosca hembra
Rosca Rosca
superior tornillo
G1/8 G1/8A 20E001818
G1/4 G1/4A 20F002828
G3/8 G3/8A 20G003838

159
Racordaje

Racores enchufables Pneufit

(latón niquelado)
Pulgadas
Â" a Ë" O/D tubo

Para un montaje rápido y Medidas del tubo Dimensiones

sencillo de circuitos 1/8", 3/16", 1/4", 5/16", 3/8", 1/2" O/D
neumáticos. Advertencia: Los racores enchufables de
Excelente sujeción del tubo. esta sección no deben ser utilizados en
Gran variedad de tipos. sistemas de freno para vehículos ni
sistemas auxiliares.
Resistente a la corrosión y
Para racores enchufables adecuados a
seguro.
estas aplicaciones rogamos consulten
con nuestro Servicio Técnico.
Datos técnicos ØA ØS# ØT* V
Clases de tubo O/D tubo tope tubo
Fluido:
Poliamida 11 o 12, poliuretano y otros 1/8" 0,53 0,09 0,26
Aire comprimido tubos plastificados o no conforme a las 5/32" 0,55 0,11 0,30
Presión de trabajo: tolerancias especificadas en BS5409/1: 3/16" 0,59 0,13 0,38
1976. 1/4" 0,61 0,17 0,42
Vacío hasta 18 bar a menos que 5/16" 0,65 0,24 0,51
se especifique lo contrario 3/8" 0,83 0,30 0,59
(según especificación del tubo). 1/2" 0,96 0,38 0,71
Temperatura * estas dimensiones y las de las tablas individuales se refieren al
interior del pulsador de desconexión.
ambiente: # estas dimensiones (diámetro interior mínimo) son communes para
-20°C a +80°C. cada medida de tubo, sean racores rectos, codos, 'Y' o 'T', a no ser
que se indique lo contrario.

Materiales
Pulsador de desconexión y
cuerpo fabricados en latón
niquelado según BS 2874: 1986 Tope tubo
(CZ121)
Cuerpo fabricado en latón Junta tórica
niquelado según BS 2872: 1969
(CZ122)
Cuerpo: latón niquelado o nylon
recubierto de vidrio Pulsador de desconexión
Pulsador de desconexión: latón
niquelado
Junta tórica: caucho nitrílico Hexágono interno Cuerpo
exenta de silicona
Arandelas (roscas paralelas): Película sellante
nitrilo
Rosca sellante: sin PTFE
Para kits de cartucho ver página 574

510 www.norgren.com/info/es510
 Racores enchufables Pneufit
Pulgadas
Â" a Ë" O/D tubo

Unión recta tubo-tubo Codo tubo orientable

O/D Tubo BSP
tubo O/D cónica
1⁄8 12 020 0100 1⁄8 1⁄8 12 147 0118
5⁄32 12 020 0200 3⁄16 1⁄8 12 147 0318
3⁄16 12 020 0300 3⁄16 1⁄4 12 147 0328
1⁄4 12 020 0400 1⁄4 1⁄8 12 147 0418
5⁄16 12 020 0500 1⁄4 1⁄4 12 147 0428
3⁄8 12 020 0600 3⁄8 1⁄4 12 147 0628
1⁄2 12 020 0700 3⁄8 3⁄8 12 147 0638
3⁄8 1⁄2 12 147 0648
1⁄2 1⁄4 12 147 0728
1⁄2 3⁄8 12 147 0738
1⁄2 1⁄2 12 147 0748
Conector pasatabiques
O/D Rosca
tubo
1⁄8 M10 x 1,0 12 029 0100
5⁄32 M10 x 1,0 12 029 0200
3⁄16 M12 x 1,0 12 029 0300
1⁄4 M14 x 1,5 12 029 0400
5⁄16 M16 x 1,5 12 029 0500 T unión tubos
3⁄8 M20 x 1,5 12 029 0600
O/D
1⁄2 M24 x 1,5 12 029 0700 tubo
1⁄8 12 060 0100
5⁄32 12 060 0200
3⁄16 12 060 0300
Conexión recta 1⁄4 12 060 0400
5⁄16 12 060 0500
O/D BSP
3⁄8 12 060 0600
tubo cónica
1⁄2 12 060 0700
1/8 1/8 12 125 0118
3/16 1/8 12 125 0318
3/16 1/4 12 125 0328
1/4 1/8 12 125 0418
1/4 1/4 12 125 0428
5/16 1/8 10 125 0818
5/16 1/4 10 125 0828
5/16 3/8 10 125 0838
T orientable macho central
3/8 1/4 12 125 0628
3/8 3/8 12 125 0638 O/D BSP
3/8 1/2 12 125 0648 tubo cónica
1/2 1/4 12 125 0728 3⁄16 R1⁄8 12 167 0318
1/2 3/8 12 125 0738 1⁄4 R1⁄8 12 167 0418
1/2 1/2 12 125 0748 1⁄4 R1⁄4 12 167 0428
3⁄8 R3⁄8 12 167 0638
1⁄2 R1⁄4 12 167 0728
1⁄2 R3⁄8 12 167 0738

Conexión recta
O/D Rosca
tubo
1⁄8 M5 x 0,8 12 225 0105
3⁄16 M5 x 0,8 12 225 0305
T orientable-rosca macho
cilíndrica lateral
O/D BSP
tubo cónica
Conector tubo-tubo 3⁄16 1⁄8 12 168 0318
O/D 3⁄16 1⁄4 12 168 0328
tubo 1⁄4 1⁄8 12 168 0418
1⁄8 12 040 0100 1⁄4 1⁄4 12 168 0428
5⁄32 12 040 0200 3⁄8 1⁄4 12 168 0628
3⁄16 12 040 0300 3⁄8 3⁄8 12 168 0638
1⁄4 12 040 0400 1⁄2 1⁄4 12 168 0728
5⁄16 12 040 0500
3⁄8 12 040 0600
1⁄2 12 040 0700
SE SUMINISTRAN EN CAJAS DE 10 UNIDADES

511
 18-013, 5PG
Air Pressure Gauges
1/8" and 1/4" Port Sizes

● Monitor pressures in compressed air systems for

optimum efficiency

● Triple calibrated scale indicates pressure in psi, bar,

and Mpa (megapascal)
● Back or bottom connection

● Panel mount, stainless steel, and Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. listed gauges available

Technical Data
Fluid: Compressed air and inert gasses
Maximum pressure: 100% of full scale on gauge
Operating temperature: -30° to 175°F (-34° to 80°C)*
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below 35°F (2°C).
Accuracy:
2% of full scale at midrange
3% of full scale at other ranges

Materials
Body
Standard: Gauges may have a steel or plastic body
Optional: Stainless steel
Crystal:
Standard steel and plastic bodies have plastic crystal
Optional stainless steel body has glass crystal
Connector:
Standard steel and plastic bodies have brass connector
Optional stainless steel body has stainless steel connector

ISO Symbol

ALE-19-8 Littleton, CO USA Phone 303-794-2611 Fax 303-795-9487

 Air Pressure Gauges
All Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Ordering Information, Black Face Gauges - psi outer scale, bar middle scale, Mpa inner scale

Center Back Connection

Scale Range øA B
Outer Middle Inner 1/8 NPT 1/8 NPT 1/4 NPT R1/4
Scale Scale Scale 1.5" (40mm) 2" (50mm) 2" (50mm) 2" (50mm)

C (SQ)
psig bar Mpa Diameter Diameter Diameter Diameter
0 to 30 0 to 2 0 to 0.2 18-013-214 18-013-201 18-013-207 —
0 to 60 0 to 4 0 to 0.4 18-013-211 18-013-202 18-013-208 18-013-268
0 to 100 0 to 7 0 to 0.7 — 18-013-203 18-013-235 —
0 to 160 0 to 11 0 to 1.1 18-013-212 18-013-204 18-013-209 18-013-269
0 to 300 0 to 20 0 to 2.1 — 18-013-205 18-013-210 18-013-270
0 to 400 0 to 28 0 to 2.8 — 18-013-206 — —
A B C
1.5 (40) 1.60 (41) 0.47 (12)
2.0 (50) 1.85 (47) 0.55 (14)

Bottom Connection - 2" (50 mm) diameter gauges do not have the Mpa scale
Scale Range øA C
Outer Middle Inner 1/8 NPT 1/4 NPT
Scale Scale Scale 1.5" (40mm) 2" (50mm)
psig bar Mpa Diameter Diameter
0 to 15 0 to 1 — — 18-013-082
0 to 30 0 to 2 0 to 0.2 18-013-224 18-013-030 *

B
0 to 60 0 to 4 0 to 0.4 18-013-225 18-013-083 *
0 to 100 0 to 7 0 to 0.7 18-013-265 18-013-084 *
D (SQ)
0 to 160 0 to 11 0 to 1.1 18-013-273 18-013-085 *
0 to 300 0 to 20 — — 18-013-086 *
0 to 2000 0 to 135 — — 18-013-244 *†
0 to 3000 0 to 205 — — 18-013-087 *† A B C D
* Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed 1.5 (40) 1.42 (36) 0.90 (23) 0.47 (12)
† Shipped with pulsation dampener installed. 2.0 (50) 1.73 (44) 1.03 (26) 0.55 (14)

Center Back Connection, Panel Mounted

øA E
Scale Range 1/4 NPT Male
Outer Middle Inner and 10-32 Female
Scale Scale Scale 1.5" (40mm)
(SQ)

psig bar Mpa Diameter

øD
G

0 to 30 0 to 2 0 to 0.2 5PG-306-000 **
0 to 60 0 to 4 0 to 0.4 5PG-312-000 **
0 to 100 0 to 7 0 to 0.7 5PG-320-000 ** F (Max)
** Requires 1.63" (41 mm) diameter panel hole. C
B

A B C D E F (Max) G
1.5 (40) 1.51 (38) 0.86 (22) 1.61 (41) 0.18 (5) 0.5 (13) 0.55 (14)
Alternative Models
Pulsation Dampener: Add -9D to the end of the model number.

Littleton, CO USA Phone 303-794-2611 Fax 303-795-9487 ALE-19-9

 Air Pressure Gauges
All Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Ordering Information, White Face Gauges - bar outer scale, Mpa middle scale, psi inner scale
Center Back Connection
Scale Range
Outer Middle Inner R1/8 R1/8 R1/8 øA B

C (SQ)
Scale Scale Scale 1.5" (40mm) 2" (50mm) 2.5" (63mm)
bar Mpa psi Diameter Diameter Diameter
0 to 1.6 0 to 0.16 0 to 23 18-013-991 18-013-010 —
0 to 4 0 to 0.4 0 to 56 18-013-990 18-013-011 —
0 to 6 0 to 0.6 0 to 84 — 18-013-012 —
0 to 10 0 to 1.0 0 to 140 18-013-989 18-013-013 18-013-856
0 to 16 0 to 1.6 0 to 240 — — 18-013-855
0 to 25 0 to 2.5 0 to 360 18-013-908 18-013-014 —
A B C
Stainless Steel Gauges - gauges do not have the Mpa scale 1.5 (40) 1.77 (45)* 0.55 (14)
Scale Range 2.0 (50) 1.93 (49) 0.55 (14)
2.5 (63) 1.89 (48) 0.55 (14)
Outer Inner 1/8 PTF 1/4 PTF
Scale Scale 1.5" (40mm) 1.5" (40mm) * 1.57 (40) on 1/8 PTF stainless steel gauges
1.85 (47) on 1/4 PTF stainless steel gauges
bar psi Diameter Diameter
0 to 6 0 to 84 — 18-013-913
0 to 10 0 to 140 18-013-844 18-013-909
0 to 25 0 to 360 — 18-013-905

Bottom Connection
Scale Range
Outer Middle Inner R1/8 G1/4A øA C

Scale Scale Scale 2" (50mm) 2.5" (63mm)

bar Mpa psi Diameter Diameter
0 to 1.6 0 to 0.16 0 to 23 18-013-024 —
0 to 4 0 to 0.4 0 to 56 18-013-025 —
0 to 6 0 to 0.6 0 to 84 18-013-026 —
0 to 10 0 to 1.0 0 to 140 18-013-027 18-013-854 B

0 to 16 0 to 1.6 0 to 240 — 18-013-853 D (SQ)

0 to 25 0 to 2.5 0 to 360 18-013-028 —

A B C D
2.0 (50) 1.77 (45) 1.10 (28) 0.55 (14)
2.5 (63) 2.09 (53) 1.10 (28) 0.55 (14)

Center Back Connection, Panel Mount

Scale Range E
øA
Outer Middle Inner G1/8A G1/8A
Scale Scale Scale 2" (50mm) 2.5" (63mm)
bar Mpa psi Diameter Diameter
øD

0 to 6 0 to 0.6 0 to 84 18-013-858 * —
0 to 10 0 to 1.0 0 to 140 18-013-857 * 18-013-852 †
0 to 16 0 to 1.6 0 to 240 — 18-013-851 †
* Requires 2.01" (51 mm) diameter panel hole. F (Max)
† Requires 2.52" (64 mm) diameter panel hole. C
B

A B C D E F
2.0 (50) 2.17 (55) 1.02 (26) 1.93 (49) 0.20 (5) 0.37 (9.5)
2.5 (63) 2.20 (56) 1.06 (27) 2.44 (62) 0.24 (6) 0.37 (9.5)

ALE-19-10 Littleton, CO USA Phone 303-794-2611 Fax 303-795-9487

LUBRICADORES
L07
GΩ ... G∞

Los lubricadores Micro-fog Lubricador Micro-fog

proporcionan una fina niebla para Conexión Caudal dm‹/s Depósito Capacidad depósito – litros kg Modelo Kit mantenim.
la mayoría de aplicaciones G1/8 5 Transparente 0,03 0,13 L07-100-MPQG L07-KIT
neumáticas en general. G1/4 6,7 Transparente 0,03 0,13 L07-200-MPQG L07-KIT

DATOS TÉCNICOS
Fluido:
Sólo aire comprimido
Presión máxima de entrada: ACCESORIOS
10 bar Tuerca de montaje en panel
Caudal inicial:
0,24 dm‹/s
Caudal mínimo necesario para el funcionamiento
del lubricador a 6,3 bar de presión de entrada

Temperatura ambiente:
-20°C a +50°C 18-025-003 18-013-989 (0 ... 10 bar) 2962-89 (sólo tuerca de plástico)
Consultar a nuestro Servicio Técnico para (incluye tuerca panel 2962-89) 2962-04 (sólo tuerca metálica)
temperaturas inferiores a +2°C

www.norgren.com/info/nec/es1
135
Tratamiento del aire

SISTEMA MODULAR EXCELON

Lubricadores
L72, L73, L74
G∞ a Gª

L72
L73
L74

El diseño Excelon permite la Conexión Caudal Depósito Capacidad kg Modelo Kit mantenim.
instalación en línea o modular. dm‹/s depósito
Depósito con sistema de montaje G1/4 24 Transparente 0,04 0,49 L72M-2GP-ETN L72M-KIT
tipo bayoneta. G1/4 50 Transparente 0,1 0,49 L73M-2GP-ETN L73M-KIT
G3/8 24 Transparente 0,04 0,49 L72M-3GP-ETN L72M-KIT
El sensor de caudal proporciona G3/8 64 Transparente 0,1 0,55 L73M-3GP-ETN L73M-KIT
una relación constante aceite/aire G1/2 64 Transparente 0,1 0,55 L73M-4GP-ETN L73M-KIT
para una amplia gama de G3/8 50 Transparente con protector 0,2 0,60 L74M-3GP-QPN L74M-KIT
caudales. G1/2 70 Transparente con protector 0,2 0,60 L74M-4GP-QPN L74M-KIT
Visor de goteo de aceite que G3/4 70 Transparente con protector 0,2 0,90 L74M-6GP-QPN L74M-KIT
puede observarse desde todos los Los modelos referenciados son Micro-fog. Para modelos Oil-fog, incluyendo kits de recambio, reemplazar 'M' en el 4° dígito por 'C' ej. L72C-2GP-ETN
ángulos, simplificando el ajuste y
la instalación.
Micro-fog y oil-fog.
ACCESORIOS
DATOS TÉCNICOS Serie Conexión Soporte de montaje Quikclamp Quikclamp y soporte en
en pared pared
Fluido:
Aire comprimido
Presión máxima de entrada:
10 bar
Caudal inicial:
L72C 0,47 dm3/s L72 G1/4 4224-50 4214-51 4214-52
L72M 0,94 dm3/s G3/8 4224-50 4214-51 4214-52
L73 G1/4 4424-50 4314-51 4314-52
L73 0,71 dm3/s
G3/8 4424-50 4314-51 4314-52
L74 0,94 dm3/s G1/2 4424-50 4314-51 4314-52
Caudal mínimo necesario para el funcionamiento
G3/4 4424-50 4314-51 4314-52
del lubricador a 6,3 bar de presión de entrada
L74 G3/8 4324-50 4314-51 4314-52
Temperatura ambiente: G1/2 – 4314-51 4314-52
-20°C a +50°C G3/4 – 4314-51 4314-52
Consultar a nuestro Servicio Técnico para
temperaturas inferiores a +2°C

126 www.norgren.com/info/nec/es126
 L73C, L73M

EXCELON® 73
Lubricadores Micro-Fog® y Oil-Fog
Conexiones 1/4", 3/8", 1/2"

● El diseño EXCELON permite la instalación en línea o

modular
● Depósito con sistema de montaje tipo bayoneta
● Las modificaciones de caudal no alteran la constante
de goteo en la relación aceite/aire gracias al diseño
del sensor de caudal
● Visor prismático del depósito metálico de alta
visibilidad
● Visor de goteo de aceite que puede observarse desde
todos los ángulos, simplificando el ajuste y la
instalación
● Las series EXCELON 72, 73 y 74 pueden conectarse
entre si para aplicaciones especiales
Los lubricadores Micro-Fog se utilizan en aplicaciones que contienen uno o más
elementos de de lubricación.
Los lubricadores Oil-Fog se utilizan en aplicaciones donde se requieran partículas
de aceite grandes y pesadas (herramientas neumáticas e instalaciones con un solo
cilindro de grandes dimensiones).

Datos Técnicos Datos para el Suministro

Fluido: Aire comprimido Ver información técnica en las páginas
Presión máxima: siguientes.
Depósito transparente: 10 bar (150 psig)
Depósito metálico: 17 bar (250 psig)
Temperatura de trabajo*:
Depósito transparente: -20° a +50°C (0° a +125°F)
Depósito metálico: -20° a +80°C (0° a +175°F)
* El aire suministrado debe estar suficientemente seco para evitar la formación de hielo
a temperaturas inferiores a +2°C (+35°F). Símbolos ISO
Punto de inicio (caudal mínimo necesario para la lubricación):
0,71 dm3/s (1.5 scfm) a 6,3 bar (90 psig) de presión de entrada
Caudal máximo recomendado: 28 dm3/s (60 scfm). Si el aire fluye a
más de 28 dm3/s (60 scfm) crea una velocidad excesiva,
turbulencias y pérdidas de presión. Además, la neblina producida
por el lubricador se condensará por las paredes de la tubería y no Sin purga Con purga
será arrastrada por el aire comprimido al punto de la aplicación.
Caudal máximo con presión de entrada a 6,3 bar (90 psig) y caída
de presión a 0,25 bar (3.5 psig): 38 dm3/s (80 scfm)
Tamaño del depósito nominal: 0,1 litro
Lubricantes recomendados: Aceite industrial Norgren AIL-5
Materiales:
Cuerpo: Aluminio
Depósito:
Transparente: Policarbonato
Transparente con protector: Policarbonato, protector de acero
Metálico: Aluminio
Metálico con indicador de nivel: Nylon transparente
Visor de goteo de alimentación: Nylon transparente
Elastómeros: Neopreno y nitrilo

Dada nuestra política de investigación y desarrollo continuo, nos reservamos el derecho a cualquier
4/98 modificación, sin previo aviso en las especificaciones que figuran en este documento.
E.8.180.400.01
 L73M, L73C

Características
CARACTERISTICAS DE CAUDAL (MICRO-FOG) CARACTERISTICAS DE CAUDAL (OIL-FOG)

psid

bar d
psid

bar d

CONEXION: 3/8" PRES. ENTRADA: CONEXION: 3/8"

2,5 (36) bar (psig) PRES. ENTRADA:
bar (psig)
2,5 (36)
5 5

CAIDA DE PRESION
CAIDA DE PRESION

0,3 4,0 (58) 0,3

4 4 4,0 (58)
6,3 (90)
8,0 (116) 6,3 (90)
3 10,0 (150) 3 0,2 8,0 (116)
0,2
10,0 (150)

2 2

0,1 0,1
1 1

0 0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s 0 10 20 30 40 50 dm3/s

0 20 40 60 80 100 scfm 0 20 40 60 80 100 scfm

CAUDAL DE AIRE CAUDAL DE AIRE

Datos para el Suministro. Los modelos incluidos en esta tabla son con rosca ISO cilíndrica, purga manual y depósito
metálico con indicador de nivel en plástico.

Tipo Conexión Referencia Caudal* dm3/s (scfm) Peso kg (lb)

G1/4 L73M-2GP-QDN 28 (60) 0,50 (1.1)
Micro-Fog G3/8 L73M-3GP-QDN 28 (60) 0,50 (1.1)
G1/2 L73M-4GP-QDN 28 (60) 0,50 (1.1)
G1/4 L73C-2GP-QDN 28 (60) 0,50 (1.1)
Oil-Fog G3/8 L73C-3GP-QDN 28 (60) 0,50 (1.1)
G1/2 L73C-4GP-QDN 28 (60) 0,50 (1.1)
* Máximo caudal de aire recomendado. El caudal muy elevado provoca velocidad excesiva, turbulencias y pérdidas de presión. Ver Datos Técnicos en la página 01.

Modelos Alternativos L 7 3 ★ - ★ ★ ★ - ★★ ★
Tipo Sustituir Opciones Sustituir
Oil-Fog C Ninguna N
Micro-Fog M Visor de goteo en pyrex † P
Racor de llenado rápido Q
Conexión Sustituir
1/4" 2
3/8" 3 Depósito Sustituir
1/2" 4 Metálico con indicador de nivel plástico D
Transparente con protector P
Roscas Sustituir Metálico (indicador de nivel en pyrex† ) R
NPT A Transparente T
ISO cónica B
ISO cilíndrica G
Purga Sustituir
Dirección del caudal de aire Sustituir Depósito cerrado E
Uni-direccional P Manual 1/4 de vuelta Q
† Suministro opcional del visor de goteo en pyrex cuando el lubricador es con depósito metálico con indicador de nivel en pyrex.

Accesorios

Racor Accesorio antimanipulación Pinza sujeción rápida Quikclamp

Soporte de llenado rápido para visor de goteo y soporte montaje en pared
4424-50 18-011-024 4050-89 4314-52

Dada nuestra política de investigación y desarrollo continuo, nos reservamos el derecho a cualquier 4/98
E.8.180.400.02 modificación, sin previo aviso en las especificaciones que figuran en este documento.
 L73M, L73C

Dimensiones mm (pulgadas) 68 (2.68)

31 (1.22)

62 (2.45)

70 (2.74) **
47 (1.87)
25 (1.00)

137 (5.38) sin purga

255 (10.04) con purga *

156 (6.15) con purga

236 (9.29) sin purga *

* Mínimo espacio requerido para extraer el depósito.

** Visor de goteo opcional en pyrex.

Soporte de Montaje
Soporte de montaje Pinza de sujeción rápida Quikclamp y soporte de montaje
Utilizar tornillos de 5mm (1/4" ) para montar soporte en pared. Utilizar tornillos de 6mm (7/32" ) para soporte en pared.

60 (2.37) LCC*
24 (0.95) 51 (2.01)
38 (1.50)

67 (2.64)

LCC*
101 (3.98)

59 (2.32)

28
(1.10) 18
(0.71)
4 (0.16)
* Línea del centro de la conexión
6 (0.24)
48 (1.89)

61 (2.40)
7 (0.28)

LCC*
Referencia del Soporte
Modelo Ref.
19 (0.74)

Todos los modelos 4424-50

*Línia del centro de la conexión
Pinza de sujeción Quikclamp 4314-52

Kits de Recambio
Descripción Tipo Referencia
Kit de recambio Junta y arandela 4382-600
Kit del indicador de nivel Prismático 4380-020
Recambio purga Manual 1/4 de vuelta 619-50
El kit de recambio incluye junta del visor, junta de la purga, junta del
depósito y junta del tapón.

Dada nuestra política de investigación y desarrollo continuo, nos reservamos el derecho a cualquier
4/98 modificación, sin previo aviso en las especificaciones que figuran en este documento.
E.8.180.400.03
 L73M, L73C

Advertencia
Estos productos están destinados a que se utilicen únicamente en
sistemas industriales de aire comprimido. No utilizar estos productos
cuando la presión y temperatura puedan exceder a las especificadas en los
‘Datos Técnicos’.
Antes de utilizar estos productos con fluidos que no sean los
especificados, para aplicaciones no industriales,sistemas medico-sanitarios,
u otras aplicaciones que no se encuentren entre las especificaciones
publicadas, consultar a NORGREN.
Por mal uso, antigüedad o montaje deficiente, los componentes
utilizados en sistemas de fluidos energéticos pueden producir diversos
fallos.
Los diseñadores de sistemas deben considerar la posibilidad de
malfunción de todos los componentes utilizados en sistemas de fluidos, y
preveer las medidas adecuadas de seguridad para evitar daños personales
o desperfectos en el equipo en el supuesto de producirse tales fallos
En el caso de no poder proporcionar la protección adecuada
frente a algún fallo, los diseñadores del sistema deben advertirlo al
usuario final en el manual de instrucciones.
Tanto los diseñadores de sistemas como los usuarios finales , deberán
tener en cuenta las hojas de instrucciones que se proporcionan con estos
productos.

Dada nuestra política de investigación y desarrollo continuo, nos reservamos el derecho a cualquier 4/98
E.8.180.400.04 modificación, sin previo aviso en las especificaciones que figuran en este documento.